JP7768293B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured to hold an internal lottery when predetermined lottery conditions are met (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the gaming machines mentioned above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention provides
an awarding means for awarding a bonus value based on a predetermined awarding trigger ;
specific control execution means for executing specific control according to the total value of the given bonus numerical values;
a specific notification execution means for controlling a specific notification to be executed by a predetermined notification means as a notification regarding the bonus value;
Equipped with
As the specific notification, a first specific notification as a notification corresponding to the bonus numerical value awarded based on the establishment of the award trigger, and a second specific notification as a notification corresponding to the total value of the bonus numerical value can be executed,
When the bonus value is awarded, the first specific notification may be executed or may not be executed.
The first specific notification has a plurality of modes,
A mode determining means for determining a mode of the second specific notification in correspondence with the mode of the first specific notification that has been executed;
a first means for executing the second specific notification in the mode determined by the mode determining means, thereby executing the second specific notification that does not correspond to an actual total value of the bonus numerical value;
a second means for executing the second specific notification corresponding to an actual total value of the bonus numerical value when a predetermined condition is met after the second specific notification is executed by the first means;
Equipped with
The second specific notification may be executed in a game in which the awarding means does not award a bonus value .

This invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when three bets are made. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when two bets are made. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a bonus state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. 10 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of various transition lottery tables. 10 is a flowchart showing an AT top-up process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery table. 10A is a flowchart showing the rotation effect processing, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a winning notification. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification display performed on the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for updating the number of games played. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a CZ mode process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first AT mode transition process; 10 is a flowchart showing a first AT mode termination process; 10 is a flowchart showing a second AT mode process; 10 is a flowchart showing a first point lottery process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a point lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second point lottery process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. A diagram to explain the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous zone and the display on the zone indicator. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process performed by a sub-side display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. 10A is a flowchart showing a point process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a release process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for executing a point effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of point suggestion presentation. 10A is a flowchart showing a point effect execution process according to a second embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a used point table. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. 10 is a flowchart showing a first point process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second point process. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of point suggestion presentation. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of point suggestion presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing a point process according to a third embodiment; 13A is a flowchart showing a point effect execution process according to a fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a rank information table. 10A is a flowchart showing a point process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a release process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a bonus award value and a point award trigger according to the fifth embodiment. 10A is a flowchart showing a first AT mode termination process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for updating the number of games played. 10A is a flowchart showing a first point lottery process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a second point lottery process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a point lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a sub-point lottery table. 1A is a diagram showing the configuration of a point information storage area, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a trigger flag. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing for the award suggestion effect. 10A is a diagram showing the correspondence between the trigger flag and the type lottery table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the correspondence between the effect type and the points already produced. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table for the award suggestion effect, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the possible effect points and type allocation. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing for total suggestion presentation. A figure showing an example of a total suggestion effect. A figure showing an example of a type lottery table for total suggestion effects. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for release. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of point presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of point presentation. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of continuous performance according to the sixth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the processing for notifying specific roles. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process. 10A is a flowchart showing the process of setting the effects when all the reels are stopped, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table. 10A is a flowchart showing the process of setting the effects when all the reels are stopped, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a complete stop effect setting process according to the seventh embodiment; 10A is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table for a high probability mode, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table for a high probability mode. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing for the award suggestion effect. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-time performance setting process according to the eighth embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing the processing for the award suggestion effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing for total suggestion presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table for when a player reaches a goal. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow of the total suggestion presentation.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel-type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Figure 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Figure 5 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installed in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 in an openable and closable manner. A pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b are provided on the housing 11's left side when viewed from the front, and bearings 14a, 14b are provided on the front door 12 at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported relative to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending vertically between the support shafts 13a, 13b. Rotating the front door 12 allows the front open side of the housing 11 to be opened or closed. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its backside. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state can be released by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting the variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, which drives each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate individually, i.e., independently. The stepping motor is configured to rotate once by applying a drive signal (hereinafter referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 500 pulses. This excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. Furthermore, the reel unit 31 is equipped with a reel index sensor on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to detect when the reel has rotated once. Each time the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, described below. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before that detection signal was input.

Multiple symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the direction of its long side (circumference direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next at a specified position, it is necessary to output 25 excitation pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control unit 101 can determine which symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and can stop a specified symbol at a position visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, based on the number of excitation pulses output after the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from 0 to 19 are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are ten types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., the first symbol on the left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., the zeroth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., the fourteenth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., the second symbol on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., the eighth symbol on the left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., the ninth symbol on the left reel 32L), "White 7" (e.g., the third symbol on the left reel 32L), "Youth" (e.g., the eighteenth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red Shell" (e.g., the fourth symbol on the left reel 32L), and "White Shell" (e.g., the nineteenth symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three symbol combinations, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, of the visible symbols. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as shown in Figure 7, the combinations of these three symbols include, for example, the combination of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the combination of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the combination of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbol on the right reel 32R, as well as combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-sloping line L5 connecting the bottom symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 connecting the middle symbol on the left reel 32L, the top symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are straight lines when the symbols are lined up, while the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on curved lines besides the curved line L6, but we will not discuss them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated by betting medals, and some are not. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, the game may start with either three medals bet or two medals bet. When the game starts with either three or two medals bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the active line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as active lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as the active line ML. Also, hereinafter, a game that starts with three medals bet will be referred to as a three-bet game, a game that starts with two medals bet will be referred to as a two-bet game, and a game that starts with one medal bet will be referred to as a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

Figures 8 to 10 show the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize wins that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize win through the 32nd small prize win.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(a), when the symbol corresponding to the first small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in a line sloping downward to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the second small win is achieved. When the second small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(b), when the symbol corresponding to the second small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in a line on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the first small win described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the third minor win is achieved. When the third minor win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in alignment on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a small win different from the first and second small wins described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the fourth small win is achieved. When the fourth small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(d), when the symbol corresponding to the fourth small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in line on the upward-sloping line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the first to third small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 5th small win is achieved. When the 5th small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(e), when the symbol corresponding to the 5th small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in alignment on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the 1st to 4th small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols line up.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 6th small win is achieved. When the 6th small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small win stops on the pay line ML, "bell" symbols stop (forming a small hill) on the bottom of the left reel 32L, the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the bottom of the right reel 32R. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also allows the player to understand, from the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbols, that a small win different from the first to fifth small wins described above has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 7th small win is achieved. When the 7th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 12(a), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh minor win stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops aligned on the downward-sloping line L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 8th small win is achieved. When the 8th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 12(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th small win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops in alignment on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the 7th small win has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "watermelon" symbol is aligned.

The 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are so-called missed combinations, which are mainly awarded when the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations are missed. When the 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are awarded, one medal is paid out in a 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in a 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are achieved when the corresponding combination of the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "young man" symbol or "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "young man" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "BAR" symbol or "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor wins are all set so that the "bell" symbols do not stop aligned on a straight line (L1 to L5), making it easy to understand that a minor win corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

Incidentally, in the configuration where medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned 1st to 32nd small wins, the paid out small wins are a type of bonus awarded depending on the outcome of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as "out balls," and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (out balls) to the number of inserted (betted) medals may also be referred to as "out ball rate."

The winning combinations that grant the replay privilege, which allows you to play the next game without inserting a medal, are the 1st replay win through the 10th replay win. As shown in Figure 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the 1st replay through the 10th replay.

A first replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "white shell" or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbols stop in line on the center line L2. This makes it easy for the player to understand that a replay win corresponding to the replay has occurred.

The second and third replays are adjustment replays in the event that multiple replays result in overlapping wins.

A fourth replay wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "BAR," "cherry," "white shell," or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(d), when a symbol corresponding to a fourth replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the center reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a "missing upper row watermelon tenpai." Furthermore, when a symbol corresponding to the fourth replay win stops on the active line ML, a "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the bottom row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the middle row of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a downward-right watermelon miss.

A fifth replay wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern where the upper row watermelon is not in a tenpai state. Furthermore, when the symbol corresponding to the fifth replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the bottom row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a downward-right watermelon miss.

A sixth replay wins when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 13(a), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop in a line on the center line L2.

A seventh replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbols stop in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "replay" symbol does not stop in the middle row of the right reel 32R (instead, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern where the middle row replay is not ready.

The eighth replay is won when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. The tenth replay is won when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 13(c) and 13(d), when a symbol corresponding to an 8th or 10th replay win stops on the pay line ML, a "cherry" symbol stops on the bottom row of the left reel 32L. If an 8th or 10th replay win has been won, and a "cherry" symbol is aimed at the right reel 32R and stopped, the "cherry" symbol will stop on the top row in the case of an 8th replay win, and the "cherry" symbol will stop on the middle or bottom row in the case of a 10th replay win, making it possible to distinguish between an 8th replay win and a 10th replay win. A 9th replay win is achieved when an 8th or 10th replay win is not possible, i.e., when a miss occurs.

State transition wins that only result in a transition in game state include the 1st BB win and the 2nd BB win.

When the "White 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White Shell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a 1st BB win is achieved. When a 1st BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st BB state. As shown in Figure 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to a 1st BB win stop on the pay line ML, the "White 7" symbols line up and stop on the center line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a second BB win occurs. When a second BB win occurs, the game state transitions to the second BB state. As shown in Figure 13(f), when the symbols corresponding to a second BB win stop on the pay line ML, a "white 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a starting operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to rotate.

To the right of the start lever 41 are button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (Figure 14) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to the main control unit 101, which will be described later. The main control unit 101 then determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when a stop switch 42-44 has not been operated, the stop detection sensors 42a-44a output a LOW detection signal. When a stop switch 42-44 is operated, this detection signal switches from LOW to HIGH. The main control unit 101 detects this signal switch and determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated. When the main control unit 101 determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

In other words, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting gaming media.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means and is located on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is equipped with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47. Medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 through a medal discharge port 49 located at the bottom front of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals into an opening 48a in the discharge passage 48, and then pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. A reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from accumulating in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals accumulate above the height at which the guide plate 52a is installed, those medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 operates in mechanical conjunction, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection slot 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided below and to the left of display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting a predetermined number of virtual medals, credited as gaming media, out of the game's specified number at one time. The specified number is set depending on the game's progress. For example, if the game's specified number is set to three and the specified number is set to three, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals are inserted, provided that credits are available. If the specified number is set to two and the specified number is set to two, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted, provided that credits are available. Furthermore, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number is set to three or two and the specific number is set to three, three virtual medals are inserted, provided that there are credits available; and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number is set to three or two and the specific number is set to two, two virtual medals are inserted, provided that there are credits available.

Also, a second credit switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit switch 56. The second credit switch 57 is used to insert two virtual medals.

Each credit insertion switch 56, 57, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitutes input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, each credit insertion switch 56, 57 merely involves the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting gaming media. Note that this slot machine 10 does not have a credit insertion switch because it inserts one virtual medal at a time.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for operation by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, it is expected that players will normally operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is expected that players will normally insert a specific number of coins out of the specified number to play the game.

To the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is a performance switch 66 that is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and medals paid out when a prize is won. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 49. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored gaming media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that have been credited, a remaining payout number display unit 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display unit 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display units 60-62 are made up of 7-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with LCD displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, to the right of the payout number display unit 62, is an instruction monitor 68 that includes a push order indicator that notifies the player of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and a zone indicator that notifies the player of the operation order, thereby changing the winning rate of minor winning combinations and indicating advantageous zones that allow the player to play in an advantageous situation. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

The upper part of the front door 12 is provided with an upper lamp 63 that lights up and flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that provides various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is used to perform various display effects as the game progresses, and since the play using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back of the auxiliary display unit 65.

On the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42-44, there is a lower display unit 69 that displays the gaming machine model name and provides a specified display screen. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as an LCD display unit, or may be provided with operation buttons for presentation purposes, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply unit 91 and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch that supplies power to the main control device 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by hall managers and others to adjust the medal payout. In other words, hall managers and others can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is also operated to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10, in addition to resetting an error state.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a role ratio monitor 77 that indicates the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The role ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control unit 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, but is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. More specifically, it is housed within the board box that houses the main control unit 101 so that the display screen of the role ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is closed, the role ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps in the display windows 26L-26R, and the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be viewed unless the front door 12 is unlocked by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21 and opened. The role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in more detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 14 and 15.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is the calculation means. In addition to the power supply unit 91, the CPU 102 is connected via an internal bus to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and other components. The main control unit 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

Connected to the input side of the main control device 101 are various sensors, including the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a-44a that individually detect operation of each stop switch 42-44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

In addition, a power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply interruption state and generates a power outage signal not only during a power outage but also when the power is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, in this example 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power outage signal. The power outage signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power outage signal and executes the power outage processing described below. The power outage signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

Connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via input/output port 104 are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal path switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the winning combination monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 contains ROM 105, which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and RAM 106, which provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in ROM 105. As well as these, the CPU 102 also contains various processing circuits (not shown) required for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters, such as a credit counter that counts the number of credits. ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control program.

RAM 106 is configured to receive a backup voltage from power supply 91 and retain (back up) data even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area as well as memory for temporarily storing various data, a win flag storage area 106a for storing the results of the lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game statuses such as the BB state.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. When the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed during power outage processing (see Figure 16) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The CPU 102's NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing, which serves as a power outage flag generation process, is immediately executed.

As shown in Figure 15, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 contains a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 that provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected to the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66). The various display units 60-62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, we will explain the various control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The processes performed by the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and the normal processing performed in the main processing.

Figure 16 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101. The CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control unit 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

The power outage process first determines whether command transmission has finished. If transmission has not finished, the process ends, returns to timer interrupt processing, and ends command transmission. If command transmission has finished, the value of the stack pointer in CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in I/O port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Next, a RAM judgment value is calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting further RAM access. After performing the above process, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for a complete power outage that would prevent further processing. Note that, in case the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been recovered, and writing to RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the process enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main processing.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed, which allows the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that drive each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to spin each reel. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors connected to the input/output port 104, such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a (see Figure 14), and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract values from each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to count the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out, and output the results to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as lottery result commands (described later), to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, payout number display unit 62, and instruction monitor 68. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60-62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt enable process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt, ending this series of timer interrupt processes.

Next, we will explain the normal processing that performs the main control related to gameplay based on the flowchart in Figure 17.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In the pre-start processing, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data stored in RAM 106 (such as random number values used in the previous game) are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start wait process is performed.

The start waiting process determines whether any replay wins were achieved in the previous game. If any replay wins were achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet, and the start waiting process ends. Specifically, for example, if a replay win is achieved in a three-bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay win is achieved in a two-bet game, a process to automatically insert two virtual medals is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals. If no replay win was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading results are normal, a determination is made as to whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, a determination is made as to whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Furthermore, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends immediately.

After the start waiting process is completed, step S205 determines whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the bonus state (BB state) is set to "3," and the specified numbers in gaming states other than the bonus state are set to "2" and "3." That is, in the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "3," and in a state other than the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2" or "3." In other words, in a gaming state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been bet, or if a medal has been bet but the number of medals is "1," a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is carried out.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets for which a positive determination was made in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which serves as a sub-control device, in step S206. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 of the timer interrupt processing. Upon receiving the bet command, the display control device 81 executes processing for notifications based on bet operations (for example, notifications that the game start conditions have been met, or notifications of the lottery results from the previous game), and controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processing from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, as the system is configured so that play can begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In this case, in step S208, an active line setting process is performed to set the combination of lines corresponding to the number of bets as active lines. In other words, only the bent line L6 is set as an active line. In step S209, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state, prohibiting bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, and the medal payout process in step S212 are executed in that order, and the system returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 18.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, the gaming states are broadly divided into a normal gaming state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the specified bet numbers are set to "3" and "2" as described above, and therefore the lottery tables for the normal gaming state are set to a lottery table for a 3-bet game and a lottery table for a 2-bet game.

In other words, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the gaming state flags set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and no bonus state flags are set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and a lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. If the current game is a three-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state for a three-bet game (Figure 19) is selected, and if the current game is a two-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state for a two-bet game (Figure 20) is selected.

In addition, this slot machine 10 has six pre-prepared winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON, as well as performing a specified operation, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing will be based on. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1," the lottery table with the lowest expected value for medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6," the lottery table with the highest expected value for medal payout is selected.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed by the main processing launched by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is launched after the initialization process when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is updated as follows: "Setting 1" → "Setting 2" → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1." Each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, operating the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF is considered a confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, thereby terminating the winning probability setting process. Upon completion of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display unit 60 also terminates. The setting values set in the winning probability setting process are stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table is selected based on these stored setting values.

The lottery table will now be briefly explained. Figure 19 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Figure 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and is also set with a point value PV.

After selecting a lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when determining whether a role has been won or lost. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV. When determining whether the winning combination is a winning combination, a determination is made as to whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a win flag for the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined to be positive in step S305 is set in the win flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the seventh small win flag and the eighth small win flag are set in step S306. Furthermore, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB win flag is set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, the second BB win flag is set in step S306.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see step S203 of the normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset when the corresponding winning is achieved as one of the conditions. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid across multiple games.

In addition, in step S306, when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1st BB or 2nd BB is achieved, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a winning combination other than 1st BB or 2nd BB is not achieved, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the 1st BB winning flag will not be set. Also, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small win flag, 9th small win flag, 10th small win flag, and 13th small win flag will be set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform the lottery process using this separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is recommended to set the index values IV and point values PV in this separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB and second BB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65,535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and the following step S308 determines whether there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it determines whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the win/loss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the win/loss of the hand is judged based on this judgment value DV.

By the way, when determining whether a winning combination is achieved using the lottery table shown in Figure 19, that is, when playing a 3-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning normal lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 27.3 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 27.5 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 28.3 with setting 6, with the higher the setting value, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both approximately 1 in 26.2 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning chance eye A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is approximately 1 in 164 regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning chance eye B (probability of winning when IV = 5) is approximately 1 in 262 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning chance eye C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is approximately 1 in 16,400 regardless of the setting value, and the system is set so that chance eye B is easier to win than chance eye C, and chance eye A is easier to win than chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is approximately 1 in 107 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 104 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 93.6 with setting 6, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV = 8) is approximately 1 in 215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV = 9) is approximately 1 in 13,100 regardless of the setting value, so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. The probability of winning a common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 504 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning a normal push bell 1, normal push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle normal push bell 1, middle normal push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse pinch bell 2, reverse push bell 1, and reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is approximately 1 in 18.4 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 107 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the first BB (the probability of winning when IV = 25) is approximately 1 in 5.03 regardless of the setting value, which is set higher than the probability of winning other roles (replay, small roles, IV = 1 to 24). In a 3-bet game, the system is set so that the overlapping 1-piece role (IV = 24) and the second BB (IV = 26) do not win (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In a 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any role, including the first BB, is 0. And when the first BB has been won, the probability of not winning any role in a 3-bet game is approximately 1 in 5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the setting value. Incidentally, in a 3-bet game, before the first BB win, you can expect a decrease of about 1.50 medals per game (net increase of about minus 1.50 medals), excluding the increase in the first BB state, and in the carryover state after the first BB win, you can expect a decrease of about 2.10 medals per game (net increase of about minus 2.10 medals), excluding the increase in the first BB state.

In contrast, when determining whether a winning combination is achieved using the lottery table shown in Figure 20, i.e., when playing a two-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning Normal Lip A, Normal Lip B, Normal Lip C, Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, or Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) is the same as the probability when playing a three-bet game. The probability of winning the Common Bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 9.64 regardless of the setting value, which is set to be easier to win than when playing a three-bet game. The Push Order Bell (IV = 11 to 22) is set to be impossible to win in a two-bet game. The probability of winning the Watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, which is set to be harder to win than when playing a three-bet game. In a two-bet game, the system is set up so that a double 1-coin role (IV = 24) can be won, with a probability of approximately 1 in 1.81 regardless of the setting value. Also, in a two-bet game, the system is set up so that a first BB (IV = 25) cannot be won, but a second BB (IV = 26) can be won, with a probability of approximately 1 in 4.95 regardless of the setting value. Even in a two-bet game, the probability of not winning any role, including the second BB, is zero. And, in a situation where the second BB has been won, the probability of not winning any role in a two-bet game is approximately 1 in 4.95 (for the second BB), regardless of the setting value. Incidentally, in a two-bet game, before the second BB is won, you can expect a decrease of approximately 0.24 medals per game (net increase of approximately minus 0.24 medals), excluding the increase from the second BB, and in the carryover state after the second BB is won, you can expect a decrease of approximately 0.64 medals per game (net increase of approximately minus 0.64 medals), excluding the increase during the second BB state.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if there are no more targets to be determined in step S308, this means that the winning/losing judgment of the winning combination has been completed. In such cases, the process proceeds to step S309, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period of time.

The following step S310 performs lottery result response processing. This lottery result response processing involves processing to determine whether or not to transition the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, and processing to notify the player of the push order combination. This lottery result response processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the winning/losing role determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 during the command output processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of this game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, if push order bell 1 is won (winning when IV = 11) and the first small combination winning flag, ninth small combination winning flag, tenth small combination winning flag, and thirteenth small combination winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the first small combination, ninth small combination, tenth small combination, and thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, if a watermelon is won (won when IV = 23) and the 7th small win flag and the 8th small win flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 7th and 8th small wins can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB is set to be a winning combination only in a three-bet game, and the second BB is set to be a winning combination only in a two-bet game. Therefore, even if the first BB win flag is set, if the game starts with a two-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set stop symbol information that will result in a first BB win (stop symbol information that will avoid a first BB win is set). Also, even if the second BB win flag is set, if the game starts with a three-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set stop symbol information that will result in a second BB win (stop symbol information that will avoid a second BB win is set).

In the following step S313, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set their priorities. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priorities are set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the small win takes priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win will be won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, if a player has won the first BB (the first BB win flag is set and the first BB win has been carried over), and then wins a watermelon, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB win and the seventh and eighth small wins has been set, the priority will be set so that the seventh and eighth small wins take priority over the first BB win. Also, if a player has won the second BB (the second BB win flag is set and the second BB win has been carried over), and then wins a regular replay A, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the second BB win and the first replay, second replay, third replay, and second replay wins has been set, the priority will be set so that each replay win takes priority over the second BB win.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combinations are set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed, and no misses will occur. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win, and a bonus win will never be achieved.

After executing the processing of step S313, the number of games update processing is executed in step S314. The number of games update processing updates the number of remaining games in the premonition mode, CZ mode, and AT mode. The number of games update processing will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S315, the first interval display process is executed, and then the lottery process is terminated. The first interval display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this process will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 21.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 and the results of the lottery result response process performed in step S310. The spin effect process will be explained in detail later. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The spin start process checks whether a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels began spinning during the previous game. If not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and performs motor control initialization processing, which sets spin start information in the motor control storage area in RAM 106. By performing this processing, the stepping motor acceleration process is initiated in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning. Therefore, even if a player bets the required number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately begin spinning. The process then waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning at a predetermined constant speed, and the spin start process ends. Additionally, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 have been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate which stop switch was operated to issue the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information set in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol; a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols; a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols; and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

Then, in step S408, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reel that should be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. If they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the reel rotation. Then, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if a win occurs when IV = 11 to 22, i.e., if the push order bell is won (see Figures 19 and 20), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. For example, if the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 17th, 18th, or 21st small prize wins are achieved when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, and the stop information is set so that the 3rd small prize win is achieved when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

A brief explanation of the symbol arrangement on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R follows. In this slot machine 10, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the same symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R with a spacing of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of operation of stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that they form a section five symbols or more apart, the player must aim at the symbol and operate stop switches 42-44 to stop the symbol on an active line.

We will explain the example of when the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the 17th small win, the 18th small win, or the 21st small win.

The 17th minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. The 18th minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "young man" symbol. The 17th, 18th, and 21st minor win symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the spacing between symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any of the 17th, 18th, and 21st minor win symbols will stop on the active line (middle row) regardless of the timing of the operation.

In this slot machine 10, when an operation is performed at a timing when multiple target symbols can be stopped, stop control is performed to stop the symbol with the fewest slipping frames on the pay line. That is, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, it is possible for the fourth "red shell" symbol (2-frame slip) which is the 18th minor win symbol and the fifth "replay" symbol (3-frame slip) which is the 21st minor win symbol to stop in the middle row. However, stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so that the fourth "red shell" symbol (with the fewest slipping frames) stops in the middle row. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th minor win symbol to be achieved, the 17th and 21st minor win symbols will not be achieved.

If the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th small win symbol can be achieved.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the center reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. The "replay" symbols on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the spacing between each "replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the timing of operation of the center stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the top row of the center reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. These symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "white shell" and "young man" symbols is five symbols or more. In other words, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the 18th minor winning symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol, may or may not be able to stop on the upper row. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when it is possible to stop them on the upper row, the 18th minor winning symbol will be achieved, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when it is not possible to stop them on the upper row, a so-called miss will occur.

Here, when the "Red Shell" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the top row of the middle reel 32M, it means that, in addition to the possibility of winning the middle push bell 1 and achieving the 18th small win as described above, it also means that it may win the middle push bell 2 and achieve the 20th small win. In other words, the 20th small win symbol on the middle push bell 2 is the same as the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Furthermore, on the right reel 32R, the 18th small win symbol is the "White Shell" symbol and the "Young Man" symbol, while the 20th small win symbol is the "Red 7" symbol and the "White 7" symbol, which are different. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th and 20th small win symbols are arranged so that if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when the 18th small win symbol can be stopped on an active line, the 20th small win symbol cannot be stopped on an active line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when the 20th small win symbol can be stopped on an active line, the 18th small win symbol cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether middle push bell 1 or middle push bell 2 has been won, even if the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M are stopped in a manner that may result in the 18th or 20th small win, it is not possible to aim for this and win.

Next, we will explain an example where the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the third small win.

The "Replay" symbol, which is the third minor winning symbol, is positioned on the middle reel 32M so that the distance between each "Replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "Replay" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third minor winning symbol, is arranged so that the spacing between the "bell" symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the third minor winning symbols, the "watermelon" and "red shell" symbols, are arranged so that the spacing between these symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the third minor winning symbol will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

As mentioned above, if the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different operation sequence, depending on the operation timing, a small prize will be won, or none of the small prizes will be won and the win will be missed. Incidentally, if the common bell is won, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in step S411, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that a winning combination of symbols is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, the symbol combination formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower rows of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether a winning combination has been formed on the active line. If a winning combination has been formed, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the win flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the win flag, the slot machine 10 enters an error state and an error notification process is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, bonus state processing is performed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be explained in detail later. After the bonus state processing is performed, winning result processing is performed in step S415. The winning result processing involves processing such as transitioning the game state based on the winning result. The winning result processing will be explained in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S417, a winning result command is set to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination for this game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S212.

The medal payout process determines whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, this means that no small wins were achieved in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, based on the winning combinations set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the 1st replay win through the 10th replay wins have been achieved. If none of the replay wins have been achieved, the medal payout process ends. If any of the replay wins has been achieved, the replay setting process is performed to change the play mode to replay mode, and the medal payout process ends. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described earlier, automatic insertion processing is performed if the current play mode is replay mode.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, medals equal to the payout number are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. Specifically, when the credit counter count has not reached its upper limit (50 medals stored), the payout number is added to the credit counter count, and the resulting value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the credit counter count has reached its upper limit, or if the count reaches its upper limit while adding the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. The medal payout process also involves changing the payout number displayed in the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout. If the current game state is BB, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter (described below), and the remaining payout number displayed in the remaining payout number display unit 61 is also subtracted.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 23.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state can be determined by the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag, which are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the current state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether the first BB win flag or the second BB win flag is set, indicating that either BB has been won. If neither BB win flag is set, the bonus state processing ends. If either BB win flag is set, proceed to step S503.

In step S503, a process is performed in which 3 is input into the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The MAX bet counter is used to set a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. In other words, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when 3 has been input into the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals will be inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of medals for the game, if the specified number of medals for the game is set to two or three, it is permissible to play a two-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57. Note that if 3 has already been input into the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the MAX bet counter is set to 2 and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred. If neither of the BB wins has occurred, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB wins has occurred, the process proceeds to step S505, where it is determined whether a first BB win has occurred.

If the first BB win has been achieved, in step S506, a process is executed to input "90" into the BB counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The BB counter is a counter that determines the upper limit of the payout amount in each BB state. In other words, by inputting "90" into the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB win flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, a positive determination will be made in step S501 from the next game onwards.

In the following step S509, a first BB start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The first BB start command is a command for informing the display control device 81 that the first BB state is about to begin, and upon receiving this first BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that a first BB start effect corresponding to the start of the first BB state is performed. Furthermore, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 is able to recognize that the first BB state will begin from the next game, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that an effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the specified number of bets is set to 3 in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins for the game described above, and corresponds to the number of coins that can be bet to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L to 32R by operating the start lever 41 (in other words, the number of coins that can be bet to start the game). In other words, by transitioning to the first BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3, and the first BB state is executed in a 3-bet game.

The initial values for the specified number of bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

When it is determined in step S505 that a first BB win has not been achieved, it means that a second BB win has been achieved. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511, where the BB counter is entered with "90." That is, the second BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the second BB win flag is cleared, and in step S513, the second BB state flag is set. After that, in step S514, a second BB start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command and is a command for informing the display control device 81 that the second BB state has started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform a second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform an effect for the second BB state from the next game onwards.

The first BB start effect and the second BB start effect differ in appearance and content to the extent that they are distinguishable by the player. The effects for the first BB state and the second BB state also differ in appearance and content to the extent that they are distinguishable by the player. The processing performed by the display control device 81 when a first BB start command or a second BB start command is received will be explained in detail later.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. In other words, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

In this embodiment, the BB counter (maximum payout amount) is set to the same value when a first BB win is achieved and when a second BB win is achieved, but these values may also be different. For example, the BB counter value set when a first BB win is achieved may be higher than the value set when a second BB win is achieved, or vice versa.

If step S501 returns a positive result, indicating the first or second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515, where processing is performed during the first or second BB state. Figure 24 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. While this embodiment uses a common lottery table for the first and second BB states, separate lottery tables may be provided for each state, with different winning combinations and winning probabilities for each combination. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 25, the first and second BB states are configured to allow for winning of the normal lip A, common bell, and overlapping 1-coin combination. The probability of winning the normal lip A (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 61.2, the probability of winning the common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 5.96, and the probability of winning the overlapping 1-coin combination (the probability of winning when IV = 24) is approximately 1 in 1.31. Furthermore, in the first BB state or second BB state, the probability of a losing result (not winning any role) is approximately 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of approximately 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase of approximately plus or minus 0.00 medals), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or second BB state. In other words, although an increase in medals cannot be expected in the first BB state or second BB state, it is possible to progress through the game without losing medals.

Here, in the normal game state in a 3-bet game and the first BB state to which a 3-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase occurs when the first through sixth minor winning combinations, which result in a payout of 13 medals, are won. These combinations are the push order bell in the normal game state and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor winning combinations, assuming that stop switches 42-44 are operated in a fixed order, in the normal game state, the winning probability is approximately 1 in 9.19, while in the first BB state, the winning probability is approximately 1 in 5.96. In a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set to be more likely to result in a winning combination than the normal game state. Furthermore, in both the normal game state in a two-bet game and the second BB state to which a two-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase is the common bell, and while the probability of winning in the normal game state is approximately 1 in 9.64, in the second BB state the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 5.96, so even in a two-bet game, the second BB state is set up to make it easier to win than the normal game state.

However, as mentioned above, the first and second BB states use a lottery table in which medals may decrease with each game, so you cannot expect an increase in the number of medals you have even if you complete the first and second BB states. Conversely, it is expected that the number of medals you have will decrease as you complete the first and second BB states.

In the bonus state processing, step S515 determines whether any small wins have been achieved in the current game as a result of the lottery processing using the BB state lottery table described above and the control of each reel. If no wins have been achieved, the bonus state processing ends. If a win has been achieved, step S516 executes a process to subtract the payout amount corresponding to the win from the BB counter in the various counter area 106e described above. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the first to sixth small wins are achieved, a payout of 13 coins will be generated, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If the count is not 0 or less in step S517, the bonus state processing ends. On the other hand, if the count is 0 or less, the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is cleared in step S518. That is, if the current state is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if the current state is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, the MAX bet counter is entered with 2, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state that will end this time is set as the output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, if the first BB state is to end, the first BB end command is set as the output target, and if the second BB state is to end, the second BB end command is set as the output target. Upon receiving the first BB end command or the second BB end command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65 to perform the first BB end effect or the second BB end effect.

Then, in step S521, the specified bet number is set to 2 and 3, and the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, in the normal game state after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, since 2 is input into the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 inserts two virtual medals and a 2-bet game is played. In other words, when neither the first BB hit flag nor the second BB hit flag is set, the system is set to make it easier to play a 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, 2 is input into the MAX bet counter, so operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 does not allow a 3-bet game; instead, three medals must be inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 to play a 3-bet game.

Here, we will explain the gameplay of this slot machine 10 using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game, with reference to Figure 25.

The normal game state, in which the first BB hit flag and second BB hit flag are not set and no BB has been won, is known as the non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to 2 or 3, and both 2-bet games and 3-bet games are possible. However, if the MAX bet counter is set to 2 as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start play, it will be a 2-bet game.

If a player wins the first BB or second BB but does not win in that winning game, the internal state will be one in which the first BB or second BB win is carried over (carryover state). Even in this internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to two or three coins, allowing for two-bet and three-bet games. However, if the MAX bet counter is set to three as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start play, the game will be a three-bet game.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, in the internal state where the first BB has been won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the first BB win can be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the first BB win cannot be achieved in a 2-bet game. Also, in the internal state where the second BB has been won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the second BB win cannot be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the second BB win can be achieved in a 2-bet game. In other words, if the first BB is won in a 3-bet game, the first BB win can be achieved by continuing with the 3-bet game, but if the first BB is won and then the game is switched to a 2-bet game, the first BB win cannot be achieved. Furthermore, if you win the second BB in a two-bet game, you can achieve the second BB win by continuing to play the two-bet game, but if you switch to a three-bet game after winning the second BB, you cannot achieve the second BB win. The first BB and second BB cannot be won twice, and you cannot win the first BB again if you have a first BB win carried over, nor can you win the second BB twice. You cannot win the second BB again if you have a second BB win carried over, nor can you win the first BB twice. In other words, if you win the first BB and play a two-bet game, you will continue playing in an internal state where the first BB win is carried over, and if you win the second BB and play a three-bet game, you will continue playing in an internal state where the second BB win is carried over.

As described above, because the first BB win is only possible in a three-bet game and the second BB win is only possible in a two-bet game, even if a three-bet game results in a loss (no winning combination) while a second BB win is carried over, the second BB win will not be achieved, and even if a two-bet game results in a loss (no winning combination) while a first BB win is carried over, the first BB win will not be achieved. This dramatically simplifies the role configuration and control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the internal state where a first BB win or a second BB win is carried over. For example, if a 3-bet game is configured so that a 2nd BB win can be achieved, or a 2-bet game is configured so that a 1st BB win can be achieved, and you want to continue the internal state in which the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win has been carried over, you will need to create a lottery table that will not result in a losing outcome, and for example, in the case of a combination that may result in a miss, you will need to have a different combination win when that miss occurs.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role for increasing medals is the common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role for increasing medals in a two-bet game is the common bell, whereas the main role for increasing medals in a three-bet game is the push order bell. For the common bell, any of the first to sixth small roles will be won regardless of the operation sequence or timing of the stop switches 42-44, whereas for the push order bell, the winning small role differs depending on the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, the fluctuation in medal gain or loss due to the operation sequence and timing (mainly the operation sequence) when the push order bell is won is greater in the non-internal state and the internal state in a three-bet game than in the first BB state and the second BB state. For example, by announcing the operation sequence for winning the first to sixth small prizes when the push order bell is won, it is possible to switch between an AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists in winning and a non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) that does not, and depending on whether or not this notification (assistance) is given, it is also possible to create a state in which medals increase or decrease.

The basic flow of a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated is as follows: first, in the non-internal state, a two-bet game is played, and the second BB is won in that two-bet game. When the second BB is won, the game switches to the internal state, switching to a three-bet game, and the game continues in a state in which the second BB winning cannot be realized. In this case, as described above, in the three-bet game in which the second BB winning has been carried over, the first BB is not won, nor is the second BB won, and play continues in an internal state in which the second BB winning has been carried over.

The following will explain the gameplay, assuming that the second BB win has been carried over, and utilizing notifications (push order notifications) when the push order bell is won during that game (also referred to as normal play in the following explanation).

<Lottery result processing>
First, the lottery result response process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 26. The lottery result response process is a process performed after the lottery process for each game has been performed, and is a process for performing a lottery for transition to an AT mode in which a push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, the number of bets for the game to be started is determined, and it is determined whether the determined number of bets matches the specific specified number corresponding to the game state at that time. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started is in either of the BB states. If the game is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether the number of bets is 3. If the game is in the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether the number of bets is 2.

As already explained, the specified number of bets is set to 2 or 3 in the non-internal state before the first or second BB is won, and in the internal state after the first or second BB is won, and 3 is set as the specified number of bets in the first BB state or the second BB state. The processing of steps S602 and S603 determines whether the number of bets for the current game is a specific specified number (specific set number) that is specified (set) in association with the gaming state, and if it is not the specific specified number, the lottery result response processing ends without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) from step S604 onwards.

In other words, in this embodiment, the specific prescribed number for the non-internal state and internal state is set to 3, and while display mode processing is executed in a 3-bet game, display mode processing is not executed in a 2-bet game. Also, in this embodiment, the specific prescribed number for the first BB state and second BB state is set to 3, and since the prescribed bet number is set to 3 in each of these BB states, a 2-bet game is not executed, and display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state or second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if a two-bet game is played in a certain internal state, the lottery for transition to AT mode from step S604 onwards will not be held, putting the player at a disadvantage. By doing this, the internal state can be set to a three-bet game, making it easier to play normal gameplay that carries over the second BB state.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602 or step S603, step S604 determines whether or not a favorable zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this slot machine 10, regarding whether or not push order notifications, etc., will occur, there are set advantageous zones in which such notifications may occur, and normal zones in which they may not occur. The advantageous zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the current game is in an advantageous zone, and is set upon transition to an advantageous zone and cleared upon transition to a normal zone.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set, this means that the current game is in the normal zone. In this case, the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result response process is terminated.

In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery results for the current game are obtained in step S701. Then, in step S702, a advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 29, the advantageous zone transition lottery table has the transition rate to the advantageous zone (the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) set according to the lottery results for each game. The triggers for the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone are normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as triggers for the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S702, processing is performed in step S703 to obtain a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is generated using a dedicated counter in the various counter areas 106e. This dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined interval, and in step S703, the most recent updated value of that counter is obtained. Then, in step S704, a favorable zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery table is set so that any trigger role has a 100% chance of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, if it is determined that the game result determined in step S701 is a trigger role for the transition lottery (not a losing result), it is possible to omit processing in steps S702 to S705.

If the transition lottery is won in step S705, a favorable zone winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S706. The favorable zone winning game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the current game is a winning game in the transition lottery to the favorable zone. If a negative judgment is made in step S705, or after the processing of step S706 has been executed, the favorable zone transition lottery processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response processing (Figure 26), if the advantageous zone flag is set in step S604, proceed to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether the first AT flag or second AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

In this embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode are set, which have different probabilities for winning the number of continuing games in the AT mode and the number of AT mode games added. The first AT flag and second AT flag are flags that allow the CPU 102 to determine whether the game is in AT mode and its type. These AT flags are set when transitioning to AT mode. If none of the AT flags are set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S606, AT addition processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery processing>
The AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the AT lottery process, first, in step S801, the lottery result for the current game is determined. In the following step S802, it is determined whether the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If the first AT flag is not set, i.e., if the first AT mode is not in effect, the process proceeds to step S803, where it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 is 0. In this embodiment, if the number of games in which the player has not won the first AT mode transition lottery while remaining in the advantageous zone (the number of games in a losing streak) reaches a predetermined ceiling number of games (e.g., 700 games), the system is configured to transition to the first AT mode regardless of the result of the first AT mode transition lottery. The ceiling counter is used by the CPU 102 to determine the number of games remaining until the ceiling number of games is reached. The process in step S803 determines whether the remaining number of games has reached 0, i.e., whether the ceiling number of games has been reached.

If a negative judgment is made in step S803 (if the value of the ceiling counter is not 0), the process proceeds to step S804, where it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106. The CZ flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that CZ mode is in progress, and is set when CZ mode begins and cleared when CZ mode ends. In this embodiment, normal mode and CZ (chance zone) mode are provided as advantageous zones before winning the lottery to transition to AT mode, and CZ mode is set as a mode in which it is easier to win the lottery to transition to AT mode than normal mode.

If the CZ flag is not set in step S804, i.e., if the mode is normal, then in step S805, a normal first AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the normal first AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 29, the transition rate to the first AT mode (probability of winning the first AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery results of each game.

On the other hand, if the CZ flag is set in step S804, i.e., if the game is in CZ mode, then in step S806, a first AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the first AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode, the transition rate to the first AT mode is also set according to the lottery results of each game, as shown in FIG. 29.

In this embodiment, in both the normal first AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ mode first AT mode transition lottery table, the trigger roles for the first AT mode transition lottery are set to be normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal mode and CZ mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as trigger roles for the first AT mode transition lottery. However, in the CZ first AT mode transition lottery table, the transition rate to first AT mode when winning chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, or watermelon is higher than in the normal first AT mode transition lottery table, and the transition rate to first AT mode is favored.

Note that the trigger role for the first AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above, and may be configured to trigger only some of the results that can be won in normal mode and CZ mode play as a 3-bet game carrying over the second BB, such as for the first AT mode transition lottery to be executed only when some of the chance symbols are won.

After step S805 or step S806 is executed, the process proceeds to step S807, where a first AT mode lottery process is executed. In the first AT mode lottery process, a random number for the first AT mode transition lottery is acquired, and a lottery for the first AT mode is executed using the acquired random number, the lottery result determined in step S801, and the first AT mode transition lottery table acquired in step S805 or step S806. In the following step S808, it is determined whether or not the transition to the first AT mode was successful in the first AT mode lottery process of step S807. If successful, the first AT mode winning process of steps S809 to S813 is executed, and if not successful, the first AT mode non-winning process of steps S814 to S819 is executed.

Here, the first AT mode is a mode in which push order notifications corresponding to the first to sixth minor roles are generated when the push order bell is won, and is a mode in which a large increase in medals can be expected. Once the first AT mode is entered and push order notifications are generated, it becomes possible to achieve the first to sixth minor role wins when each push order bell is won. In this embodiment, the net increase in coins per game during the first AT mode is approximately 8.04 coins. The initial number of games in the first AT mode is 15, and the remaining number of games is increased by winning the additional lottery. The first AT mode ends when the remaining number of games reaches 0.

If the first AT mode transition lottery is won in step S808, the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter area 106e is cleared (set to 0) in step S809. In the following step S810, it is determined whether the value of the loss counter provided in the various counter area 106e is 0. The role of the loss counter will be described later. If the value of the loss counter is not 0 in step S810, the value of that counter is cleared in step S811.

After step S811 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step S810 (the value of the miss counter is 0), a first AT winning flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106 in step S812. The first AT winning flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the first AT mode has been won. In the following step S813, a first AT winning command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery processing is terminated. The first AT winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the first AT mode transition lottery has been won.

If a negative judgment is made in step S808 (if the first AT mode has not been entered), the process proceeds to step S814, where it is determined whether the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the CZ flag is not set, i.e., if the game is in normal mode, the CZ mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a in ROM 105 in step S815. As shown in FIG. 29, the CZ mode transition lottery table sets the transition rate to CZ mode (the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery) according to the lottery results of each game. In this embodiment, the trigger roles for the CZ mode transition lottery are: normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as trigger roles for the CZ mode transition lottery.

Note that the trigger role for the CZ mode transition lottery is not limited to the above, and may be configured to trigger only some of the results that can be won in normal mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, such as for example, the AT mode transition lottery being executed only when some of the chance symbols are won.

After the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S815, CZ mode lottery processing is executed in step S816. In the CZ mode lottery processing, a lottery for transition to CZ mode is performed based on the acquired CZ mode transition lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In step S817, it is determined whether or not the transition to CZ mode has been won in the CZ mode lottery processing of step S816.

If the CZ mode transition lottery has been won in step S817, proceed to step S818, where a CZ win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The CZ win flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. In step S819, a CZ win command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery processing is terminated. The CZ win command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won.

If a positive judgment is made in step S814 (if the player is in CZ mode) or a negative judgment is made in step S817 (if the player has not won the CZ mode transition lottery), the AT lottery process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S802 (if the vehicle is in first AT mode), the process proceeds to step S820, where a second AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. In other words, in this embodiment, the lottery for transition to second AT mode is conducted only when the vehicle is in first AT mode.

In the second AT mode, like the first AT mode, when the push order bell is won, push order notifications corresponding to the first through sixth minor roles are generated, and it is a mode in which many medals can be expected to increase. In both the first and second AT modes, a game count addition lottery is held to add to the number of games played, but the game count addition rate in the second AT mode is more favorable than that in the first AT mode. In other words, the second AT mode is a higher-ranking AT mode than the first AT mode, or in other words, it is an AT mode that is more advantageous for players than the first AT mode.

In the second AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in Figure 29, the transition rate to the second AT mode (probability of winning the second AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery results of each game. In this embodiment, the trigger roles for the second AT mode transition lottery are set as Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, and Watermelon. In other words, in play in the first AT mode as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, some of the possible winning results are set as trigger roles for the second AT mode transition lottery.

Note that the trigger role for the second AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above, and for example, as with the first AT mode transition lottery, all possible results that can be won in normal mode play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over may be the trigger role.

After the second AT mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S820, the second AT mode lottery process is executed in step S21. In the second AT mode lottery process, a lottery for transition to the second AT mode is performed based on the acquired second AT mode transition lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In step S822, it is determined whether or not the second AT mode lottery process of step S821 has been won.

If the second AT mode transition lottery is not won in step S822, the AT lottery processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the second AT mode transition lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S823, where a second AT win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The second AT win flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the second AT mode transition lottery has been won. In step S824, a second AT win command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery processing is terminated. The second AT win command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the second AT mode transition lottery has been won.

<AT top-up processing>
The AT addition process in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 30. As already explained, the AT addition process is a process executed when the AT flag is set, and is a process for adding to the number of continuing games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first in step S901, the lottery result for the current game is determined. In the following step S902, it is determined whether the first AT flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The first AT flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the first AT mode is in effect.

If the first AT flag is set in step S902 (if the system is in first AT mode), then in step S903, the first AT add-on lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. On the other hand, if the first AT flag is not set in step S902, this means that the system is in second AT mode. In this case, the system proceeds to step S904, where the second AT add-on lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in Figure 31, the bonus lottery table for each AT mode sets the bonus winning rate according to the game lottery results and the type of AT mode. Comparing the first AT bonus lottery table with the second AT bonus lottery table, it is easier to win the bonus lottery using the second AT bonus lottery table than the first AT bonus lottery table. For example, in the bonus lottery triggered by Cherry B, the bonus lottery using the first AT bonus lottery table has a 15% chance of winning, while the bonus lottery using the second AT bonus lottery table has a 30% chance of winning. After switching to the AT mode, the probability of winning the bonus lottery is higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

After the add-on lottery table is obtained in step S903 or step S904, an add-on lottery process is executed in step S905. In the add-on lottery process, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add on to the number of games based on the add-on lottery table for each AT mode obtained above and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In step S906, it is determined whether or not the player has won the add-on lottery process in step S905 to add on to the number of games.

If the number of games added is not won, the AT addition process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of games added is won, proceed to step S907 and the number of games added lottery process is executed. In the number of games added lottery process, the number of games added table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a and the number of games added this time is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 31, the number of games added table is set so that the number of games added varies depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, when the addition is triggered by a normal lip B, an average of 100 games are added, while when the addition is triggered by a cherry A, an average of 15 games are added. In other words, the number of games added is greater when the addition is triggered by an opportunity that is less likely to win the lottery for the addition.

In step S908, a process is executed to add the current number of added games drawn in the add-on game number drawing process of step S907 to the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The AT counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the AT mode. After step S908 is executed, in step S909, an add-on command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this AT add-on process is terminated. The add-on command includes information indicating that the number of games will be added and the number of added games. Upon receiving this command, the display control device 81 executes a process to display an add-on notification effect corresponding to the addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

<Rotation effect processing>
Here, the spin effect process of step S401 in the reel control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32(a). In this embodiment, a win in the first AT mode is notified by stopping a specific symbol combination in the display windows 26L to 26R corresponding to each of the reels 32L to 32R, and the spin effect process is performed for this purpose.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the CZ flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine whether or not it is in CZ mode. If the CZ flag is not set (if it is not in CZ mode), the spin effect processing is terminated. If the CZ flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1002, where it is determined whether or not the first AT win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

If the first AT winning flag is not set, the rotation effect processing ends. If the first AT winning flag is set (if the first AT mode transition lottery has been won), the first AT winning flag is cleared in step S1003, and then a first AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1004. The first AT start flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the first AT mode should be started.

After step S1004 is executed, step S1005 is set to execute a spin effect for the first AT notification. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(b), after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins, the "red 7" symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped) on a predetermined line (downward-right line L4) as the first AT symbol combination corresponding to the first AT, and then the rotation of each reel 32L to 32R resumes. This spin effect for the first AT notification is executed during the inactive period after the game starts and before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective. In this embodiment, the first AT mode is a so-called pseudo-bonus.

In the following step S1006, a first AT notification command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this rotation effect processing is terminated. The first AT notification command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that a first AT mode win will be announced in this game by a first AT notification rotation effect.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the first AT mode win is announced by a first AT announcement spin effect using each of the reels 32L to 32R in the game following the game in which the first AT mode win is announced, or in the game after the CZ mode ends. At the same time, a first AT start flag is set to initiate the transition to the first AT mode, and the game following the win announcement transitions to the first AT mode. When the first AT mode is entered, an announcement can be made regarding the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the push order bell is won.

The operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is notified in steps S609-S612 of the lottery result processing (Figure 26). That is, after the AT lottery processing or AT addition processing is performed in step S607 or step S608, the push order notification processing is performed in steps S609-S612.

<Outline of push order notification>
Prior to explaining the push order notification process, an overview will be given of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that the push order notification and push order notification effect can also be referred to as push order navigation, sequence notification, or mode notification, for example. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control unit 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control unit 101. In contrast, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control unit 81, and the push order notification effect is performed by the display control unit 81.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to Figure 33. Figure 33(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and Figure 33(b) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display mode and display content of the instruction monitor 68.

As shown in Figure 33(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has its own light source made up of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to individually display predetermined symbols (including letters and numbers). Note that since all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed on all of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1-N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" through "6." The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right corner of the area where the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are located. Therefore, the indicator monitor 68 can at least display "1" through "6," "1." through "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as the indicator monitor 68 can individually display multiple patterns of symbols, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1-N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight, or even nine segments, is also possible. Furthermore, it is not necessary for each display segment N1-N8 to display the same color; the color displayed by each display segment N1-N8 can be changed as needed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to control the on/off of each display segment N1-N8 by turning the light source on and off; as long as the display can be individually controlled for each display segment N1-N8, the segment display can be constructed using a single backlight and LCD display. Furthermore, rather than applying a segment display to each display area, symbols can be displayed using other types of display devices, such as an LCD display, organic EL display, CRT, or dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the push-order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b), if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "left" → "center" → "right," the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 will light up to display "1." Furthermore, if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "right" → "left" → "center," the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 will light up to display "5." In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in accordance with the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 lights up in the game in which the start conditions are met, including notification conditions that cause a transition to the advantageous zone and the possibility of a push order notification. It also turns off when the AT mode ends and the game transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone in which the operation order of the push order bell and other indicators is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner. The eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during specific zones in which the player can actually benefit from the push order notification, and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, or during non-specific zones that are advantageous zones but are not specific zones.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 as a push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, is located near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 through 44, which are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is not located on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the positions where the stop switches 42 through 44 are located. This prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being obscured by the hands operating the stop switches 42 through 44, and it can be said that it is located in a position that is easy for players to see. Furthermore, because it is located near the payout number display unit 62, which is easily visible to players who are playing the game in an effort to win medals, it can be said that players are less likely to miss it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED of the eighth display segment N8 on the instruction monitor 68 is set so that it is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display elements (e.g., the payout number display element 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display elements are both controlled to emit light (i.e., lit), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The brightness of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher brightness toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display elements (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, reducing the likelihood of missing it when it is lit.

Next, the push order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 34. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using the example of a case where the push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left.

As shown in Figure 34(a), on the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42-44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (in the figure, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button display is also displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning combination for this game and that the middle stop switch 43 is the stop switch that should be operated first. Furthermore, on the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3, indicating that the next stop switch that should be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch that should be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When a player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in Figure 34 (b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in Figure 34 (c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed larger. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the timing of the push order notification, the notification is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42-44, from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R begins, through an acceleration period, and up to a constant speed rotation. By configuring the notification to be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 before operating them as desired, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo.

The following explains the process for notifying the button press order in steps S609 to S612.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game was a push order bell win. If the push order bell win was a win, in step S610 it is determined whether the first AT flag or the second AT flag is set. If either AT flag is set, in step S611, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that push order notifications corresponding to the first to sixth small wins are made according to the type of push order bell this time. Then, in step S612, a push order notification command containing information on the operation sequence corresponding to the first to sixth small wins is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this push order notification process is terminated. Upon receiving this push order notification command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 so that push order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth small wins are made.

If the push order bell is not won in step S609, or if no AT flags are set in step S610, the lottery result response processing ends.

<Game count update process>
The number of games updated process in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 35. In the number of games updated process, the number of games remaining up to the ceiling number of games, the number of games remaining in the CZ mode, the number of games remaining in the AT mode, etc. are updated.

In the game count update process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started is in one of the BB states. If it is not in the BB state, in step S1102 it is determined whether the number of bets is 3. If it is in the BB state, it is determined in step S1103 whether the number of bets is 2. In other words, the processes of steps S1101 to S1103 correspond to the processes of steps S601 to S603 above, and are processes for determining whether the number is a specific specified number specified in association with the game state.

If a negative judgment is made in each of the processes in step S1102 and step S1103, the process for updating the number of games is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in each of these processes, the process proceeds to step S1104, where it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The advantageous zone flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine whether or not the game is currently in an advantageous zone.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set (if the game is not in an advantageous zone), the game count update process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is set (if the game is in an advantageous zone), the process proceeds to step S1105, where it is determined whether any of the AT win flags have been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT win flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether the AT transition lottery has been won.

If none of the AT winning flags are set, step S1106 determines whether any of the AT flags are set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the AT mode is in effect. If none of the AT flags are set, the process proceeds to step S1107, where the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106 is updated by subtracting 1.

In the following step S1108, the value of the miss counter provided in the various counter area 106e is updated by subtracting 1.

Now, let's explain the loss counter. In this embodiment, the system is configured to award internal points as the game progresses. These points are awarded through a lottery process that consists of a lottery to determine whether or not points will be awarded, and a point number lottery to determine the number of points to be awarded if any. When points are awarded, they are not limited to one game, but are cumulatively added. When the total points reach a bonus award value (for example, 5 points), the player is awarded a specified bonus.

A point-awarding lottery is held when an undesirable event occurs for the player, and with this configuration, the player's disappointment can be alleviated by awarding points. In this embodiment, multiple triggers are provided to trigger the execution of such a point-awarding lottery, one of which is when the number of games in which the player does not win the first AT mode transition lottery while remaining in the advantageous zone (number of stuck games) reaches a specific number (e.g., 600 games). The loss counter counts the number of games remaining up to the specific number, and as described above, is decremented by one each time a game in which the player does not win the first AT mode transition lottery while remaining in the advantageous zone is played. The point-awarding lottery and the benefits that are awarded when the total points reach the benefit award value will be explained in detail later.

After step S1108 is executed, in step S1109, it is determined whether the value of the loss counter is 0. A loss counter value of 0 means that the number of games remaining until the specified number is reached is 0; in other words, it means that the number of games in a losing streak has reached the specified number. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1110, where a point lottery flag A is set in the flag storage area 106d. The point lottery flag A is used by the CPU 102 to determine that a point award lottery execution trigger has occurred. In step S1111, a point trigger command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The point trigger command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that a point award lottery execution trigger (point award trigger) has occurred. Note that in this embodiment, multiple triggers are set as point award triggers, and the point trigger command includes information indicating that a point award trigger has occurred, as well as information indicating which trigger this point award trigger is.

After executing step S1111, if a positive judgment is made in step S1105 (if any AT win flag is set) or a negative judgment is made in step S1109 (if the value of the miss counter is not 0), proceed to step S1112, where it is determined whether or not a CZ flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The CZ flag is a flag that indicates that CZ mode is in effect.

If the CZ flag is set (if CZ mode is in progress), processing is performed in step S1113 to subtract 1 from the value of the CZ counter. This updates the number of games remaining in CZ mode. In step S1114, a CZ game count update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The CZ game count update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of games remaining in CZ mode has been updated. After execution of step S1114 or if a negative judgment is made in step S1112 (if not in CZ mode), this game count update processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1106 above (if the game is in AT mode), processing is performed in step S1115 to subtract 1 from the value of the AT counter. This updates the number of games remaining in AT mode. In step S1116, an AT game count update command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this game count update processing is terminated. The AT game count update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of games remaining in AT mode has been updated.

<Processing for winning results>
The winning result response process of step S415 in the reel control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 36. In the winning result response process, processing is performed to start or end the CZ mode, AT mode, etc., depending on the game result. Note that this process is executed when all reels 32L to 32R have stopped (when the game has ended).

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and a determination is made as to whether the game to be started is in one of the BB states. If it is not in the BB state, in step S1202 it is determined whether the number of bets is 3. If it is in the BB state, in step S1203 it is determined whether the number of bets is 2. In other words, the processing of steps S1201 to S1203 corresponds to the processing of steps S601 to S603 above, and is processing to determine whether the number is a specific specified number specified in association with the game state.

If a positive judgment is made in each of steps S1202 and S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204, where CZ mode processing is executed to start CZ mode or end CZ mode. In step S1205, first AT mode transition processing is executed to start first AT mode, and in step S1206, first AT mode termination processing is executed to end first AT mode. In step S1207, second AT mode processing is executed to start second AT mode or end second AT mode. In step S1208, first point lottery processing is executed to hold a point award lottery. After step S1208 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S1202 or if a negative judgment is made in step S1203, this winning result response processing is terminated.

<CZ mode processing>
The CZ mode processing in step S1204 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether a CZ winning flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The CZ winning flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine whether the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. If the CZ winning flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S1302, where the winning flag is cleared, and then in step S1303, the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. This starts CZ mode (transition to CZ mode).

In step S1304, a process is executed to input a predetermined value (e.g., a value equivalent to 10 games) as the initial value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The CZ counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in CZ mode, and is decremented by one for each game played. Note that the initial value of the CZ counter (initial number of games in CZ mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games; for example, multiple numbers of games may be selected by lottery.

After execution of step S1304, in step S1305, a CZ start command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this CZ mode processing is terminated. The CZ start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that a transition to CZ mode has occurred. The CZ start command includes information indicating a transition to CZ mode, as well as information indicating the initial number of games in CZ mode. Therefore, by receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 can determine that a transition to CZ mode has occurred and the number of games in CZ mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1301 (the CZ win flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1306, where it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, i.e., whether or not the CZ mode is in effect. If the CZ flag is set (if the CZ mode is in effect), it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter area 106e is 0.

If the value of the CZ counter is 0 (the number of games remaining in CZ mode is 0), proceed to step S1308 and clear the CZ flag set in the various flag storage area 106d. This ends CZ mode. In step S1309, a CZ end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The CZ end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that CZ mode has ended.

After execution of step S1309, in step S1310, it is determined whether the first AT winning flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT winning flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine whether the first AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the first AT winning flag is set, i.e., if the first AT mode transition lottery has been won during CZ mode, the CZ mode processing is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the first AT winning flag is not set (if the first AT mode transition lottery is not won during CZ mode), proceed to step S1311 and set the point lottery flag B in the various flag storage area 106d. The point lottery flag B is used by the CPU 102 to determine that an opportunity to execute the point awarding lottery has been met. In other words, in this embodiment, one of the opportunities to execute the point awarding lottery is when the transition to CZ mode has been made but the CZ mode has ended without the player being able to win the first AT mode transition lottery.

In the following step S1312, a point trigger command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The point trigger command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that a point awarding trigger has occurred. After step S1312 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S1306 (if not in CZ mode) or if a negative judgment is made in step S1307 (if the number of games remaining in CZ mode is not 0), this CZ mode processing is terminated.

<Processing for transition to first AT mode>
The first AT mode transition process in step S1205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If the CZ flag is not set (if the game is not in CZ mode), the program proceeds to step S1402, where it is determined whether the first AT win flag or any of the AT flags is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

If the first AT winning flag is not set and no other AT flags are set (it is not a first AT mode winning game and the game is not in AT mode), step S1403 determines whether a first AT mode start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT mode start flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the first AT mode should be started.

If the flag for starting the first AT mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1404, where the flag for starting the first AT mode is cleared, and in step S1405, the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. This starts the first AT mode (transition to the first AT mode). In step S1406, a process is executed to input a predetermined value (e.g., a value equivalent to 15 games) as the initial value of the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The AT counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the AT mode, and is decremented by one for each game. Note that the initial value of the AT counter (initial number of games in the AT mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games; for example, multiple numbers of games may be selected by lottery.

In step S1407, the first AT start command is set as the output target to the display control device 81. The first AT start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the first AT mode has been entered. The first AT start command includes information indicating the transition to the first AT mode, as well as information indicating the initial number of games in the first AT mode. Therefore, by receiving the first AT start command, the display control device 81 can determine that the first AT mode has been entered and the number of games in the first AT mode.

After executing step S1407, if a positive judgment is made in step S1401 (if the CZ mode is in effect), if a positive judgment is made in step S1402 (if the first AT win flag is set or any of the AT flags is set), or if a negative judgment is made in step S1403 (if the first AT start flag is not set), the first AT mode transition process is terminated.

<Processing for Ending First AT Mode>
The first AT mode termination process in step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If the first AT flag is not set (the game is not in first AT mode), the first AT mode termination process is terminated. If the first AT flag is set (the game is in first AT mode), the process proceeds to step S1502, where it is determined whether the value of the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 is 0. If the value of the AT counter is not 0, that is, if the number of games remaining in first AT mode is 1 or more, the first AT mode termination process is terminated to continue the first AT mode. On the other hand, if the value of the AT counter is 0 (the number of games remaining in first AT mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1503, where the first AT flag set in the various flag storage area 106d is cleared. This terminates the first AT mode.

In step S1504, it is determined whether the second AT win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second AT win flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine whether the second AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the second AT win flag is set, i.e., if the second AT mode transition lottery is won while in the first AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1505, where the second AT win flag is cleared. In step S1506, a second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the first AT mode termination process is terminated. The second AT start flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the second AT mode should be initiated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1504 above (the second AT winning flag is not set), i.e., if the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, proceed to step S1507, where it is determined whether the value of the PT counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 is 5 or greater. As already explained, this embodiment is configured to award a bonus to the player when the total points reach a bonus award value (e.g., 5 points); the processing of this step is to determine whether the total points have reached the bonus award value.

If the PT counter value is 5 or greater and the total points have reached the bonus value, the process proceeds to step S1508, where the PT counter value is cleared to 0. In step S1509, a point achievement command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The point achievement command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the total points have reached the bonus value. After step S1509 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1506, where a second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

In other words, in this embodiment, even if the second AT mode transition lottery is not won during the first AT mode, if the total points reach the bonus value, the system is configured to transition to the second AT mode after the end of the first AT mode, and this is the bonus that is awarded when the total points reach the bonus value. Note that there are also cases where the second AT mode transition lottery is won during the first AT mode when the total points have reached the bonus value. In that case, the transition to the second AT mode is made without consuming the total points, and the total points are carried over to the next and subsequent first AT mode sessions.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1507 (if the value of the PT counter is less than 5), the process proceeds to step S1510, where a first AT end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT end flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the first AT mode has ended. In step S1511, a first AT end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The first AT end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the first AT mode has ended.

In step S1512, a point lottery flag C is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The point lottery flag C is used by the CPU 102 to determine that an opportunity to execute a point awarding lottery has been realized. In other words, in this embodiment, one of the opportunities to execute a point awarding lottery is when the first AT mode is terminated without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, even though the first AT mode has been successfully transitioned to. In the following step S1513, a point trigger command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this first AT mode termination process is terminated.

<Processing for Second AT Mode>
The second AT mode process in step S1207 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in steps S1601 and S1602, it is determined whether the CZ flag or the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If either of these flags is set (either in CZ mode or first AT mode), the second AT mode processing is terminated. On the other hand, if neither the CZ flag nor the first AT flag is set (neither in CZ mode nor first AT mode), the process proceeds to step S1603, where it is determined whether the second AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

If the second AT flag is not set, step S1604 determines whether a second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the second AT start flag is not set, the second AT mode processing ends. On the other hand, if the second AT start flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1605, where the second AT start flag is cleared, and the second AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1606. This starts the second AT mode (transition to the second AT mode).

In step S1607, a process is executed to input a predetermined value (e.g., a value equivalent to 40 games) as the initial value of the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Note that the initial value of the AT counter in the second AT mode (initial number of games in the AT mode) does not necessarily have to be larger than the initial value of the AT counter in the first AT mode; it may be the same value or a value smaller than the initial value of the AT counter in the first AT mode. Also, the initial value of the AT counter in the second AT mode does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games; for example, multiple numbers of games may be selected by lottery.

Next, in step S1608, a second AT start command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this second AT mode processing is terminated. The second AT start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the mode has been switched to the second AT mode. The second AT start command includes information indicating the mode has been switched to the second AT mode, as well as information indicating the initial number of games in the second AT mode. Therefore, by receiving the second AT start command, the display control device 81 can determine that the mode has been switched to the second AT mode and the number of games in the second AT mode.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1603 above (if the second AT flag is set), the process proceeds to step S1609, where it is determined whether the value of the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 is 0. If the value of the AT counter is not 0, that is, if the number of games remaining in the second AT mode is 1 or more, the second AT mode processing is terminated to continue the second AT mode. On the other hand, if the value of the AT counter is 0 (if the number of games remaining in the second AT mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1610, where the second AT flag set in the various flag storage area 106d above is cleared. This ends the second AT mode.

In step S1611, a second AT end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second AT end flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the second AT mode has ended. In step S1612, a second AT end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the second AT mode processing is terminated. The second AT end command is a command used to notify the display control device 81 that the second AT mode has ended.

<First point lottery processing>
The first point lottery process in step S1208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether any AT flags are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If no AT flags are set and the game is not in AT mode, the program proceeds to step S1702, where it is determined whether a point lottery flag A is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The point lottery flag A is set when the value of the loss counter reaches 0 and the number of stuck games (the number of games played that did not win the first AT mode transition lottery) reaches a specific number (e.g., 600 games), indicating that an opportunity to execute a point awarding lottery has been established (step S1110 in Figure 35).

If point lottery flag A is set, proceed to step S1703, and obtain point lottery table A from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. In point lottery table A, the probability of awarding points is set for each point number from 0 to 5, as shown in Figure 42. The probability of awarding each point number is highest at 90%, with the probability of 0 points (no points being awarded). Then, in the 10% chance of points being awarded, the probability of awarding the maximum number of points, 5, is highest, and the award probability decreases as the point number decreases. In other words, in point lottery table A, the probability of awarding points is low, but when points are awarded, a large number of points are more likely to be awarded.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1702 (point lottery flag A is not set), the process proceeds to step S1704, where it is determined whether point lottery flag B is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Point lottery flag B is set when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, indicating that the opportunity to execute the point awarding lottery has been met (step S1311 in Figure 37).

If point lottery flag B is set, proceed to step S1705, and point lottery table B is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 42, the probability of awarding each point amount in point lottery table B is 50%, with a 50% probability that the number of points will be 0 (no points will be awarded), making the point award rate higher than that of point lottery table A. On the other hand, when points are awarded, the lowest value, 1 point, is awarded most likely, with the award probability decreasing as the number of points increases. In other words, with point lottery table B, although the probability of awarding points is high, small numbers of points are more likely to be awarded when they are awarded.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1704 (point lottery flag B is not set), the process proceeds to step S1706, where it is determined whether point lottery flag C is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Point lottery flag C is set when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, indicating that the opportunity to execute the point awarding lottery has been met (step S1512 in Figure 39).

If the point lottery flag C is set, proceed to step S1707 and obtain point lottery table C from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 42, the probability of awarding each point amount in point lottery table C is the same as in point lottery table B.

If the above step S1706 makes a negative judgment (the point lottery flag C is not set), i.e., if the point lottery trigger has not been established, the first point lottery process is terminated.

After execution of step S1703, step S1705, or step S1707, the process proceeds to step S1708, where a point-granting lottery process is executed. In the point-granting lottery process, a lottery is conducted to determine the number of points based on the acquired point lottery table and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In step S1709, it is determined whether or not the point grant was won in the granting lottery process of step S1708 (whether or not the number of points to be awarded is 1 or more).

If the player does not win the points (if the number of points drawn is 0), the first point lottery process ends. If the player wins the points, in step S1710, a process is executed to add a value corresponding to the number of points awarded in this point drawing to the PT counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The PT counter is used by the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of accumulated points (total number of points). In step S1711, a point drawing command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The point drawing command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that points have been awarded. The point drawing command includes information indicating that points have been awarded, as well as information indicating the number of points awarded in this point drawing and the total number of points. Therefore, by receiving the point drawing command, the display control device 81 can not only know that points have been awarded, but also the number of points awarded and the total number of accumulated points.

After step S1711 is executed, the first point lottery process ends. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step S1701 above (if any AT flag is set and the game is in AT mode), the first point lottery process also ends. In other words, if the game is in AT mode, the point awarding lottery (point awarding) is not performed.

<Management of advantageous zones>
We will explain the first section display process and the second section display process, which are used to control the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transition to a favorable section, or end a favorable section.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 43. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S315 of the lottery process (Fig. 18), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode, etc. (lottery result response process) is carried out based on the lottery result.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is currently displayed, or more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit. As already explained, when the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit, it indicates that the zone is a specific zone within the advantageous zone where at least the notification conditions for the push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1801 and the eighth display segment N8 is currently off, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous zone flag has not been set, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that game as the winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag has been set, the advantageous zone winning game flag is cleared in step S1804. Then, in step S1805, the advantageous zone flag is set. This starts the advantageous zone (transition to the advantageous zone).

In step S1806, the number of games played during the advantageous period is counted, and more specifically, the process of starting to measure the advantageous period game count AG in the various counter areas 106e is performed. The advantageous period game count AG corresponds to a means for determining the number of games played during the advantageous period.

In step S1807, a process is executed to input a value corresponding to the ceiling game number (e.g., a value equivalent to 700 games) as the initial value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. In step S1808, a process is executed to input a predetermined value (e.g., a value equivalent to 600 games) as the initial value of the loss counter provided in the various counter area 106e, and then in step S1809, a process for the second point lottery is executed. In this embodiment, the start of the advantageous zone is one of the triggers for executing the point awarding lottery, and the process of step S1809 corresponds to the point awarding lottery based on the establishment of this trigger.

The second point lottery process will now be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 44. In the second point lottery process, first in step S1901, it is determined whether any AT flags are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If no AT flags are set and the device is not in AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1902, where a point trigger command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

In the following step S1903, point lottery table D is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 42, the probability of awarding each point amount in point lottery table D is such that there is a 30% chance that the number of points will be 0 (no points will be awarded), making the probability of points being awarded higher than in other point lottery tables. Furthermore, when points are awarded, the allocation of points is such that smaller points are more likely to be awarded than larger points.

Note that point lottery tables A to D in this embodiment are merely examples, and the point award probability and point allocation can be set as desired. Also, while a separate lottery table is used in response to the establishment of each trigger, this is not limited to this, and a common lottery table may be provided for all triggers (a configuration in which there is no difference between the point award probability and the point allocation rate for each trigger).

After step S1903 is executed, steps S1905 to S1907 are executed, which are the same as steps S1708 to S1711 in the first point lottery process (Figure 41). That is, the number of points is determined by lottery based on the point lottery table acquired above and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106, and if points are awarded, the current number of points is added to the previous number of points.

Returning to the explanation of the first interval display process (Figure 43), after the second point lottery process is executed in step S1809, in step S1810, a favorable interval start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The favorable interval start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that an advantageous interval has begun.

After executing step S1810, if a positive judgment is made in step S1802 above (if the game is in a favorable zone) or a negative judgment is made in step S1803 above (if the favorable zone winning game flag is not set), step S1811 determines whether any of the AT mode flags are set and whether the display start conditions for the zone display are met. If any of the AT mode flags are set, step S1812 begins displaying the zone display by lighting up the eighth display segment N8.

After the display of the interval indicator has begun in this manner, if the eighth display segment N8 is currently being displayed as an interval indicator in step S1801 above, the process proceeds to step S1813, where processing is executed to continue displaying the advantageous interval. Specifically, processing is executed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 remains lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the interval indicator is not executed in this interval display first processing.

If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S1811 above, proceed to step S1814. In step S1814, a process is executed to add 1 to the first role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The first role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which no push order notification occurs, i.e., the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Furthermore, after executing the processing of step S1812 or step S1813, the process proceeds to step S1815. In step S1815, a process of adding 1 to the second role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The second role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which a push order notification can be generated, i.e., the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the processing of step S1814 or step S1815, a role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1816. In this process, the value of the role ratio second counter is divided by the sum of the role ratio first counter and the role ratio second counter (total number of games played). In other words, the role ratio calculation process is a process that calculates the proportion of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games played. Then, in step S1817, a process is executed to display the calculation result of step S1816 on the role ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning combination monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment displays each consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the winning combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77A, a second display unit 77B, a third display unit 77C, a fourth display unit 77D, and a fifth display unit 77E as 7-segment displays. The display segments in the first display unit 77A through the fifth display unit 77E have individual light sources made of LEDs, similar to the display segments N1 through N7 of the instruction monitor 68. By controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows each winning combination monitor 77 to individually display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers), and in particular, the winning combination monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1817, the result of the calculation process in step S1816 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77A-77E on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and with four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the percentage of the total number of games at which a push order notification may occur. After the process of step S1817 is executed, the first section display process is terminated.

Note that the calculation process in step S1816 may involve rounding off numbers to the fifth decimal point before controlling the display of the winning ratio monitor 77. Furthermore, since the first display unit 77A of the winning ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0," the first display unit 77A may not be included, or the first display unit 77A may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It may also be desirable to have a decimal point displayed between the first display unit 77A and the second display unit 77B by printing or the like.

<Second Section Display Process>
The second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 45. As already explained, the second section display process is a process carried out in step S417 of the reel control process (Fig. 21), and is carried out at the end of one game after medal payout (payout determination process) and transition of the game state based on the winning result (winning result response process) have been carried out.

In step S2101, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If it is not set, the second zone display process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S2102, a process is executed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. After the process in step S2102 is executed, in step S2103, a process is executed to update the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter area 106e.

In the MY update process of step S2103, provided that the result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of coins inserted (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the result of this subtraction is added to the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY, thereby updating the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S2103, the remaining game count management process is executed in step S2104, and then the remaining coin count management process is executed in the following step S2105.

The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether the current remaining number of games will cause the advantageous zone to reach its upper limit of games (1,500 games) based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. The remaining game number management process determines, for example, whether the sum of the advantageous zone game number AG (number of games played in the advantageous zone), the AT counter (number of games remaining in AT mode), and the CZ counter (number of games remaining in CZ mode) is greater than or equal to the upper limit of games in the advantageous zone. If this is the case, a first excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d as a flag to identify this situation.

The remaining coin number management process is a process for managing whether the advantageous zone will reach its upper limit increase (2,400 coins) with the current remaining number of games, based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. The remaining payout coin number management process determines, for example, whether the sum of the expected increase calculated from the AT counter and the average increase per game in AT mode, and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease coin number MY, is greater than the upper limit increase in the advantageous zone. If this is the case, a second excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d as a flag to identify the situation.

The following step S2106 determines whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit of 1500, or whether the number of coins in the advantageous zone increase/decrease MY has reached the upper limit of 2400. If either of these conditions for forced termination is met, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of coins in the advantageous zone increase/decrease MY are cleared to 0 in step S2107. The following step S2108 performs processing to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator.

Step S2109 performs a process to initialize parameters and information such as various flags and counters during the advantageous zone. In the initialization process for advantageous zone information, flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous zone, as well as flags and counters set during the current advantageous zone, are returned to their initial values. For example, if advantageous zone flags, AT win flags, AT flags, various CZ flags, etc. are set and not cleared, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if counters for the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY, the number of games continued in CZ mode, etc. are greater than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, in the initialization process, for the advantageous zone as a favorable state using push order notifications, all variables and parameters that affect the performance of the push order notifications are initialized, and RAM is cleared for these variables and parameters.

The initialization process in step S2109 also clears flags related to the point awarding lottery process and counters related to the points awarded. Specifically, if any point awarding flags are set, those flags are cleared, and if the value of the PT counter (a counter used to track the total number of points) is greater than 0, that value is cleared to 0 (initializing the total points).

In step S2110, the advantageous zone end command and initialization command are set as targets for output to the display control device 81. The advantageous zone end command is a command for notifying that the advantageous zone has ended, and the initialization command is a command for notifying that initialization processing has been performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2106 (the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has not reached the upper limit, and the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase number), the process proceeds to step S2111, where it is determined whether any AT end flags have been set. AT end flags are set at the end of each AT mode (step S1510 in Figure 39, step S1611 in Figure 40).

If the AT end flag is set, the AT end flag is cleared in step S2112. Then, the process proceeds to step S2107, and steps S2107 to S2110 are executed to end the favorable zone. In other words, in this embodiment, the favorable zone is configured to end when the AT mode entered during the favorable zone ends. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2111 (no AT end flags are set), the second zone display process is terminated.

Note that the second interval display process does not execute a process to determine whether the number of bets corresponds to the game status, as is done in steps S601 to S603 of the lottery result response process (FIG. 26) and steps S1101 to S1103 of the game count update process (FIG. 35). Therefore, the number of games played in the advantageous interval AG (the number of games played in the advantageous interval) and the number of medals added or subtracted in the advantageous interval MY (the difference between the number of medals paid out in the advantageous interval and the number of medals inserted in the advantageous interval) are updated each time a game is played, regardless of the number of medals bet when the game is played. In other words, the process to update the number of games played in the advantageous interval and the number of medals added or subtracted is executed even when a game is played with a bet of 2 (when a game is played with a bet number that does not match the specified number).

<About the push order indicator and section indicator displays and game progress>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous zone and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be explained with reference to Figure 46.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 46, in the normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8, which serves as the zone indicator, is off (not lit). In this normal zone, push order notifications are not provided. In other words, while advantageous zones have the ability to provide instruction functions such as push order notifications, normal zones are zones that do not have such instruction functions. The situation in which the display mode is normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal zone.

In the normal zone, for example, if the player wins the lottery to move to the advantageous zone by winning the 7th minor prize 7 (common bell), the number of games played in the advantageous zone (counting the number of advantageous zone games AG) will begin to be measured from the game following the game in which the winning trigger was achieved. Then, if the player wins the lottery to move to AT mode during the advantageous zone, and a win notification and AT flag are set, creating a situation in which a push order notification can be generated, the conditions for starting the display of the zone indicator are met, and the 8th display segment N8 will light up.

After that, while the eighth display segment N8 is lit, a push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player can understand the push order based on this push order information. In the push order notification, the push order information begins to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in that game, and ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on in that game. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous zone, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on, while the display of the advantageous zone by the eighth display segment N8 continues. Then, if a push order role is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to that push order role is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the final game of the advantageous zone is reached, for example, because the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit or the number of medal increases in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit increase, the eighth display segment N8 also goes out and the notification of the advantageous zone ends. In this embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when medal payout is completed (by the second zone display process, which is the process that follows the payout determination process). Note that if no medal payout is made in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game in question was the final game of the advantageous zone.

As mentioned above, the number of games in the advantageous zone is counted from the game following the game that wins the lottery to move to the advantageous zone, while the push order notification only occurs while the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, even if the zone is an advantageous zone, the push order notification does not occur in zones where the eighth display segment N8 is off (non-specific zones). In other words, by checking whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is lit, it is possible to clearly determine whether the advantageous zone is at least a situation in which the benefit of the push order notification can be enjoyed (specific zone, zone of actual increase). In this way, the manager of the amusement hall can clearly determine, for example, whether an increase in medals is occurring by enjoying the benefit of the push order notification in the advantageous zone, or whether fraudulent activity is occurring that results in an increase in medals by illegally enjoying the benefit of the push order notification even when the zone is not an advantageous zone.

<About the point effects>
As already explained, in this embodiment, when a trigger for executing the point-awarding lottery is established as the game progresses, the point-awarding lottery is executed. If the point-awarding lottery is won, points are awarded, and the awarded points are cumulatively added. Then, when the total number of awarded points (total points) reaches the bonus-awarding value, the player is awarded a bonus (transition to the second AT mode). In this case, if a presentation (announcement) is provided that suggests the total points each time the total points reach the bonus-awarding value, the player can get the impression that points are being accumulated and can predict the number of points remaining until the bonus-awarding value, thereby stimulating the player's desire to further increase their points. In other words, this can encourage the player to continue playing.

However, in a configuration where the PT counter value is cleared to 0 upon the end of the advantageous zone and the points accumulated up to that point are lost, if this is reflected directly in the presentation, there is a risk that the motivation to continue playing due to the points awarded will remain during the advantageous zone and will not be effectively stimulated after the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, the presentation has been devised so that the motivation to continue playing due to the points awarded will be effectively stimulated even after the advantageous zone ends. The specific configuration for this is explained below.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 47. The effect setting process is initiated by the CPU 181 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

In the performance setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2202, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, which is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands from previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2201, or after the processing of step S2202 has been executed, step S2203 determines whether the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 in response to a bet operation, such as a bet command set in step S206 of the normal processing (Figure 17). If it is a bet command, step S2204 executes a bet effect setting process to set effects based on the current bet operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2203, or after the processing of step S2204 has been executed, step S2205 determines whether the newly received command is a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery processing (FIG. 18), as well as the CZ win command, AT win command, and additional command set in the lottery result response processing (FIG. 26), and the point award command set in the second point lottery processing (FIGS. 43 and 44). If it is one of these start commands, step S2206 executes the start effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2205, or after the processing of step S2206 has been executed, step S2207 determines whether the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. A command at the time of each stop operation is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation being performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and includes a stop command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (Figure 21). If the stop command is a stop command at the time of each stop operation, step S2208 executes a process for setting effects at the time of each stop operation to set effects based on the current stop operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2207, or after the processing of step S2208 has been executed, step S2209 determines whether the newly received command is an all-stop command. An all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. Examples of all-stop commands include the winning result command set in step S418 of the reel control processing (FIG. 21), the CZ start command, CZ end command, AT start command, and AT end command set in the winning result response processing (FIG. 36), the point award command set in the first point lottery processing (FIGS. 36 and 41), and the point achievement command set in the first AT mode termination processing (FIGS. 36 and 39). If the command is one of these all-stop commands, step S2210 executes the all-stop effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2209, or after the processing of step S2210 has been performed, other processing is performed in step S2211, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2211, the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timing. In addition, in step S2211, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notifications, etc.

The following explains the start-time effect setting process and the all-stop effect setting process.

<Start-up performance setting process>
The start-up effect setting process of step S2206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result for the game to be started this time is a press order role win. If a press order role win is determined, in step S2302 it is determined whether a press order notification command has been received. If a press order notification command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2303, where settings are made to display the press order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth small role wins on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

If the lottery result for this game is not a push order role win in step S2301, it is determined in step S2304 whether the lottery result for this game is a special role win. A special role is a lottery result known as a rare role that is unlikely to appear (to win) as a lottery result for each game, and in this embodiment, chance eye A to chance eye C, cherry A to cherry C, and watermelon are set as special roles. As shown in Figure 29, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode transition is more likely to be won than when it is triggered by a lottery result other than a special role.

If the result of the lottery for this game is a win for a specific role, in step S2305, processing for announcing a specific role is executed. In the processing for announcing a specific role, settings are executed so that a chance effect suggesting that the result of the lottery for this game will be one of the above specific roles is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. In the chance effect, as shown in Figure 53 (c), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "Chance!!" and characters with exclamation marks are displayed corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

After executing steps S2303 and S2305, if a negative judgment is made in step S2302 (if the push order notification command has not been received) or if a negative judgment is made in step S2304 (if a specific role has not been won), step S2306 determines whether a first AT notification command (step S1006 in Figure 32(a)) has been received as the current start command. If a first AT notification command has been received, step S2307 executes settings to display a pseudo bonus winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the player that they have won the first AT mode transition lottery. In the pseudo bonus effect, as shown in Figure 53(d), for example, "V!! 777" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and audio is output to congratulate the player on winning the pseudo bonus (first AT mode).

After step S2307 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S2306 (if the first AT notification command has not been received), step S2308 determines whether a second AT winning command has been received as the current start command. If a second AT winning command has been received, step S2309 executes settings to display a promotion winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the player that they have won the second AT mode transition lottery.

After step S2309 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S2308 (the second AT winning command has not been received), in step S2310, it is determined whether or not a favorable zone start command (step S1810 in FIG. 43) has been received as the current start command. If a favorable zone start command has been received, in step S2311, a favorable zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. This favorable zone flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that the game is currently in a favorable zone.

In step S2312, it is determined whether a point-granting command (step S1907 in Figure 44) has been received as the current start command. As already explained, in this embodiment, the main control device 101 is configured to hold a point-granting lottery at the start of the advantageous zone, and this step determines whether points have been awarded in that point-granting lottery. If a point-granting command has been received, that is, if points have been awarded in the above-mentioned awarding lottery, then in step S2313, point processing is executed to enable the CPU 181 (display control device 81) to manage the points accumulated on the main control device 101 side. Details of the point processing will be described later.

After step S2313 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2310 (if the advantageous zone start command has not been received) or if a negative judgment is made in step S2312 (if the point awarding command has not been received), then step S2314 executes a point effect execution process. The point effect execution process is used to execute point-related effects, and performs processing for the above execution based on the results of the point processing in step S2313 above and step S2405 (described later) (Figure 49). Details of the point effect execution process will be described later.

Next, in step S2315, other start-up effect setting processing is executed, and then this start-up effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2315, for example, processing is performed to set an effect suggesting the lottery result in response to the start of the game, or to turn off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The full stop effect setting process of step S2210 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether a CZ start command (step S1305 in Figure 37) has been received as the current full stop command. If a CZ start command has been received, in step S2402, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a CZ start effect will be performed in the next game. In the CZ start effect, for example, as shown in Figure 53(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "CZ mode start" to notify players that CZ mode is starting.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2401 (if a CZ start command has not been received), step S2403 determines whether a CZ end command (step S1309 in FIG. 37) has been received as the current all-stop command. If a CZ end command has been received, step S2404 determines whether a point award command (step S1711 in FIG. 41) has been received as the current all-stop command. As already explained, in this embodiment, if CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, the main control unit 101 is configured to hold a point award lottery, and this step determines whether points were awarded in that point award lottery. If a point award command has been received, i.e., if points were awarded in the above award lottery, point processing is executed in step S2405. This processing is similar to the point processing in step S2313 (FIG. 48).

After step S2405 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2404 (if a point awarding command has not been received), in step S2406, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a CZ end effect is performed for the current game. In the CZ end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "CZ mode ended" to notify players that CZ mode has ended.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2403 above (if the CZ end command has not been received), then in step S2407, it is determined whether the first AT start command (step S1407 in FIG. 38) or the second AT start command (step S1608 in FIG. 40) has been received as the current full stop command. If these commands have been received, then in step S2408, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that the corresponding AT start effect will be performed in the next game. In the first AT start effect (pseudo bonus start effect), for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "BONUS START" to notify that a pseudo bonus will be started. In the second AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "RUSH ENTERED!!" to notify that the AT mode will be started.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2407 above (if an AT start command has not been received), step S2409 determines whether a first AT end command (step S1511 in FIG. 39) has been received as the current full stop command. If a first AT end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2410, where it determines whether a point achievement command (step S1509 in FIG. 39) has been received. The point achievement command indicates that the total points stored in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101 have reached the bonus award value, and if this command has been received, step S2411 executes a release process. The release process is a process for executing a point release effect in conjunction with the awarding of a bonus (transition to second AT mode) based on the bonus award value being reached. Details of the point release effect will be described later.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2410 above (a point achievement command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2412, where it is determined whether a point awarding command (step S1711 in Figure 41) has been received as the current full stop command. As already explained, in this embodiment, if the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the main control unit 101 is configured to hold a point awarding lottery, and this step determines whether points have been awarded in that point awarding lottery. If a point awarding command has been received, point processing is executed in step S2413.

After step S2413 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S2412 (if a point awarding command has not been received), the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled in step S2414 so that a first AT mode end effect (pseudo bonus end effect) is performed for the current game. In the first AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "BONUS END" to notify that the pseudo bonus has ended, as well as text to notify the player of achievements such as the number of medals earned during the pseudo bonus.

If a negative judgment is made in the above step S2409 (if the first AT end command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2415, where it is judged whether or not the second AT end command (step S1612 in FIG. 40) has been received as the current full stop command. If the second AT end command has been received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled in step S2416 so that a second AT mode end effect (RUSH end effect) is performed in the current game. In the second AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(d), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "RUSH
In addition to displaying text such as "END" to notify that the second AT mode has ended, text is displayed to notify the player of the continuation of the AT mode game and the total number of medals acquired in the first AT mode and the second AT mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2415 above (if the second AT end command has not been received), step S2417 determines whether a point awarding command (step S1711 in Figure 41) has been received as the current full stop command. As already explained, in this embodiment, if 600 games have been played without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, the main control unit 101 is configured to hold a point awarding lottery, and this step determines whether points have been awarded in that point awarding lottery. If a point awarding command has been received, step S2418 executes point processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2417 (if a point-granting command has not been received), then in step S2419 it is determined whether an initialization command (step S2110 in Figure 45) has been received as the current full-stop command. If an initialization command has been received, then in step S2420 a process is executed to erase the accumulated point information stored in the point information storage area 183d of RAM 183. Accumulated points correspond to the total points managed by the main control device 101, and specifically, indicate the same value as the total points. In other words, they are used by the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side to keep track of the accumulated points. Note that in this embodiment, information on retained points is stored and managed in RAM 183 separately from accumulated points, but these retained points are not erased but are retained even when an initialization command is received. Details of retained points will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2419 (if an initialization command has not been received), then in step S2421 it is determined whether a first BB end command or a second BB end command has been received as the current full stop command. If one of these commands has been received, then in step S2422 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a bonus end effect is displayed for the current game.

After executing the processing of step S2402, step S2406, step S2408, step S2411, step S2414, step S2416, step S2418, step S2420, or step S2422, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2421, other stop-time effects are set in step S2423, and then this effect setting process ends. In step S2423, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Point processing>
The point processing in steps S2313, S2405, S2413, and S2418 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2601, the total points (number of points accumulated on the main control unit 101 side) are identified based on the point allocation command received from the main control unit 101, and the accumulated points are grasped. Note that although the names are different for the sake of distinction, the total points and accumulated points represent the same information. In step S2602, a process to update the accumulated points is executed. Specifically, the accumulated points (previous accumulated points) stored in the point information storage area 183d of RAM 183 are rewritten with the current accumulated points grasped in step S2601 above.

In step S2603, a process is executed to read and grasp the retained points stored in the point information storage area 183d. The retained points indicate the highest value of accumulated points (total points) in the period from when the points were set to their initial value (0) to the present. As already explained, the total points are reset to their initial value (0) each time a favorable zone ends, and the retained points indicate the highest number of total points obtained in each favorable zone. For example, if the total points in the favorable zone before last were 3 points, the total points in the previous favorable zone were 1 point, and the total points up to now in the current favorable zone are 2 points, the retained points will be 3 points.

In step S2604, it is determined whether the accumulated point value determined in step S2601 above is greater than the retained point value determined in step S2603 above. If the accumulated point is equal to or less than the retained point, the point processing ends. On the other hand, if the accumulated point is greater than the retained point, that is, if the accumulated point is greater than the highest value up to that point, the processing proceeds to step S2605, where the retained point is updated. Specifically, the retained point stored in point information storage area 183d of RAM 183 is rewritten to the accumulated point determined in step S2601 above.

In step S2606, an effect execution lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a point suggestion effect will be performed. In the effect execution lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a point suggestion effect will be performed, based on the lottery counter obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183 and a lottery table for allocating whether or not a point suggestion effect will be performed. The point suggestion effect suggests the accumulated points (total points) at that time, and details of this will be described later. Note that the probability of winning the execution lottery is not particularly limited and can be set arbitrarily, but since the various point awarding triggers in this embodiment do not occur frequently and opportunities for point suggestion effects are also low, the probability of winning the execution lottery is set to be higher than the probability of not winning.

In step S2607, it is determined whether or not the player has won the execution of the point suggestion effect in the effect execution lottery process in step S2606. If the player has won, the process proceeds to step S2608, where a suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The suggestion effect flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that a point suggestion effect should be executed. After step S2608 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S2607 (if the player has not won the execution of the point suggestion effect), the point processing ends.

<Release Treatment>
The release process in step S2411 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2701, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the accumulated points. Specifically, the accumulated point value stored in the point information storage area 183d of RAM 183 is changed to the initial value (0), or the point information is erased. In step S2702, the retained points are cleared (initialized) by changing the retained point value stored in the point information storage area 183d to the initial value, or by erasing the point information. In other words, the retained points are initialized when the total points reach the bonus award value, in other words, when a bonus is awarded based on reaching the bonus award value, and are retained for the period until the next reaching point.

Next, in step S2703, a payout effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183, and then this payout processing ends. The payout effect flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that a point payout effect should be executed. Details of the point payout effect will be described later.

<Point effect execution processing>
The point effect execution process in step S2314 (FIG. 48) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether a suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. If the suggestion effect flag is set, i.e., if a situation exists in which a point suggestion effect should be executed, the suggestion effect flag is cleared in step S2802, and then, in step S2803, a type lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182.

Here, we will explain the point suggestion effect. In addition to notifying players that points have been awarded, the point suggestion effect notifies players of the accumulated points (total points) that have been accumulated at that time. In this case, the accumulated points are not indicated by a numerical value indicating the number of points, but are merely suggested by an animated image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In the point suggestion effect, as shown in Figure 55, multiple bubble images are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the size of the bubbles indicates the level of accumulated points. When the game starts (when the start lever 41 is operated), these bubble images are displayed rising from the bottom to the top of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and when a bubble image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 64. In this embodiment, there are four types (modes) of point suggestion effect: small bubble effect (Figure 55(a)), medium bubble effect (Figure 55(b)), large bubble effect (Figure 55(c)), and extra large bubble effect (Figure 55(d)).

As shown in Figure 55(a), the small bubble effect displays a tiny bubble image 201 and a small bubble image 202, suggesting that the number of accumulated points is low. As shown in Figure 55(b), the medium bubble effect displays a small bubble image 202 and a medium bubble image 203, suggesting that the number of accumulated points is moderate. As shown in Figure 55(c), the large bubble effect displays a medium bubble image 203 and a large bubble image 204, suggesting that a large number of accumulated points have been accumulated and that the bonus award value is just around the corner. As shown in Figure 55(d), the extra-large bubble effect displays an extra-large bubble image 205 that is larger than the bubble image 204, suggesting that the accumulated points have reached a specific award value.

The suggestion effect table obtained in step S2803 is used to draw lots to determine which of the above bubble effects will be executed. As shown in Figure 52, the type lottery table sets the number of points held at that time and the probability of selection of each bubble effect, with the more points held, the more likely a higher-ranked bubble effect will be selected. For example, if the number of held points is 1, either no effect (no point suggestion effect executed) or a small bubble effect will be selected, with the small bubble effect being more likely to be selected than no effect.

Note that the point suggestion effects are not limited to bubble effects, but may also use other animations or still images. Furthermore, the number of types is not limited to four, but may be three or less, or five or more.

After step S2803 is executed, in step S2804, a type lottery is executed to select the type of point suggestion effect. In this step, a process is executed to select the type of point suggestion effect based on the type lottery table acquired above, the retained points updated in step S2605 of FIG. 50, and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. At this time, since the retained points and accumulated points have the same value, the lottery process in this step can also be said to be performed based on the type lottery table acquired above, the accumulated points at that time, and the lottery counter.

In step S2805, the effect data is set so that the point suggestion effect of the type selected in step S2804 is executed. In the following step S2806, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled based on the set effect data so that the selected point suggestion effect is executed. After step S2806 is executed, the point suggestion effect execution process ends.

In this embodiment, the point suggestion effect is executed at the start of the game, but it may also be configured to be executed when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the game, when a predetermined stop operation (for example, a first stop operation) is performed after the start of the game, or when the game ends (when a final stop operation is performed). In these cases, the display control device 81 reads out the effect data at the corresponding timing during other processing in step S2211 in the effect setting process (Figure 47), and controls the corresponding notification means so that the effect is performed using the read data.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2801 (the suggestion effect flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S2807, where it is determined whether or not the release effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the release effect flag is set, i.e., if a point release effect should be executed, the release effect flag is cleared in step S2808, and then, in step S2809, effect data for executing the point release effect is set.

The point release effect notifies the player that accumulated points (total points) have reached the bonus value, releasing the accumulated points and awarding a bonus. In this embodiment, the bonus is the transition to the second AT mode, and the timing of this transition (bonus award) is the end of the first AT mode. Based on this, the point award effect is configured as follows. First, to make it appear to the player that the first AT mode has ended, the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the player that the first AT mode has ended, as shown in FIG. 56(a). Then, as shown in FIG. 56(b), numerous bubble images 205 (extra-large bubble images) are displayed rising from the bottom of the display screen, and these bubble images 205 obscure the first AT mode end screen, making it invisible or difficult to see. Then, when all the bubble images 205 disappear from the top of the display screen, a second AT mode start notification appears, as shown in FIG. 56(c), thereby notifying the player of the transition to the second AT mode.

Note that the form of the point release presentation is not limited to the above, and other forms are possible as long as the player can recognize that a bonus has been awarded based on reaching the bonus award value.

In the following step S2810, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64) is controlled so that a point release effect is executed based on the effect data set above. In this embodiment, the point release effect is executed at the start of the game, but it may also be configured to be executed when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the game, when a predetermined stop operation (e.g., a first stop operation) is performed after the start of the game, or when the game ends (when a final stop operation is performed). After step S2810 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S2807 (the release effect flag is not set), the point suggestion effect execution process is terminated.

<Flow of the point suggestion performance>
The flow of the point suggestion effect will be explained with reference to Figure 57. Here, it is assumed that the first advantageous section A starts when the total points (accumulated points) are 0 points. In addition, in the effect execution lottery when points are awarded (lottery to determine whether or not to execute the point suggestion effect), all are won, and the effect type selected at that time is the type with the higher selection probability.

After advantageous zone A begins at timing t1, if CZ mode ends at timing t2 without winning the first AT mode transition lottery and the trigger for the point award lottery is met, the point award lottery will be executed. If 1 point is awarded at that time, the main control unit 101 updates the total points to 1 point (step S1710 in Figure 41), and the display control unit 81 updates the retained points to 1 point (step S2605 in Figure 50(a)).

Furthermore, at timing t2, as points are awarded, a type lottery is held to determine the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, since the held point is 1 point, the lottery determines whether the type of point suggestion effect will be no effect or a small bubble effect (Figure 52). As a result, if a small bubble effect is selected as the point suggestion effect, a small bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., as shown in Figure 57(a). This indicates that points have been awarded and that the total number of points at that time is still small. The point suggestion effect ends when all bubble images have passed the display screen, and its duration is set to be shorter than the duration of one game. In other words, the point suggestion effect begins at the start of the game, and then ends midway through the game.

After that, at timing t3, which is midway through advantageous zone A, when the number of stuck games reaches 600 and the trigger for the point awarding lottery is met, the awarding lottery is held again. If 2 points are awarded in the awarding lottery, the main control unit 101 updates the total points to 3 points. At that time, the display control unit 81 updates the retained points to 3 points based on the fact that the accumulated points at that time (3 points) are greater than the retained point (1 point) (steps S2601 to S2605 in Figure 50(a)).

Furthermore, at timing t3, a type lottery is held in response to the points being awarded. In this case, the number of points awarded is 2, but the type lottery is held based on the number of points held (3). As a result, as shown in Figure 57(b), a bubble effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. This indicates that points have been awarded, that the total number of points at that time is moderate, or in other words, that the number of accumulated points has increased.

At timing t4, when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, advantageous period A ends. Accordingly, the main control unit 101 executes an initialization process (step S2109 in FIG. 45) and the total point value is reset to the initial value (0). At this time, the accumulated points in the display control unit 81 are also reset to the initial value (0), but the retained points are not initialized, and the value (3) at the end of advantageous period A is maintained.

When a new advantageous zone B begins at timing t5, the main control unit 101 executes a lottery to award points (step S1904 in Figure 44). If 1 point is awarded in the lottery, the main control unit 101 updates the total points to 1 point. At that time, the display control unit 81 compares the accumulated points at that time (1 point) with the retained points (3 points), but because the value of the accumulated points does not exceed the retained points, the retained points are not updated and remain at 3 points. Furthermore, the execution of point suggestion effects is restricted based on the fact that the accumulated points are equal to or less than the retained points, and the point suggestion effects are not executed (step S2604 in Figure 50(a)). In other words, suggestion effects corresponding to an accumulated point (total points) of 1 point are not executed.

In the above case, after the total points are initialized, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted at the first opportunity to execute that effect. However, considering that the situation in which the current accumulated points are equal to or less than the held points (in other words, the situation in which the execution of the point suggestion effect should be restricted) begins with the initialization of the total points, it can also be said that the state in which the effect execution is restricted begins when the total points are initialized.

At timing t6, if the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, advantageous zone B ends and the total points are reset to their initial value. Even if 1 point is awarded in the previous lottery, bringing the total points (accumulated points) to 2 points, the accumulated points at that point are still smaller than the retained points, so the retained points are not updated and the point suggestion effect is not executed. In other words, the restriction on the execution of the point suggestion effect is maintained.

After advantageous zone C begins at timing t7, if the point awarding lottery is triggered at timing t8 and 4 points are awarded, the total points will be set to 4 points in the main control device 101. Accordingly, the accumulated points on the display control device 81 side become greater than the currently held points (3 points), and the held points will be updated to 4 points.

Also, at timing t8, the accumulated points become greater than the held points, so the restriction on the execution of the point suggestion effect is lifted and a type lottery is executed. As a result, as shown in Figure 57(c), a large bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., indicating that points have been awarded and that the total number of points at that time has increased. At this time, the actual change in the total points is that they were initialized to 0 points and then increased to 4 points in one award lottery, but because the point suggestion effect was not executed while the accumulated points were less than the held points, from the player's perspective it appears as if the total points have increased from the number suggested in the previous point suggestion effect (timing t3).

If the trigger for the point awarding lottery is met again at timing t9 and 1 point is awarded, the total points are updated to 5 points in the main control device 101, and the retained points are updated to 5 points in the display control device 81. Also, at timing t9, a type lottery corresponding to the retained points being 5 points is executed, and an extra-large bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., as shown in Figure 57 (d). This indicates that the total points have reached the bonus awarding value.

At timing t10, the first AT mode ends, and when the opportunity to award a bonus arrives, a bonus (transition to second AT mode) is awarded. Accordingly, the total points are initialized in the main control unit 101 (step S1508 in FIG. 39), and the retained points are also initialized in the display control unit 81 (step S2702 in FIG. 50(b)). At this time, a point release effect (FIG. 56) is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and the awarding of a bonus based on reaching the bonus award value is announced.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In this embodiment, points are awarded when the awarding conditions are met, and when the total number of points (total points) reaches the bonus award value, the player is awarded a bonus (transition to second AT mode). By issuing a notification corresponding to the total points each time, the player can recognize that the total points are increasing toward the bonus award value, and this stimulates the player's desire to further increase their points. In other words, this encourages the player to continue playing. However, in a configuration in which the total points are reset at the end of the advantageous zone and the points accumulated up to that point are lost, if the reset of the total points is reflected directly in the notification, there is a concern that this will give the player the impression that they are being forced to start saving points again from the beginning, which may reduce their desire to continue playing.

In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the total points are initialized by the main control device 101, the display control device 81 does not initialize the retained points stored in RAM 183, but instead retains them, and then references these retained points to control the execution of the point suggestion effect. With this configuration, when the point suggestion effect is executed after the total points have been initialized, the execution can be controlled while taking into account the total points before initialization, preventing the initialization of the total points from being directly reflected in the suggestion effect. This prevents the player from getting the impression that they are having to save up again, and prevents a decrease in their motivation to continue playing.

Whether or not to execute the point suggestion effect is controlled based on the current total points (accumulated points) and the retained points, and the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted if the current total points are less than or equal to the retained points.

With the above configuration, the execution of point suggestion effects is permitted when the current total points are greater than the held points, but is restricted when the total points are equal to or less than the held points. In other words, point suggestion effects are performed with the number of point suggestion effects that notify values less than the held points thinned out for each point awarded. Therefore, even if the total points actually decrease due to the effects of initialization, it appears to the player that the total points are gradually increasing. This prevents the impression that the total value has disappeared, and effectively stimulates the player's desire to continue playing after the total points have been initialized.

The point suggestion effect is performed after an execution lottery has been held, and if the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted, the execution lottery is not held and the point suggestion effect is not executed. In other words, by forcibly prohibiting the execution of the point suggestion effect, it is possible to effectively prevent the execution of suggestion effects that reflect the initialized total points.

If the current total points (accumulated points) are greater than the held points stored in RAM 183, those total points are updated as the new held points. This configuration makes it possible to limit the execution of the point suggestion effect based on the highest total points obtained through play up to that point. This makes it possible to execute the point suggestion effect only when a total point that updates the previous highest value is obtained, giving the player the impression that the total points are continually increasing.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration is devised to expand the opportunities for executing point suggestion effects. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 58 to 64. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

<Point effect execution processing>
The point effect execution process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 58(a). This process is executed in step S2314 of the start-time effect setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the point effect execution process of Fig. 51. Note that in Fig. 58(a), the same processes as those in Fig. 51 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2801, it is determined whether a suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The suggestion effect flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine whether a point suggestion effect should be executed. If the suggestion effect flag is set, the flag is cleared in step S2802, and then the type lottery table (Figure 52) is acquired in step S2803. In step S2804, a lottery process for the point suggestion effect is executed based on the acquired type lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183.

In step S3101, the point usage table stored in the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182 is referenced to identify the points to be used that correspond to the type (mode) of the suggestive effect allocated by the lottery process. In the point usage table, as shown in FIG. 58(b), unique points to be used are assigned to each mode of the point suggestive effect, with higher-ranked suggestive effects being assigned larger points to be used. For example, 0 points are assigned to no effect, 1 point to a small bubble effect (FIG. 55(a)), 3 points to a medium bubble effect (FIG. 55(b)), 4 points to a large bubble effect (FIG. 55(c)), and 5 points to an extra-large bubble effect (FIG. 55(d)). The points to be used are information that indicates how many points the suggestive effect being executed (the effect selected by lottery) is worth.

In step S3102, the identified usage points are subtracted from the accumulated points at that time to calculate a difference value. The calculated difference value is stored in a specified area of RAM 183. Note that although the above describes subtracting usage points from accumulated points, when this step is executed (when the suggestion effect flag is set indicating that a point suggestion effect should be executed and a positive judgment is made in step S2801), the held points are updated with the accumulated points, and the two have the same value (steps S2604 to S2608 in Figure 50(a)), so the processing in this step can also be said to subtract usage points from held points.

After step S3102 is executed, in step S2805, the effect data is set so that the point suggestion effect selected in step S2804 is executed. In this embodiment, the process of identifying the points to be used and the process of calculating the difference value are performed before step S2805 is executed, but the execution timing of these processes only needs to be after the selection of the suggestion effect mode, so they may also be performed after step S2805 is executed.

<Start-up performance setting process>
The start-up effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 59. This process is executed in place of the start-up effect setting process of Fig. 48. In Fig. 59, the same steps as those in Fig. 48 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After step S2309 (setting process for the second AT winning effect) is executed or if a negative decision is made in step S2308 (if the second AT winning command has not been received as the current start command), in step S2310, it is determined whether or not a favorable zone start command has been received as the current start command. If a favorable zone start command has been received,
In step S2311, a favorable zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183.

In step S2312, it is determined whether a point-awarding command has been received as the current start command. As explained in the first embodiment above, in this embodiment, the main control device 101 is configured to conduct a point-awarding lottery at the start of the advantageous zone, and this step determines whether points have been awarded in that point-awarding lottery. Note that the point-awarding command includes information indicating that points have been awarded, as well as information indicating the number of points awarded in this awarding lottery and the total number of points.

If a point awarding command has been received, i.e., if points have been awarded in this awarding lottery process, first point processing is executed in step S3201. On the other hand, if a point awarding command has not been received (points have not been awarded), second point processing is executed in step S3202. Details of the first point processing and second point processing will be described later. After execution of step S3201 or step S3202, the process proceeds to step S2314 (point effect execution processing).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2310 above (if the advantageous zone start command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S3203, where it is determined whether a point trigger command (step S1111 in Figure 35) has been received as the current start command. As explained in the first embodiment above, in this embodiment, if the number of games in which the player has not won the first AT mode transition lottery (number of stuck games) while remaining in the advantageous zone reaches a specific number (e.g., 600 games), the main control unit 101 is configured to recognize that a trigger for executing the point awarding lottery has been established and to send a point trigger command. This step is for determining whether the trigger has been established.

If a point trigger command has been received, a trigger establishment flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S3204. The trigger establishment flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that a point award lottery trigger has been established based on the number of stuck games reaching a specific number. After step S3204 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S3203 (if a point trigger command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2314 (processing for executing point effects).

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The all-stop effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 60. This process is executed in place of the all-stop effect setting process of Fig. 49. In Fig. 60, the same steps as those in Fig. 49 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If step S2403 makes a positive judgment (if a CZ end command has been received) or step S2410 makes a negative judgment (if a point achievement command has not been received), step S2404 or step S2412 determines whether a point awarding command has been received as the current full stop command. As described in the first embodiment above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 101 conducts a point awarding lottery when CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, and when first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, and step S2404 or step S2412 determines whether points have been awarded in those point awarding lotteries.

If a point awarding command has been received, i.e., if points have been awarded in this awarding lottery process, first point processing is executed in step S3301. On the other hand, if a point awarding command has not been received (points have not been awarded), second point processing is executed in step S3302. These first point processing and second point processing are similar to the first point processing and second point processing in the start-time effect setting process (Figure 59) described above. After executing step S3301 or step S3302, proceed to step S2406 (CZ end effect setting process) or step S2414 (first AT end effect setting process).

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2415 (the second AT end command has not been received), step S3303 determines whether a trigger establishment flag has been set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. If the trigger establishment flag has been set, that is, if the trigger for the point award lottery based on the number of stuck games reaching a specific number has been established, step S3304 clears the trigger establishment flag, and then step S3305 determines whether a point award command has been received as the current full stop command.

If a point-granting command has been received, first point processing is executed in step S3306; if a point-granting command has not been received, second point processing is executed in step S3307. These first point processing and second point processing are similar to the first point processing and second point processing in the start-time performance setting processing (Figure 59) described above. After step S3306 or step S3307 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2423 (other all-stop performance setting processing).

<Processing for First Point>
The first point processing in steps S3201, S3301, and S3306 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 61. Note that in Fig. 61, the same steps as those in the point processing in Fig. 50(a) are given the same step numbers, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

If the accumulated points are greater than the retained points in step S2604, processing to update the retained points is executed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, a performance execution lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a point suggestion performance. If the execution lottery is won, in step S2804 of the point performance execution process (Figure 58), a lottery is executed to determine the type of point suggestion performance (lottery process to determine which point suggestion performance to execute) using the type lottery table (Figure 52), retained points, and a lottery counter. In this case, the type lottery is executed using the latest retained points updated in step S2605.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2604 (the accumulated points are less than or equal to the held points), the process proceeds to step S3401, where it is determined whether the difference value (step S3102 in FIG. 58) is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (e.g., 1). If the difference value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S2606, where the effect execution lottery process is performed. That is, in the first embodiment described above, if the accumulated points are less than or equal to the held points, the point suggestion effect is not executed across the board. However, in this embodiment, even if the accumulated points are less than or equal to the held points, if the difference value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, the point suggestion effect is allowed to be executed. In this case, the effect execution lottery is performed with the same probability of winning as the execution lottery when the accumulated points are greater than the held points (the flow when a positive judgment is made in step S2604 in FIG. 61).

If the execution lottery is won, step S2804 of the point effect execution process (Figure 58) draws a type lottery for the point suggestion effect using the type lottery table (Figure 52), the retained points, and the lottery counter. However, if the execution of the point suggestion effect is permitted based on the difference value being equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the retained points are not updated, and in this case the type lottery is performed using the previously retained points that are retained at that time.

<Processing for Second Point>
The second point processing in steps S3202, S3302, and S3307 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 62. All of these processes are executed when the opportunity for the point awarding lottery is met but no points are awarded.

In step S3501, it is determined whether the difference value (step S3102 in Figure 58) is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (e.g., 1). If the difference value is less than the predetermined value, the second point processing is terminated. If the difference value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, the processing of steps S3502 to S3504 is executed. This processing is the same as steps S2606 to S2608 in Figure 61. In other words, a lottery is held to execute a point suggestion effect, and if the execution is successful, a suggestion effect flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183.

<Flow of the point suggestion performance>
The flow of the point suggestion effect according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 63 and 64. Here, it is assumed that in the effect execution lottery when points are awarded, the execution of the point suggestion effect is won in both cases.

First, we will explain the flow when points are awarded but the accumulated points at that time do not reach the held points (maximum value) with reference to Figure 63.

At timing t1, when the trigger for the point awarding lottery occurs in the middle of advantageous zone A, the main control unit 101 executes the point awarding lottery. If 3 points are awarded at that time, the main control unit 101 updates the total points to 3 points (step S1710 in Figure 41), and the display control unit 81 updates the retained points to 3 points (step S2605 in Figure 61).

Also, at timing t1, a type lottery corresponding to the fact that the retained points are 3 points is executed using the type lottery table (Figure 52). At that time, it is assumed that the small bubble effect, which has a selection probability of 30%, is selected as the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, the display control device 81 derives 1 point as the used point corresponding to the small bubble effect (step S3101 in Figure 58(a) and Figure 58(b)). Then, the used point (1 point) is subtracted from the accumulated points (3 points), and 2 points is calculated as the difference value (step S3102 in Figure 58(a)). Also, at timing t1, a small bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., as shown in Figure 63(a).

When advantageous period A ends at timing t2, the main control unit 101 executes an initialization process (step S2109 in FIG. 45), and the total point value is set to the initial value (0). At that time, the accumulated points are also set to the initial value (0) in the display control unit 81, but the retained points are not initialized, and the value (3) at the end of advantageous period A is maintained. The difference value is also not initialized, and the value (2) at the end of advantageous period A is maintained.

At timing t3, when the trigger for the point awarding lottery occurs in the middle of the next advantageous zone B, the main control unit 101 executes the point awarding lottery. If 1 point is awarded at that time, the main control unit 101 updates the total points to 1 point. At that time, the display control unit 81 does not update the held points because the accumulated points at that time (1 point) are smaller than the held points (3 points), and the held points remain at 3 points.

In this case, in the first embodiment described above, the execution of the point suggestion effect should be restricted and no effect execution lottery is conducted. However, in this embodiment, an effect execution lottery is conducted based on the difference value being equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 1) (steps S2604 and S3401 in Figure 61). In this effect execution lottery, the same lottery table is used as in the effect execution lottery when the accumulated points are greater than the held points. Therefore, the point suggestion effect will be performed with the same probability as when the accumulated points are greater than the held points.

If the execution of the point suggestion effect is selected in the effect execution lottery, the subsequent type lottery will execute a lottery process corresponding to the currently held points (3 points). At that time, it is assumed that the 70% bubble effect is selected as the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, the display control device 81 derives 3 points as the used points corresponding to the bubble effect (Figure 58 (b)), and calculates 0 points as the difference value obtained by subtracting the used points (3 points) from the accumulated points (3 points). Furthermore, at timing t3, the bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., as shown in Figure 63 (b).

At timing t4 in advantageous zone B, when the trigger for executing the point-awarding lottery is met, the main control unit 101 again executes the point-awarding lottery. If 1 point is awarded as a result, the main control unit 101 updates the total points to 2 points. As with timing t3, the accumulated points at that time (2 points) are less than the held points (3 points), but in this case, the difference value (0) is less than the predetermined value, so the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted. In other words, the point suggestion effect is not executed.

Next, we will explain the flow when the trigger for the point awarding lottery is met but points are not awarded, with reference to Figure 64.

When the trigger for the point awarding lottery is met at timing t1, the main control unit 101 executes the point awarding lottery. If 3 points are awarded at that time, the main control unit 101 updates the total points to 3 points, and the display control unit 81 updates the retained points to 3 points.

Also, at timing t1, a type lottery corresponding to the fact that the held points are 3 points is executed using the type lottery table. At that time, it is assumed that the small bubble effect, which has a selection probability of 30%, is selected as the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, the display control device 81 derives 1 point as the used point corresponding to the small bubble effect, and calculates 2 points as the difference value obtained by subtracting the used point (1 point) from the accumulated points (3 points). Also, at timing t1, the small bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., as shown in Figure 64 (a).

When the trigger for executing the point awarding lottery is met at timing t2, the main control unit 101 executes the point awarding lottery. At that time, it is assumed that no points are awarded. In this case, in the first embodiment described above, the point suggestion effect is not executed across the board, but in this embodiment, the effect execution lottery is executed based on the difference value being equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 1) (steps S3302 and S3307 in Figure 60, Figure 62). In this effect execution lottery, the same lottery table is used as in the effect execution lottery when the accumulated points are greater than the held points.

If the execution of the point suggestion effect is selected in the effect execution lottery, the subsequent type lottery will execute a lottery process corresponding to the currently held points (3 points). At that time, it is assumed that the 70% bubble effect is selected as the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, the display control device 81 derives 3 points as the used points corresponding to the bubble effect, and calculates 0 points as the difference value obtained by subtracting the used points (3 points) from the accumulated points (3 points). Furthermore, at timing t2, the bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., as shown in Figure 64 (b).

When the trigger for executing the point-awarding lottery is met again at timing t3, the main control unit 101 executes the point-awarding lottery. At that time, it is assumed that no points are awarded. As with timing t2, the accumulated points at that time (2 points) are less than the retained points (3 points), but in this case, the difference value (0) is less than the predetermined value, so the effect execution lottery is not executed and the point suggestion effect is not executed.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

After a previous point suggestion effect is executed, the system calculates the difference between the used points corresponding to that point suggestion effect and the total points (accumulated points) at the time the effect is executed, and then executes the subsequent point suggestion effect based on that difference.

As described in the first embodiment above, in a configuration in which the total points are initialized upon the end of a favorable zone, restricting the execution of point suggestion effects when the total points at that time are equal to or less than the retained points can prevent the player from getting the impression that the total points have been reset. However, on the other hand, if the execution restriction reduces the frequency of point suggestion effect execution, there is a concern that the player will have fewer opportunities to become aware of the existence of points, and therefore will gradually lose interest in points. In this case, it would be possible to increase the frequency of point suggestion effect execution in the restricted state, but in that case, if the suggestion effect were configured to correspond to the actual total points (the total points reduced by initialization), this could give the player the impression that the total points have disappeared, undermining the original purpose of restricting the execution of the effect. Conversely, if the suggestion effect were configured to correspond to the retained points, it would trigger a notification that deviates from the actual total points, which could reduce the player's trust in the notifications.

In this regard, with this configuration, point suggestion effects based on the difference between the used points and the held points corresponding to the previous point suggestion effect are performed under the above-mentioned restricted state. Subsequent suggestion effects utilize the remaining total points for the already performed suggestion effect, so by performing such effects in a restricted state, the frequency of suggestion effect execution can be increased while aligning the aspect of the point suggestion effect with the actual total points. This makes it possible to appropriately address the above-mentioned inconveniences caused by the creation of a restricted state.

The main control device 101 is configured to retain the above difference value even when the total points are initialized. With this configuration, the difference value does not disappear when the total points are initialized and is maintained thereafter, making it possible to use the difference value across initialization when restricting the execution of point suggestion effects. This makes it possible to execute point suggestion effects by utilizing the difference value generated by point suggestion effects before initialization after initialization, making it possible to favorably increase the frequency of point suggestion effects in a configuration in which the total points are initialized at the end of an advantageous zone.

The point suggestion effect based on the above difference value is configured to be executed when points have not been awarded. With this configuration, the point suggestion effect can be executed even when points have not been awarded, making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency with which the suggestion effect is executed. Note that in this case, the notification does not necessarily have to be executed in a restricted state; it can also be executed in an unrestricted state, for example, when the point award lottery trigger is met but the player loses the point award lottery.

Third Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in that it allows cases in which the retention point is not updated even when the accumulated points are greater than the retention point. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 65. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components that are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

<First point lottery processing>
The first point lottery process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. After step S1710 (the process of adding the awarded points to the PT counter value (accumulated points)) is executed, in step S1711, a point awarding command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The point awarding command according to this embodiment includes information that points have been awarded, information indicating the number of points awarded in the current awarding lottery, information indicating the total number of points, as well as information regarding which lottery trigger caused the points to be awarded. This information may be included in a point trigger command that is set when the point awarding trigger is established, instead of or in addition to the point awarding command.

<Point processing>
The point processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 65. This processing is executed in step S2313 of the start-time performance setting processing (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and in steps S2405, S2413, and S2418 of the full-stop performance setting processing (Fig. 49), and is executed in place of the point processing of Fig. 50(a). Note that in Fig. 65, processing similar to that of Fig. 50(a) is assigned the same step numbers, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step S2603 (determining the retained points), step S2604 determines whether the value of the accumulated points determined in step S2601 is greater than the value of the retained points determined in step S2603. If the accumulated points are greater than the retained points, i.e., if the accumulated points determined are greater than the highest value up to that point, proceed to step S3601 and determine whether the current point award is based on the end of the first AT mode (the end of the first AT mode without winning the lottery to transition to the second AT mode). The award trigger (the trigger for the award lottery) based on the end of the first AT mode is the final trigger that can occur in the advantageous zone, and this step determines whether the current point award is due to the final trigger before the end of the advantageous zone (before the accumulated points are initialized).

If the current point award is not based on the end of the first AT mode, proceed to step S2605 and execute the process of updating the held points. On the other hand, if the current point award is based on the end of the first AT mode, proceed to step S3602 and determine whether the accumulated points at that time are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 3). Note that this point process is executed when the accumulated points have not reached the bonus award value (e.g., 5) (step S2410 in Figure 49), so accumulated points being equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 3) means that the points are equal to or greater than the predetermined value and less than the bonus award value.

If the accumulated points are not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, proceed to step S2605 and execute the process of updating the held points. Conversely, if the accumulated points are equal to or greater than the predetermined value, skip step S2605 and do not execute the process of updating the held points. For example, if the held points before point awarding were 1 point and the held points after point awarding are 4 points, the held points are not updated and remain at 1 point. After execution of step S2605 or if a positive judgment is made in step S3602, proceed to step S2606 and execute a lottery to execute the point suggestion effect.

<Point effect execution processing>
The point effect execution process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51. If the suggestion effect flag is set in step S2801, i.e., if a situation exists in which a point suggestion effect should be executed, a lottery for determining the type of point suggestion effect is executed in step S2804. The lottery for determining the type of effect is executed using the type lottery table (FIG. 52), the retained points, and a lottery counter (random number). If the retained points have been updated in the previous point processing (FIG. 65), the updated points are used as the retained points used in the lottery. For example, if the retained points before point awarding were 1 point and the accumulated points after point awarding were 4 points, and the retained points have been updated, 4 points are used as the retained points in the lottery, and the effect type is selected from the medium bubble effect and the large bubble effect.

On the other hand, if the retained points have not been updated in the previous point processing, the retained points before the points were awarded are used as the retained points used in the lottery. In other words, even if points are awarded due to the point award trigger at the end of the first AT mode and the accumulated points become greater than the retained points due to the awarded points, if the update of the retained points is restricted because the accumulated points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 3 points) (the flow in the previous point processing (Figure 65) is YES in step S2604, YES in step S3601, and YES in step S3602), the lottery for the type of point suggestion effect is performed using the previous retained points, which are a smaller value than the accumulated points at that time. For example, if the retained points before the point award were 1 point and the accumulated points after the point award are 4 points, and the retained points have not been updated, 1 point is used as the retained point at the time of the lottery, and the effect type is selected from either no effect or a small bubble effect. In other words, the same number of retained points as used in the previous point suggestion effect is used to draw the effect type, and the current awarded points are not reflected in the type of effect selected.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

As described in the first embodiment above, by setting the highest value obtained in the game up to that point as the retained points, it is possible to give the player the impression that their total points are increasing. However, on the other hand, if the highest value obtained each time is always reflected as the retained points, the gap between the initial value and the total points when they are initialized is likely to become larger. As a result, it takes a longer time for the actual total points to catch up with the retained points, and the frequency with which point suggestion effects are executed is likely to decrease significantly.

In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the total points exceed the retained points, the retained points are not updated in some cases, which prevents the gap from widening when the points are initialized. This significantly reduces the frequency with which point suggestion effects are executed, preventing players from losing interest in points.

If points are awarded at the final award opportunity before the total points are initialized, the retained points will not be updated even if the total points exceed the retained points.

After points are awarded at the final award trigger before initialization, no new points are awarded until initialization, so the bonus award value before initialization will not be reached. The points at the final trigger are then treated as if they never existed due to the subsequent initialization, and ultimately do not contribute to reaching the bonus award value. Taking this characteristic into consideration, this embodiment is configured so that if the award trigger at which points are awarded is the final trigger before initialization, those awarded points are not reflected in the retained points, thereby preventing the gap from widening unnecessarily with the initial value. Furthermore, since points at the final trigger do not contribute to reaching the bonus award value as described above, even if a suggestive effect corresponding to such points is not performed, it can be said that this does not pose a problem for the player in their efforts to reach the bonus award value. In other words, this configuration makes it possible to prevent the gap from widening without interfering with the player's gameplay.

If the retained points are not updated, the type of point suggestion effect to be executed is determined based on the retained points before the points were awarded.

For example, if the type of point suggestion effect is determined based on the actual total points (total points reflecting the points awarded) when update restrictions prevent updates to the held points, the total points and held points will differ in value, which could lead to a mismatch between the type of point suggestion effect and the held points, potentially confusing the player. In this embodiment, the type of point suggestion effect is determined based on the held points before points are awarded (held points with updates postponed), making it possible to optimally match the type of point suggestion effect with the held points.

Even if the award trigger is subject to the update limit for retained points, if the total points are less than a specified value, the retained points will be updated without any update limit.

If the retained points were not updated at all when an award trigger is subject to update restrictions, no notification of an increase in total points would be made at that trigger, which could give the player the impression that there is no possibility of points being awarded at that trigger (in other words, that total points will not increase at that trigger). In this regard, this embodiment is configured to limit the update of retained points only when the total points reflecting the points awarded at that trigger are equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In this case, if the total points are equal to or greater than the predetermined value and it is expected that the gap with the initial value when initialized will be large, the total points will not be reflected in the retained points. However, if the total points are less than the predetermined value, the retained points will be updated and a notification that the total points have increased can be made. This makes it possible to ensure opportunities to notify the player that the total points have increased while preventing the gap with the initial value at the time of initialization from becoming too large.

In the above embodiment, a configuration in which this embodiment is applied to the first embodiment has been described, but this embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the above-described embodiments, the display control device 81 stores information corresponding to points, but in this embodiment, information corresponding to the type of point suggestion effect that has been executed is stored. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 66 and 67. In these figures, the same components as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

<Point effect execution processing>
The point effect execution process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 66(a). This process is executed in step S2314 of the start-time effect setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the point effect execution process of Fig. 51. Note that in Fig. 66(a), the same processes as those in Fig. 51 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If the suggestion effect flag is set in step S2801, that is, if a point suggestion effect should be executed, a presentation type lottery is executed in step S2804 to determine the type of point suggestion effect. In this case, in this embodiment, accumulated points are used instead of held points. In other words, the type of point suggestion effect is determined by lottery based on the acquired type lottery table (Figure 52), the current accumulated points, and the counter (random number) used for the lottery.

In the following step S3701, the rank information table stored in the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is referenced to determine the rank information of the type assigned in the type lottery in step S2804. As shown in FIG. 66(b), the rank information table sets rank information corresponding to each effect type. For example, if the type of point suggestion effect assigned in step S2804 is a small bubble effect, a rank of 1 is derived.

In step S3702, processing is performed to update the rank information determined in step S3701 above as new retained rank information. Specifically, the rank information (previous rank information) stored in point information storage area 183d of RAM 183 is rewritten with the current rank information determined in step S3701 above. After step S3702 is executed, in step S2805, processing is performed to set the performance data so that the point suggestion performance selected in step S2804 above is executed.

In this embodiment, the rank information ascertainment process and update process are performed before step S2805 is executed, but the execution timing of each of these processes only needs to be after the lottery for the suggested performance mode, so they may also be performed after step S2805 is executed.

<Point processing>
The point processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 67(a). This processing is executed in step S2313 of the start-time performance setting processing (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and in steps S2405, S2413, and S2418 of the full-stop performance setting processing (Fig. 49), and is executed in place of the point processing of Fig. 50(a). Note that in Fig. 67(a), processing similar to that in Fig. 50(a) is assigned the same step number, and its description will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2601, the total points (number of points accumulated on the main control unit 101 side) are identified based on the point allocation command received from the main control unit 101, and the accumulated points are determined. In step S2602, the accumulated points stored in the point information storage area 183d of RAM 183 are updated to the accumulated points determined in step S2601.

In step S3801, the hold rank information stored in the point information storage area 183d is read and grasped. Note that this point processing is performed prior to the point effect execution processing of FIG. 66(a), so the hold rank information grasped in step S3801 is the hold rank information updated when the previous point suggestion effect was executed.

In step S3802, the rank information table (Figure 66 (b)) is referenced to identify the corresponding points corresponding to the held rank information, and a determination is made as to whether the accumulated points updated in step S2602 are greater than the corresponding points. For example, if the held rank information is 1, 2 points are identified as the corresponding points, and a determination is made as to whether the accumulated points are greater than 2 points. Here, the corresponding points indicate how many points the previously executed point suggestion effect corresponds to, so the processing in this step can also be said to determine whether the current accumulated points are greater than the points suggested in the previous point suggestion effect.

If the accumulated points are greater than the corresponding points, the process proceeds to step S2606, where a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a point suggestion effect. In other words, if it is determined that the accumulated points have increased this time based on the points suggested in the previous point suggestion effect, the execution of the point suggestion effect is permitted.

In contrast, if a negative judgment is made in step S3802 (if the accumulated points are equal to or less than the corresponding points), the point processing is terminated without executing the processing from step S2606 onwards. In other words, if the current accumulated points are the same number as or have decreased from the points suggested in the previous point suggestion effect, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted and not executed.

As mentioned above, the point effect execution process in Figure 66 (a) is performed after the point processing has finished. For this reason, the effect type lottery in step S2804 of the point effect execution process is performed using the accumulated points updated in step S2602 (accumulated points reflecting the points awarded at the current award trigger). In other words, the decision on whether to execute a point suggestion effect is made by comparing it with the previous point suggestion effect, but if it is to be executed, the type lottery is performed in accordance with the latest accumulated points. Therefore, the type of point suggestion effect selected this time is more likely to be higher-ranking than the previous point suggestion effect.

<Release Treatment>
The release process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 67(b). This process is executed in step S2411 of the full stop effect setting process (Fig. 49) in the display control device 81, and is the same as the release process of Fig. 50(b) except that step S3901 is executed instead of step S2702.

In step S3901, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the retention rank information stored in the point information storage area 183d of RAM 183. In other words, the retention rank information is initialized when the total points reach the bonus award value, in other words, when a bonus is awarded based on reaching the bonus award value, and is retained for the period until the next achievement.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

Rank information corresponding to the type of point suggestion effect that was executed is stored, and this is retained as retained rank information even when the total points are initialized. The execution of point suggestion effects is restricted based on this retained rank information. With this configuration, after the total points are initialized, it is possible to prevent the execution of effects that are lower in rank than point suggestion effects executed before the initialization, achieving the same effect as the first embodiment described above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the execution of point suggestion effects is restricted based on the rank of the executed point suggestion effect (in other words, the type of executed point suggestion effect), rather than the points, so restrictions are relaxed compared to the first embodiment, and it is expected that a decrease in the frequency of point suggestion effect execution will be suppressed. For example, if a type corresponding to a value smaller than the actual total points is drawn in the previous point suggestion effect, the retained rank information will be retained as a value smaller than the actual total points, so even if the total points have not increased when the subsequent point suggestion effect is triggered, the total points (accumulated points) will exceed the corresponding points, and the point suggestion effect will be allowed to be executed. In other words, there are cases where point suggestion effects can be executed even when points have not been awarded.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that retained rank information is used instead of the retained points in the first embodiment, but it is also possible to apply the second and third embodiments to this embodiment. For example, in the third embodiment, a configuration can be used that restricts the retained rank information from being updated by rank information from the point suggestion effect that is executed at the final trigger before initialization.

Fifth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the display control device 81 awards points separately from the points awarded by the main control device 101, and the point presentation is executed by referring to both the points on the display control device 81 side and the points on the main control device 101 side. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 68 to 83. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the above-described embodiments, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

In this embodiment, the bonus award value and point award trigger differ from those in the above embodiments, so these differences will be explained with reference to Figure 68.

The bonus value in this embodiment is 20 points. Therefore, a bonus is awarded when the points awarded by the main control device 101 are 20 points or more. The bonus is awarded when the player transitions to the second AT mode, just like in the previous embodiments, and the bonus is awarded when the first AT mode ends, just like in the previous embodiments.

In this embodiment, six points are awarded, with two additional points awarded when a player has a 200-game winning streak and a 400-game winning streak in addition to the points awarded in the previous embodiments. The point award rate and other details for each point award will be explained in detail later.

Next, we will explain the control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to realize the above-mentioned point awarding configuration and bonus awarding configuration.

<Processing for Ending First AT Mode>
The first AT mode termination process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 69(a). This process is executed in step S1206 of the winning result response process (Figure 36) in the main control device 101, and is executed in place of the first AT termination process in Figure 39. In Figure 69(a), the same steps as those in Figure 39 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step S1503 (processing to clear the first AT flag), the process proceeds to step S1504, where it is determined whether the second AT win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The second AT win flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine whether the second AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the second AT win flag is not set, i.e., if the second AT mode transition lottery was not won during the first AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4101, where it is determined whether the value of the PT counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 is 20 or greater.

If the PT counter value is 20 or greater (if the total points have reached the bonus award value), proceed to step S1508, where the PT counter value is cleared to 0. In step S1509, a point achievement command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then proceed to step S1506 (processing to set the second AT start flag).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4101 (the value of the PT counter is less than 20 and the total points have not reached the bonus award value), the process proceeds to step S1510, where a first AT end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT end flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the first AT mode has ended.

In step S1511, a first AT end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then in step S4102, a point lottery flag E is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Multiple types of point lottery flags are set so that the CPU 102 can determine when an opportunity to execute a point awarding lottery has occurred. One of these, point lottery flag E, indicates that the current awarding lottery opportunity is based on the first AT mode ending without winning the second AT mode transition lottery (Figure 68). After step S4102 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1513 (processing to set a point trigger command).

<First section display process>
The first interval display process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 69(b). This process is executed in step S315 of the lottery process (Figure 18), and is executed in place of the first interval display process in Figure 43. In Figure 69(b), the same steps as in Figure 43 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the processing of step S1807 (processing to set 700 in the ceiling counter), in step S4201, processing is executed to input 200 into the loss counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The loss counter is used to count the number of games in which the first AT mode transition lottery was not won while staying in the advantageous zone. In step S4202, a 200G flag is set in each flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The 200G flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the period for counting the number of games using the loss counter is up to 200 games. After executing step S4202, processing for the second point lottery is executed in step S4203. Details of the second point lottery processing will be described later.

<Game count update process>
The number-of-games-played update process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 70. This process is executed in step S314 of the lottery process (Fig. 18), and is executed in place of the number-of-games-played update process of Fig. 35. In Fig. 70, the same steps as those in Fig. 35 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1108, the value of the loss counter stored in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106 is updated by subtracting 1, and then in step S1109, it is determined whether the value of the loss counter is 0. If the value of the loss counter is 0, in step S4301, it is determined whether the 200G flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If the 200G flag is set, this means that the number of games in a losing streak has reached 200. In this case, in step S4302, the point lottery flag A is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The point lottery flag A is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the trigger for this award lottery is based on the number of games in a losing streak reaching 200 (Figure 68).

After step S4302 is executed, in step S4303, the 200G flag in the various flag storage area 106d is cleared and the 400G flag is set in the area 106d, and then in step S4304, a process is executed to input 200 into the loss counter in the various counter area 106e. The 400G flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the game counting period using the loss counter is from 201 games to 400 games.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4301 (the 200G flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S4305, where it is determined whether or not the 400G flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d. If the 400G flag is set, this means that the number of games on a winning streak has reached 400. In this case, in step S4306, the point lottery flag B is set in the various flags storage area 106d. The point lottery flag B is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the trigger for this award lottery is based on the number of games on a winning streak having reached 400 (Figure 68).

After execution of step S4306, in step S4307, the 400G flag in the various flag storage area 106d is cleared and the 600G flag is set in said area 106d, and then in step S4304, a process is executed to input 200 into the loss counter in the various counter area 106e. Note that the 600G flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the period for counting the number of games using the loss counter is from 401 games to 600 games.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4305 (the 400G flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S4308, where it is determined whether or not the 600G flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d. If the 600G flag is set, this means that the number of games in a losing streak has reached 600. In this case, in step S4309, the point lottery flag C is set in the various flags storage area 106d. The point lottery flag C is used by the CPU 102 to determine that the current point award lottery trigger is based on the number of games in a losing streak reaching 600 (Figure 68). In step S4310, the 600G flag is cleared, and then the process of step S1111 (the process of setting the point trigger flag) is executed.

<First point lottery processing>
The first point lottery process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 71(a). This process is executed in step S1208 of the winning result processing (Figure 36), and is executed in place of the first point lottery process in Figure 41. In Figure 71(a), the same steps as those in Figure 41 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1701 (no AT flags are set), the process proceeds to step S4401, where it is determined whether any point lottery flags are set in the various flags storage area 106 of RAM 106. If any point lottery flags are set, in step S4402, a point lottery table corresponding to the point lottery flag is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 72, the point lottery table is a table used to conduct both an awarding lottery to determine whether or not points will be awarded, and, if points are awarded, a point number lottery to determine how many points to award. In this embodiment, three types of points are set for the number of points to be awarded: 5 points, 10 points, and 20 points.

In step S4402, for example, if point lottery flag A is set, point lottery table A corresponding to that is obtained (Figure 72). Point lottery table A is set for a 200-game losing streak. In this table A, the probability of 0 points (no points being awarded) is 70%, the highest. The probabilities of 5 points, 10 points, and 20 points being awarded are also equal, set at 10% each. In point lottery table B for a 400-game losing streak, the point award probability and the allocation rate for each point number are set to the same probabilities as point lottery table A.

In point lottery table C for when you're stuck with 600 games, the probability of the number of points being 0 is 50%, which is set lower than in point lottery tables A and B. In other words, the more games you're stuck with, the more likely you are to be awarded points. When points are awarded, 5 points and 10 points have the same probability, and 20 points, which corresponds to the bonus award value, is set lower than these.

Furthermore, in point lottery table D when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, and in point lottery table E when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the point award probability and the allocation rate for each point number are set to the same as in point lottery table C.

Note that the above point lottery tables A to E are merely examples, and the point award probability and point allocation probability can be set as desired. Also, while a separate lottery table is used in response to the fulfillment of each trigger, this is not limiting, and a common lottery table may be provided for all triggers (a configuration in which there is no difference between the point award probability and point allocation rate for each trigger).

Returning to the explanation of the first point lottery process (Figure 71(a)), after the point lottery table is acquired in step S4402, the point granting lottery process is executed in step S1708. In the point granting lottery process, the number of points is determined by lottery based on the acquired point lottery table and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106.

<Process for second point lottery>
The second point lottery process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 71(b). This process is executed in step S4203 of the first section display process (Fig. 69(b)), and is executed in place of the second point lottery process in Fig. 44. In Fig. 71(b), the same steps as in Fig. 44 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After setting the point trigger command in step S1902, step S4501 retrieves point lottery table F from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. Note that because the second point lottery process is executed at the start of the favorable zone (see Figures 43 and 71(b)), step S4501 assumes that the current point awarding lottery trigger is based on the start of the favorable zone, and retrieves the corresponding point lottery table. In point lottery table F, as shown in Figure 72, the probability of the number of points being 0 (no points being awarded) is 70%, and similar to point lottery tables A and B, the point awarding probability is set low. However, when points are awarded, the allocation of points is 0% for 5 points, and the allocation rate for 10 points is correspondingly higher. In other words, when points are awarded at the start of the favorable zone, points are less likely to be awarded, but when they are awarded, a higher number of points are awarded. Note that, like the other point lottery tables, point lottery table F is merely an example, and the point award probability and point allocation can be set arbitrarily.

Next, we will explain the control processes executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 in this embodiment.

<Start-up performance setting process>
The start-up effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 73. This process is executed in step S2206 of the effect setting process (Fig. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the start-up effect setting process of Fig. 48. In Fig. 73, the same steps as in Fig. 48 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2310, it is determined whether a favorable zone start command (step S1810 in Figure 43) has been received as the current start command. If a favorable zone start command has been received, in step S2311, a favorable zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183.

In step S4601, the main control unit 101 determines the number of points (awarded points) awarded at the point awarding opportunity at the start of the advantageous zone. This process is performed based on the point awarding command (step S1907 in Figure 44) sent from the main control unit 101. Note that the point awarding command includes information indicating that points have been awarded, as well as information indicating the number of points awarded in the current awarding lottery and the total number of points.

In this step, it is determined whether a point-awarding command has been received as the current start command, and if not, the awarded points are determined to be 0 points. On the other hand, if a point-awarding command has been received, the command is analyzed and the awarded points are determined. As already explained, in the point-awarding lottery at the start of the advantageous zone in the main control unit 101, the probability of awarding 5 points is set to 0% (Figure 72), so the awarded points determined here will be either 0 points, 10 points, or 20 points.

In step S4602, a sub-point lottery table corresponding to the awarded points determined in step S4601 is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. Sub-points are points awarded by the display control device 81 in addition to the awarded points on the main control device 101 side, and the sub-point lottery table is a table used to draw lots to determine whether or not points will be awarded and the number of points.

As shown in Figure 74, the sub-point lottery table sets multiple types of point numbers as the number of points that can be awarded in one awarding process, and a selection probability is set for each of these point numbers. In this embodiment, four types of awardable point numbers are set: 0 points (no sub-points awarded), 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points.

Furthermore, the various table storage area 182a has multiple sub-point lottery tables corresponding to the size of the points awarded by the main control device 101. As already explained, the points awarded at the point awarding opportunity at the start of the advantageous zone are either 0 points, 10 points, or 20 points. In this embodiment, three types of sub-point lottery tables are provided: a table for awarding 0 points, a table for awarding 10 points, and a table for awarding 20 points.

In the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points on the main control device 101 side are 0 points, the probability that the sub-points will be 0 (no sub-points will be awarded) is 40%, and the probabilities that the sub-points will be 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points are all 20%. Also, in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 10 points, the probability that the sub-points will be 0 points is 40%, and the probabilities that the sub-points will be 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points are 30%, 20%, and 10%, respectively. Also, in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 20 points, the probability that the sub-points will be 0 points is 50%, and the probabilities that the sub-points will be 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points are 20%, 20%, and 10%, respectively.

Comparing the point allocation rates for when sub-points are awarded between the lottery tables, in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 10, the probability of 10 sub-points being awarded is 50%, which is higher than the probability (33.3%) in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 0, and the probability (40%) in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 20. Furthermore, in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 20, the probability of 20 sub-points being awarded is 40%, which is higher than the probability (33.3%) in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 0, and the probability (33.3%) in the sub-point lottery table when the awarded points are 10.

In other words, if the assigned points on the main control device 101 side are 10 points, 10 sub-points are more likely to be selected than when other point numbers are used, and if the assigned points on the main control device 101 side are 20 points, 20 sub-points are more likely to be selected than when other point numbers are used. In other words, when sub-points are awarded, the greater the assigned points on the main control device 101 side, the more likely it is that larger sub-points will be awarded.

Note that the above numerical values for the number of sub-points and the sub-point lottery table are merely examples and are not limited to the above. The number of sub-points, the number of point types, the probability of awarding sub-points, and the allocation probability of each point number can be set as desired.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process (Figure 73), after the sub-point lottery table is acquired in step S4602, the sub-point lottery process is executed in step S4603. In the sub-point lottery process, a sub-point lottery is performed based on the acquired sub-point lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183.

In step S4604, the sub-points drawn in step S4603 are added to the awarded points determined in step S4601. For example, if 10 points are determined as the awarded points and 10 points are drawn as the sub-points, the sum of these points is calculated as 20 points.

In steps S4605 and S4606, the results of the addition in step S4604 are stored in the point information storage area 183d of RAM 183 as performance possible points and total points, respectively. As shown in FIG. 75(a), the point information storage area 183d is provided with a performance possible point storage area 183e and a total point storage area 183f. In step S4605, the results of the addition as performance possible points are stored in the performance possible point storage area 183e, and in step S4606, the results of the addition as total points are stored in the total point storage area 183f. Details of performance possible points and total points will be described later.

If the awarded points determined in step S4601 above are 0 points, the addition result stored in steps S4605 and S4606 will be the sub-points obtained by the lottery in step S4603 above.

In step S4607, trigger flag A is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The trigger flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine which point award trigger (point award trigger on the main control device 101 side) this time is, and as shown in Figure 75 (b), trigger flags A to F are set corresponding to each award trigger. Trigger flag A indicates that the current point award trigger is an award trigger based on the start of an advantageous zone.

After step S4607 is executed, processing for the award suggestion effect is executed in step S4608, and then processing for the total suggestion effect is executed in step S4609. In this embodiment, two types of point-related effects are set: an award suggestion effect that indicates that points have been awarded and the number of points awarded at that time (the number of points awarded in one point awarding process), and a total suggestion effect that indicates the total value of awarded points (total points). The award suggestion effect processing in step S4608 is processing for executing the award suggestion effect, and the total suggestion effect processing in step S4609 is processing for executing the total suggestion effect. Details of each of these processes will be described later.

After step S4609 is executed, other start-up effect setting processing is executed in step S2315, and then this start-up effect setting processing is terminated.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The all-stop effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 76. This process is executed in step S2210 of the effect setting process (Fig. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the all-stop effect setting process of Fig. 49. In Fig. 76, the same steps as in Fig. 49 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in Figure 76 (a), if a negative judgment is made in step S2401 (if the CZ start command has not been received), step S2403 determines whether a CZ end command has been received as the current all-stop command. If a CZ end command has been received, proceed to step S4701, where it determines whether a point trigger command (step S1312 in Figure 37) has been received as the current all-stop command. The point trigger command contains information indicating that a point awarding trigger has been established, as well as information indicating which trigger this awarding trigger is.

If a point trigger command has been received, proceed to step S4702, where trigger flag E is set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. Trigger flag E is used by CPU 181 to determine that a point award trigger has been established based on the CZ mode ending without winning the first AT mode transition lottery (Figure 75 (b)). In step S4703, award suggestion effect processing is executed. This processing is the same as step S4608 above. After step S4703 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4701 above (if a point trigger command has not been received), proceed to step S2406, where CZ end effect setting processing is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 76(b), if a negative judgment is made in step S2407 (if neither the first AT start command nor the second AT start command has been received), then in step S2409 it is determined whether a first AT end command has been received as the current full stop command. If a first AT end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4704, where it is determined whether a point achievement command has been received. If a point achievement command has been received, then release processing is executed in step S4705, and then other full stop effect setting processing is executed in step S2423. The release processing in step S4705 will be described later.

On the other hand, if a point achievement command has not been received, step S4706 determines whether a point trigger command (step S1513 in Figure 39) has been received. If a point trigger command has been received, proceed to step S4707, where trigger flag F is set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. Trigger flag F is used by the CPU 181 to determine that a point award trigger has been established based on the first AT mode ending without winning the second AT mode transition lottery (Figure 75 (b)).

In the following step S4708, processing for the award suggestion effect is executed. This processing is the same as step S4608 above. After step S4708 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S4706 above (if the point trigger command has not been received), processing proceeds to step S2414, where processing for setting the first AT end effect is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 76(c), if a negative judgment is made in step S2415 (the second AT end command has not been received), step S4709 determines whether a point trigger command has been received as the current full stop command. As already explained, in this embodiment, the main control unit 101 is configured to trigger a point award when 200 games, 400 games, or 600 games have been played, and this step determines whether these award triggers have been triggered.

If a point trigger command has been received, proceed to step S4710 and set the corresponding trigger flag in the various flag storage area 183a. In step S4710, based on the received point trigger command, it is determined whether the established award trigger is a 200-game, 400-game, or 600-game sticky. Then, if it is a 200-game sticky, trigger flag B is set; if it is a 400-game sticky, trigger flag C is set; and if it is a 600-game sticky, trigger flag D is set (Figure 75 (b)).

In step S4711, the award suggestion processing is executed. This processing is the same as step S4608 above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4709 above (a point trigger command has not been received), a judgment is made in step S2419 as to whether an initialization command has been received. If an initialization command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4712, where the point information (performance-available points, total points, etc.) stored in the point information storage area 183d of RAM 183 is erased. After step S4711 or step S4712 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2423, where other performance setting processing when all the buttons are stopped is executed.

<Processing for grant suggestion effect>
The grant suggestion presentation processing of steps S4608, S4703, S4708, and S4711 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4801, it is determined whether a point-granting command has been received from the main control unit 101. If a point-granting command has been received, i.e., if points have been granted on the main control unit 101 side, the process proceeds to step S4802, where processing is executed to add the granted points to the current possible performance points. In this step, the granted points on the main control unit 101 side are determined based on the received point-granting command, and the determined granted points are added to the current possible performance points stored in the possible performance point storage area 183e of RAM 183. For example, if the determined granted points are 5 points and the current possible performance points are 10 points, 15 points are derived as the result of their addition. In the following step S4803, the result of the addition derived in step S4802 is stored in the possible performance point storage area 183e as new possible performance points, and the possible performance points are updated.

Here, we will explain the suggested effects and possible effects points.

First, let's explain the award suggestion effect. As already explained, the award suggestion effect indicates that points have been awarded and the number of points awarded (the number of points awarded in one point awarding process). Note that, as will be explained in more detail later, the award suggestion effect is not completely linked to the actual points awarded, but rather functions as an effect that suggests the points awarded as part of the effect.

While the specific form of the award suggestion effect is not particularly limited, this embodiment employs the point suggestion effect (Figure 55) of the first embodiment described above. That is, while the point suggestion effect of the first embodiment described above indicated the accumulated points (total points) at that time based on the size of the bubble image, the award suggestion effect of this embodiment is configured to indicate the number of points awarded at the current award trigger based on the size of the bubble image. The types of award suggestion effects include a small bubble effect (Figure 55(a)), a medium bubble effect (Figure 55(b)), a large bubble effect (Figure 55(c)), and an extra-large bubble effect (Figure 55(d)), and the larger the bubble image displayed, the greater the number of points that will be awarded this time.

Note that the award suggestion effect does not explicitly indicate the number of points using numbers or the like, so even if one of the above effects is executed, the player will not be able to ascertain the specific number of points. In other words, by looking at the award suggestion effect, it is possible to roughly predict whether the number of points awarded will be high or low.

Next, we will explain the possible performance points. The possible performance points are like a reserve point for performing a grant suggestion performance, and in this embodiment, the possible performance points are consumed to perform a grant suggestion performance. Specifically, as shown in Figure 78 (c), a set of already-performed points (used points) is set for each type of grant suggestion performance, and when a grant suggestion performance is performed, the already-performed points corresponding to that type are deducted from the possible performance points. For example, when a grant suggestion performance for a small bubble performance is performed, 5 already-performed points are deducted from the possible performance points at that time, and the remainder becomes the reserve point for performing the next grant suggestion performance. Therefore, the grant suggestion performance will be performed within the range of the possible performance points.

As already explained, the performance points held as the points available for performance are awarded at the start of the advantageous period as the sum of the points awarded on the main control device 101 side and the sub-points on the display control device 81 side (steps S4603 to S4605 in Figure 73). However, this does not end with the initial awarding; if new points are awarded by the main control device 101 thereafter, the number of points awarded is cumulatively added to the performance points available for performance. The processing of steps S4801 to S4803 above corresponds to this cumulative addition processing.

After step S4803 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S4801 (if a point awarding command has not been received), step S4804 determines whether the current number of points available for performance is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 5). This process determines whether the current number of points available for performance is sufficient to execute the award suggestion performance. Therefore, the predetermined value in this step is the minimum number of points required to execute the award suggestion performance, in other words, the minimum number of points that have already been executed when executing the award suggestion performance (5 points; Figure 78 (b)).

If the number of possible performance points is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, proceed to step S4805 and obtain a type lottery table corresponding to the trigger flag set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The type lottery table is a table used to perform both a performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute a bonus suggestion performance, and a type lottery to determine the type (mode) of the bonus suggestion performance if it is executed.

As shown in Figure 79 (a), the type lottery table for the award suggestion effect is set for each point award trigger, and in type lottery table A corresponding to the award trigger at the start of the advantageous zone, the probability of the award suggestion effect being executed is set to 10% (with a 90% probability of not being executed), and the type allocation probability when the award suggestion effect is executed is set to a 3% probability each for small bubble effect to large bubble effect, and a 1% probability for extra large bubble effect.

However, when the execution of a payout suggestion effect is selected, the type is allocated within the range of the points available for execution at that time. For example, if the number of points available for execution at that time is 10, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the large bubble effect and extra-large bubble effect, which have more than 10 points already rendered, are excluded from selection, and the type of payout suggestion effect is selected from among the small bubble effect, which has 5 points already rendered, and the medium bubble effect, which has 10 points already rendered. At that time, the 3% allocated to the large bubble effect and the 1% allocated to the extra-large bubble effect are replaced with the small bubble effect, which has the fewest points already rendered, and a type lottery is held with the small bubble effect allocated at 7% and the medium bubble effect allocated at 3%. In other words, if some types are excluded from selection, the type with the fewer points already rendered is more likely to be selected.

As shown in Figure 79 (a), the lottery tables corresponding to other triggers also set the probability of executing a grant suggestion effect and the probability of allocating types when a grant suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in type lottery table B corresponding to a 200-game stuck award trigger and type lottery table C corresponding to a 400-game stuck award trigger, the execution probability of a grant suggestion effect is set to 20% (with an 80% chance of not executing), and in type lottery table D corresponding to a 600-game stuck award trigger, the execution probability of a grant suggestion effect is set to 30% (with a 70% chance of not executing). In other words, in the case of a grant trigger based on the number of stuck games, the more games progress from the start of the advantageous period (in other words, the closer you get to the end of the advantageous period), the more likely it is that a grant suggestion effect will be executed.

In addition, the probability of the award suggestion effect being executed is set to 40% (the probability of it not being executed is 60%) in type lottery table E, which corresponds to the award trigger when CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, and type lottery table F, which corresponds to the award trigger when first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery.

Although not shown in Figure 79(a), the selection probabilities for each type are set separately in the type lottery tables B to F. When the execution of the award suggestion effect is selected, the type is allocated within the range of points that can be produced at that time, just as in the case of the award trigger at the start of the advantageous zone. At that time, the probability assigned to the type that is not eligible for selection is replaced with the small bubble effect with the fewest points already produced.

Note that the above lottery tables for each type are merely examples and are not limited to the above configurations. The probability of the award suggestion effect being executed and the allocation probability for each type can be set as desired.

Returning to the explanation of the award suggestion effect processing (Figure 77), after the type lottery table is acquired in step S4805, a type lottery is executed in step S4806 to select the type of point suggestion effect. In this step, a lottery is executed to select the type of effect for the award suggestion effect based on the type lottery table acquired above, the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183, and the possible points updated in step S4803.

In step S4807, the effect data is set so that the type of grant suggestion effect selected by lottery in step S4806 is executed. In the following step S4808, an award suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The award suggestion flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that an award suggestion effect should be executed. When the award suggestion flag is set in this way, in other processing of step S2211 in the effect setting process (Figure 47), the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled so that the award suggestion effect of the type selected above is executed based on the set effect data. At that time, the award suggestion flag set in the various flag storage area 183a above is cleared.

The timing of the award suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and may be the start of the game (when the lever is turned on or when the reels start spinning), midway through the game (when a specified stop operation is performed or when a specified period of time has passed since the start of the game), or the end of the game (when all reels 32L to 32R have stopped).

After step S4808 is executed, in step S4809, the already-executed points corresponding to the lottery result for the effect type are determined. For example, if the selected type is a small bubble effect, 5 points are calculated as already-executed points. In step S4810, the already-executed points determined in step S4809 are subtracted from the current possible performance points. In step S4811, the result of this subtraction is stored in the possible performance point storage area 183e as new possible performance points, and the possible performance points are updated. By processing steps S4809 to S4811 above, the amount of the current execution of the award suggestion effect is reflected in the possible performance points. After step S4811 is executed, this award suggestion effect processing ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S4804 (if the number of points available for performance is less than the predetermined value), the number of points available for performance is insufficient, so the award suggestion performance will not be executed, and steps S4805 to S4811 will be skipped, and the award suggestion performance processing will end.

<Total suggestion production processing>
The total suggestion effect processing in step S4609 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 80.

First, in step S4901, it is determined whether a point-granting command has been received from the main control unit 101. If a point-granting command has been received, i.e., if points have been granted on the main control unit 101 side, the process proceeds to step S4902, where processing is performed to add the granted points to the current total points. In this step, the granted points on the main control unit 101 side are determined based on the received point-granting command, and the determined granted points are added to the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of RAM 183. In the following step S4903, the addition result derived in step S4902 is stored in the total point storage area 183f as new total points, and the total points are updated.

Here, we will explain the total suggestion effect and total points. As already explained, the total suggestion effect suggests the total value of awarded points (total points). In other words, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned award suggestion effect makes the player aware of the addition of points, thereby increasing interest in the game of accumulating points, while the total suggestion effect shows the player how many points have been awarded overall, giving the player the impression that they are almost there, for example. These effects are combined to stimulate the player's desire to continue playing.

While the specific form of the total suggestion effect is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the total points are suggested by the color of the light emitted by the upper lamp 63. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 first issues a notification urging the player to operate the effect switch 66, such as "Press the effect button." This notification is issued at the start of the game or at a predetermined timing during the game. Then, as shown in FIG. 81(b), when the player operates the effect switch 66, the upper lamp 63 emits light, as shown in FIG. 81(c). There are four light colors available: blue, yellow, green, and red, with blue to red indicating a higher total point count. Because the total suggestion effect does not explicitly indicate the number of points using numbers or the like, the player cannot determine the specific number of points by looking at the color of the light emitted by the upper lamp 63. In other words, the total suggestion effect allows the player to roughly estimate whether the total points are high or low.

The color of the light emitted by the upper lamp 63 is selected to correspond to the total point value, but in this embodiment, the selection is made to correspond to the total points obtained by adding the total points on the main control device 101 and the sub-points on the display control device 81. At that time, if new points are awarded by the main control device 101, the awarded points are reflected in the total points, and steps S4901 to S4903 above are the processing for this purpose.

Note that, unlike the case of possible performance points, even if a total suggestion performance is executed, the corresponding points will not be subtracted from the total points. In other words, at the start of the advantageous period, the total points are assigned a starting value by adding up the points awarded on the main control device 101 side and the sub-points on the display control device 81 side, and then the total points will continue to increase each time points are awarded on the main control device 101 side.

Returning to the explanation of the total suggestion effect processing (Figure 80), after execution of step S4903 or if a negative judgment is made in step S4901 (no point awarding command has been received), step S4904 determines whether a suggestion effect flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. If the suggestion effect flag is not set, proceed to step S4905, where an effect execution lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a total suggestion effect. In this step, an execution lottery table for the total suggestion effect is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and the above lottery is executed based on the lottery table and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183.

The probability of winning when drawing a lottery to execute an effect is not particularly limited, but when drawing a lottery for each game as in this embodiment, it is preferable to set the probability of winning lower than the probability of not winning. It is also possible to configure the lottery to execute a total suggestion effect when a predetermined trigger is met, such as when a specific combination stops on reels 32L-32R or when a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of the advantageous zone.

In step S4906, it is determined whether or not the execution of the total suggestion effect was won in the effect execution lottery process of step S4905. If the result is a win, the process proceeds to step S4907, where the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of RAM 183 are determined. In step S4908, the type lottery table corresponding to the determined total points is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 82, multiple tables corresponding to the number of total points are set as type lottery tables for total suggestion effects, and in step S4907, the table corresponding to the current total points is obtained from these tables. In the type lottery tables shown in Figure 82, the total points are divided into less than 24 points, 25 to 39 points, 40 to 49 points, and 50 points or more, which correspond to the number of total points: low, medium, high, and above the bonus point award value.

In the type lottery table for total suggestion effects, the selection probability of the effect mode (light color of the upper lamp 63) is set. For example, in the type lottery table for when the total points are less than 24 points, green and red are excluded from selection, and the probability of blue is set at 67%, and the probability of yellow is set at 33%. We will not go into the detailed numerical settings of each type lottery table, but in the type lottery table for total suggestion effects, the selection probability of each light color is set so that the higher the total points, the more likely it is that a higher-ranked light color will be selected.

Please note that the above lottery tables for each category are merely examples, and the point allocation for each category and the probability of selecting each light color can be set as desired.

After obtaining the type lottery table in step S4908, in step S4909, a type lottery for a total suggestion effect is performed based on the obtained type lottery table and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. In step S4910, the effect data is set so that the total suggestion effect of the type selected by the type lottery in step S4909 is executed.

In step S4911, a total suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The total suggestion flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that a total suggestion effect should be executed. When the total suggestion flag is set in this manner, in other processing of step S2211 in the effect setting process (Figure 47), the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled so that the total suggestion effect of the selected type is executed based on the effect data set above. At that time, the total suggestion flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared.

The timing of when the total suggestion effect is executed is not particularly limited, and may be the start of the game (when the lever is turned on or when the reels start spinning), during the game (when a specified stop operation is performed or when a specified period of time has passed since the start of the game), or the end of the game (when all reels 32L to 32R have stopped).

After step S4911 is executed, if a positive judgment is made in step S4904 (if the suggestion effect flag is set) or a negative judgment is made in step S4906 (if the effect execution lottery is not won), the total suggestion effect processing is terminated. Note that if the suggestion effect flag is set, the processing from step S4905 onwards is skipped to avoid overlapping with the grant suggestion effect.

<Release Treatment>
The release process in step S4705 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S5101, effect data for executing the point release effect is set. Note that the point release effect is the same as the point release effect (Figure 56) in the first embodiment described above. In step S5102, a release effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The release effect flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that a point release effect should be executed, and is cleared when the point release effect is executed.

In step S5103, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the point information stored in the point information storage area 183d of RAM 183. Specifically, the performance possible points and total points stored in the performance possible point storage area 183e and total point storage area 183f, respectively, are changed to their initial values (0), or the information for these points is erased. In other words, the performance possible points and total points are initialized when the total points reach the bonus award value, in other words, when a bonus is awarded based on reaching the bonus award value. After step S5103 is executed, the main release process is terminated.

<About the flow of point production>
The flow of the point suggestion presentation will be explained with reference to Figure 84.

First, let's assume that at award trigger a1 at the start of the advantageous zone, no points are awarded on the main control device 101 side, and 20 sub-points are awarded on the display control device 81 side. In this case, the display control device 81's possible performance points are the sum of these, resulting in 20 points, and the total points are also 20 points.

At award trigger a1, a lottery is held to determine the type of award suggestion effect, and this type lottery is held based on the 20 possible points. In other words, the small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, and large bubble effect, which have 20 or fewer points already rendered, are available for selection (Figure 78 (b)), and the type is selected from among these. Furthermore, this type lottery involves both a lottery to determine whether the effect will be executed and a lottery for the type (Figure 79).

Assume that as a result of the above lottery, a small bubble effect is selected as the award suggestion effect (event a2). For example, if the type lottery for the award suggestion effect is based on the actual total points, the total points will be 0, and therefore the award suggestion effect cannot be executed. In this regard, in this embodiment, the type lottery is based on the added value obtained by adding sub-points, making it possible to execute the award suggestion effect. In other words, because the execution lottery and type lottery for the award suggestion effect are based on numerical information that is greater than the actual total points, it is possible to execute the award suggestion effect even when no points have been awarded on the main control device 101 side.

If a small bubble effect is selected as the award suggestion effect, 5 points are counted as the corresponding already-executed points. These 5 points are then subtracted from the current 20 points, which are the possible points for execution, and the possible points for execution are updated to 15 points. In this case, the total points are maintained at 20 points, which was the point before the type lottery. Therefore, if the execution lottery for the total suggestion effect is won before the next award trigger b1 arrives, a table for less than 24 points is obtained as the type lottery table for the total suggestion effect (Figure 82), and either blue light or yellow light is selected as the type of total suggestion effect.

At the next award trigger b1, let's say that 10 points are awarded by the main control device 101. In this case, the awarded points (10 points) are added to the currently available points (15 points), updating the available points to 25 points. Therefore, the lottery for the type of award suggestion effect at award trigger b1 is based on the available points of 25 points. In this case, the small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, and large bubble effect, which have already been rendered points of 20 points or less, are selected as the type of award suggestion effect.

If, as a result of the above lottery, the bubble effect is selected as the award suggestion effect (event b2), the corresponding effect points of 10 points are calculated. Then, those 10 points are subtracted from the possible effect points of 25 points, and the possible effect points are updated to 15 points.

Furthermore, at award trigger b1, the 10 points awarded by the main control device 101 are added to the total points at that time (20 points), updating the total points to 30 points. Therefore, if the lottery for executing a total suggestion effect is won before the next award trigger c1 arrives, a table for 25 to 39 points (Figure 82) is obtained as the lottery table for the type of total suggestion effect, and either blue light or yellow light is selected as the type of total suggestion effect. In this case, yellow light is more likely to be selected than when the total points are less than 24 points, making it more likely that an increase in total points will be suggested.

At the next award trigger c1, let's say that no points are awarded on the main control unit 101 side. In this case, the number of points that can be awarded does not change and remains at 15 points. Then, based on these points that can be awarded, a lottery is held to determine the type of award suggestion effect that will be produced at award trigger c1 (event c2). In this case, small bubble effects and medium bubble effects with 15 or fewer points that have been produced are selected, and the type of award suggestion effect is selected from among them. Therefore, even if no points have been awarded on the main control unit 101 side, it is possible to execute an award suggestion effect that is either a small bubble effect or a medium bubble effect.

In this way, in this embodiment, the already-executed points corresponding to the execution of the award suggestion effect are subtracted from the possible points, and the execution of the award suggestion effect at the next effect execution trigger is controlled based on the remaining possible points. The advantages of this configuration will now be explained with reference to Figure 85. For ease of explanation, it will be assumed that the display control device 81 does not award sub-points, and that the main control device 101 awards 10 points at the first award trigger A, awards 5 points at the second award trigger B, and awards no points at the third award trigger C.

As shown in Figure 85(a), for example, in a configuration in which the execution of the award suggestion effect is controlled in units of each award point (a configuration in which the award suggestion effect is executed based on one award point for each award), if an award suggestion effect 231 worth 5 points is executed at the first award trigger A when 10 points are awarded, the unused 5 points (remaining points 232) will end without being used thereafter. Therefore, at the next award trigger B, the award suggestion effect 234 can only be executed within the range of 5 points, which is the new award points 233, and at the next award trigger C, the award suggestion effect cannot be executed because there are no award points to serve as a base. In other words, the points used for the award suggestion effect are only 10 points out of the total 15 points awarded from award trigger A to award trigger C.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(b), if an award suggestion effect 231 for 5 points is performed at the first award trigger A when 10 points are awarded, the remaining 5 points (232) are left as points for executing the next award suggestion effect. Therefore, at the next award trigger B, the award suggestion effect can be executed by expanding the range to 10 points, which is the sum of the remaining 5 points (232) from the previous trigger and the new award points (233) of 5 points. In this case, if an award suggestion effect 234 for 5 points is performed, the remaining 5 points (235) are left as points for executing the next award suggestion effect. Therefore, at the next award trigger C, even though no points have been awarded, it is possible to execute an award suggestion effect within the range of 5 points. In other words, all 15 points, which is the total of the points awarded from award trigger A to award trigger C, can be used as points for executing the award suggestion effect.

In this way, according to this embodiment, points not used in the award suggestion effect are effectively utilized as points for a later award suggestion effect, preventing unused points from going to waste and enabling the award suggestion effect to be executed efficiently for awarded points. This makes it possible to execute the award suggestion effect assuming a number of points greater than the actual number of awarded points, or to execute the award suggestion effect even when no points have been awarded. In particular, in games in which a bonus is awarded upon reaching a bonus award value, if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of point awarding to increase the opportunities for the award suggestion effect, the difficulty of reaching the bonus award value becomes lower, which forces the level of the bonus to be kept low, reducing its appeal to players and restricting the frequency of point awarding. Considering these circumstances, the effect of this embodiment, which can increase the opportunities for the award suggestion effect while reducing the frequency of point awarding, is more desirable.

Returning to the explanation of the flow of point presentation (Figure 84), let's assume that at the subsequent award trigger n1, no points are awarded on the main control device 101 side, and the number of points available for presentation at that time is 0 points. In this case, the number of points available for presentation is less than the number of points required to execute the award suggestion presentation, so the award suggestion presentation is not executed. Because the execution of the award suggestion presentation is limited in this way in relation to the number of points available for presentation, the frequency of award suggestion presentations is not unnecessarily increased, and the award suggestion presentation is executed in a state where the total points on the main control device 101 side and the total value of sub-points on the display control device 81 side are consistent.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In this embodiment, points are awarded when the awarding conditions are met, and when the total number of points (total points) reaches the bonus awarding value, the player is awarded a bonus (transition to the second AT mode). In addition, an award suggestion effect is displayed as a notification suggesting that bonus points have been awarded, allowing the player to recognize that the total points are increasing toward the bonus awarding value, stimulating the player's desire to further increase their points. In other words, this encourages the player to continue playing.

In this configuration, in order to strongly stimulate the desire to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the number of opportunities for points to be awarded by the main control device 101, increase the frequency of award suggestion effects, and heighten the player's interest in points. However, on the other hand, if there are more opportunities to award points, the difficulty of reaching the bonus award value will decrease, which may result in the bonus being forced to be kept low and reducing its appeal to players. In other words, there is a concern that increasing the frequency of specific notifications may actually diminish the appeal of playing games using points.

In this regard, in this configuration, in addition to the award points awarded by the main control device 101, possible performance points with a value greater than the award points are derived, and the award suggestion effect is executed based on these possible performance points. In this case, the award suggestion effect can be executed based on a value greater than the actual award points, making it possible to increase the frequency of such effects. In this case, the possible performance points are used solely by the display control device 81 to control the execution of the award suggestion effect and are not involved in the awarding of the bonus by the main control device 101, preventing a decrease in the difficulty of reaching the bonus award value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a loss of the appeal of playing using points, while effectively stimulating the desire to continue playing by increasing the notification frequency.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total suggestion effect, which is a notification that suggests the total points, is not based on the actual total points, but is instead executed and controlled based on a total point value greater than the actual total points. For example, if the actual total points are 0, there is a concern that the total suggestion effect may not be able to be executed. However, with this configuration, the total suggestion effect can be executed even when the actual total points are 0. In other words, with this embodiment, it is possible to increase not only the frequency of the award suggestion effect, but also the frequency of the total suggestion effect.

The performance points are calculated by adding the points awarded by the main control device 101 and the sub-points derived by the display control device 81.

When configuring the award suggestion effect, it is assumed that the player will predict the points (amount awarded) awarded based on the content of each effect and then add them up to estimate an approximate total number of points. Therefore, if the execution of the award suggestion effect is controlled based on a numerical value different from the awarded points, an award suggestion effect that is far removed from the actual awarded points will be executed, which could lead to the player predicting a total value that deviates significantly from the actual total number of points. In this regard, with this configuration, the awarded points are used to derive the possible points, making it possible to derive the possible points while maintaining a correlation with the actual awarded points. Therefore, even though the configuration uses possible points that are different from the awarded points, it is possible to prevent the content of the award suggestion effect from diverging significantly from the actual number of awarded points, and it is possible to align or bring the total value predicted by the player from the award suggestion effect closer to the actual total number of points.

In addition, because the result of adding the awarded points and sub-points is used, even if the awarded points are 0, it is possible to secure at least the value of the sub-points as possible points for performance. This makes it possible to execute the award suggestion performance regardless of whether award points have actually been awarded at the time of the award trigger, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of award suggestion performance.

In addition, the total points are calculated by sequentially adding newly awarded points to the sum of the initial awarded points and sub-points, and are essentially calculated by adding the total awarded points and sub-points. As a result, as mentioned above, it is possible to execute a total suggestion effect even when the actual total points are 0 points, making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of total suggestion effects.

The size of the possible performance points is determined based on the size of the awarded points. Specifically, the larger the awarded points, the easier it is to derive larger sub-points, and the larger the possible performance points become.

With the above configuration, the more points awarded, the higher the frequency of the award suggestion effects and the amount of points awarded indicated by the award suggestion effects, making it possible to prevent a discrepancy between the impression the player gets from the award suggestion effects and the actual amount of points accumulated. In other words, the greater the amount of points awarded or accumulated, the stronger the player's sense of anticipation will be, so the frequency of the award suggestion effects will not simply be increased unnecessarily, but it will be possible to increase the frequency of the award suggestion effects while reflecting the actual amount of points awarded or accumulated.

Sub-points are calculated at the start of the advantageous zone. With this configuration, sub-points are calculated in time with the start of the advantageous zone and added to the award points to obtain performance points, making it possible to start play in the advantageous zone with an abundant supply of performance points. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of performance suggestion effects from the beginning of the advantageous zone, allowing play in the advantageous zone to proceed while appropriately increasing the player's anticipation of reaching the bonus award value.

By configuring the display control device 81 to derive sub-points, the frequency of award suggestion effects can be increased while minimizing the processing load on the main control device 101. Considering that the main control device 101 generally has stronger anti-fraud measures in comparison to the display control device 81, this embodiment is configured to leave to the main control device 101 processing related to the player's interests, such as general control for progressing the game, point awarding, and control of awarding bonuses when the total reaches the bonus value. However, in this case, it is expected that the processing load on the main control device 101 will be high. In such a situation, if the main control device 101 were to be configured to control the execution of award suggestion effects and derive sub-points, there is a concern that processing lags and other issues could occur, hindering gameplay. However, with this configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Furthermore, this configuration avoids complicating the processing configuration of the main control unit 101 and simplifies the control program. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of the award suggestion effect while suppressing an increase in program capacity, making it an ideal configuration for gaming machines with limited memory capacity that can be installed in the main control unit 101.

The system updates the possible performance points by subtracting the performance points of the previously executed suggestive performance from the possible performance points, and then executes the next suggestive performance based on the updated possible performance points.

As explained with reference to Figure 85, for example, in a configuration in which an award suggestion effect is executed based on one award point for each award, if an award suggestion effect corresponding to a value smaller than the current award points is executed, the unused points will end without being used thereafter. In contrast, in this configuration, when an award suggestion effect is executed with executed points smaller than the possible points, the unused points are left as a value for executing a subsequent award suggestion effect, preventing them from being wasted. In other words, points not used in a previous award suggestion effect can be effectively used to execute a subsequent award suggestion effect, making it possible to efficiently execute award suggestion effects based on given possible points. Therefore, by applying this configuration to a configuration in which an award suggestion effect is executed based on possible points with a value greater than the actual award points, it is possible to further increase the frequency of award suggestion effects.

Achieved points are set for each type of payout suggestion effect (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra-large bubble effect), and the performed points corresponding to the type of specific effect that was executed are subtracted from the possible performance points. Specifically, a unique performed point is set for each type of payout suggestion effect, corresponding to the size of the payout amount indicated by that type (in other words, the player's level of expectation).

When multiple modes of the award suggestion effect are provided, the size of the award points can be suggested depending on which mode of each award suggestion effect is executed. Under such a configuration, for example, if the rendered points of an award suggestion effect are set to a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the mode of the subsequent award suggestion effect, which is executed and controlled based on the updated possible rendering points, will be selected regardless of the mode of the previous award suggestion effect. As a result, there is a concern that the total points predicted by the player from each award suggestion effect will diverge significantly from the actual total points, reducing the player's trust in the award suggestion effect.

In this regard, with this configuration, the amount of possible points to be displayed according to the mode of the previous award suggestion effect is subtracted from the possible points to be displayed, so the mode of the subsequent award suggestion effect can be selected in relation to the mode of the previous award suggestion effect. This makes it possible to align or bring closer the total points predicted by the player from each award suggestion effect to the actual total points. In other words, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of award suggestion effects while preventing a decline in the player's trust in the award suggestion effects.

The system is configured to determine the mode of the next award suggestion effect within the range of the updated possible points. Specifically, the system is configured to determine the mode of the next award suggestion effect from among the multiple possible modes of the award suggestion effect that is equal to or less than the possible points at that time.

In the above configuration, modes corresponding to values exceeding the currently available points are excluded from selection, preventing the selection of a later award suggestion mode that deviates from the actual total points. This allows the total points predicted by the player from each award suggestion effect to be aligned or brought closer to the actual total points.

Sixth Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that the point award suggestion effect is executed in a situation where the point award trigger has not been established in the main control device 101. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 86 to 91. Note that in these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the above embodiments, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

In this embodiment, a continuous effect is executed as an effect to notify the player that they have won the lottery to transition to the CZ game or AT mode. The continuous effect is performed as a series of effects over multiple games, and is configured to notify the player whether they have won the lottery to transition to the CZ mode, etc., in the final game.

Here, an example of a continuous effect will be explained with reference to Figure 86. Here, we will explain an example of a continuous effect that takes place over three games.

In the game where the continuous performance begins (the first game), a start performance is executed. In this start performance, as shown in FIG. 86(a), a text image 252 such as "If you can transform into a wizard, you win" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 along with a girl character 251. This start performance is executed, for example, when the start lever 41 is operated in the first game of the continuous performance.

In subsequent games, whether or not the player has won the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode, etc., is notified based on whether or not the girl character 251 can transform into the wizard character 253. Specifically, in the second game, as shown in FIG. 86(b), an image showing the process of the girl character 251 transforming into the wizard character 253 is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, in the third game (the final game in the series of consecutive presentations), an image showing whether or not the transformation was successful is displayed, thereby notifying whether or not the player has won. At that time, if the player has won the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode, etc., an image showing the wizard character 253 who has successfully transformed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 86(c1). On the other hand, if the player has not won the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode, etc., an image showing the girl character 251 who has failed to transform is displayed, as shown in FIG. 86(c2).

The video effects described above are merely one example of a continuous effect format, and other formats are possible, such as having an ally character and an enemy character appear and announcing whether or not a win has been made in CZ mode or the like based on the outcome of their battle. Furthermore, the number of games in a continuous effect is not limited to three, and may be two or four.

When executing consecutive effects for a successful ending or a winning ending, the main control device 101 sets the number of premonition games based on whether CZ mode or the like has been won, and transitions to premonition mode. When transitioning to premonition mode, transition to CZ mode or the like is put on hold until the number of remaining premonition games reaches 0. The display control device 81 controls to execute the above consecutive effects during premonition mode, that is, during the period after winning CZ mode or the like and while transition to that mode is on hold. For example, if the number of premonition games is set to 5 and a consecutive effect of 3 games is to be executed, control is exercised to start the consecutive effects when the number of games remaining in premonition mode reaches 3. This makes it possible to notify the player of a win in CZ mode or the like in the final game of premonition mode. In the above case, effects other than consecutive effects, such as preview effects, are executed in the two games before the start of the consecutive effects, providing so-called excitement.

Next, we will explain the control processes executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 in this embodiment.

<Processing for notifying specific roles>
The specific role notification process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 87. This process is executed in step S2305 of the start-time performance setting process (Fig. 48) in the display control device 81, and more specifically, is executed when a specific role (a so-called rare role) is won. The specific role notification process performs setting processing for consecutive performances for pseudo-premonitions (consecutive performances that notify non-winning of CZ mode, etc.).

First, in step S6101, a chance effect execution lottery is held to determine whether or not a chance effect will be set as the effect for this game. In the chance effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "Chance!!" and characters with exclamation marks are displayed corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (Figure 53 (c)). Note that the probability of winning the chance effect execution lottery may be configured to differ depending on the type of specific combination, game status, setting value, etc.

In step S6102, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S6101 has been won. If the lottery process has been won, in step S6103, the above chance effect is set to be performed as the effect for this game.

After step S6103 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S6102 (if the chance effect execution lottery is not won), step S6104 determines whether a premonition command has been received as the current start command. The premonition command is sent when the main control device 101 transitions to premonition mode, in other words, when the transition to CZ mode or the like has been successful. Note that the premonition command includes information indicating the transition to premonition mode as well as information indicating the number of premonition games.

If a precursor command has not been received, step S6105 determines whether a precursor flag has been set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. The precursor flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that precursor mode is in progress. It is set when the precursor command is received and cleared when precursor mode ends.

If the premonition flag is not set, step S6106 determines whether a pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The pseudo flag allows the CPU 181 to determine that the game is in pseudo premonition mode. Pseudo premonition mode is a mode that keeps the player hopeful that the transition to premonition mode has occurred (in other words, that the player has won CZ mode, etc.), even though the game has not actually transitioned to premonition mode. Continuous effects are executed during this pseudo premonition mode to notify the player that the game has not been won in CZ mode, etc. As with premonition mode, the number of games that the pseudo premonition mode continues is often set to be greater than the number of games in the continuous effects. In such cases, a hype effect (an effect other than a continuous effect) is executed before the start of the continuous effects to make the player hopeful of winning. Because this hype effect is executed to varying degrees even before the start of the continuous effects in premonition mode, it is impossible or difficult for the player to clearly distinguish between premonition mode and pseudo premonition mode.

If the pseudo flag is not set, proceed to step S6107 and a lottery is held to determine whether the pseudo premonition mode will be executed. In this step, the lottery is held based on the table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182 and the lottery counter obtained from the various counter area 183b. The table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode varies depending on the type of transition trigger role that has been won; for example, it is set so that a strong cherry has a higher probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode than a weak cherry.

In step S6108, it is determined whether or not the pseudo premonition mode execution lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S6107. If the lottery has not been won, the specific role notification process is terminated. If the lottery has been won, however, in step S6109, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of games in the pseudo premonition mode (number of pseudo premonition games). In step S6110, the number of pseudo premonition games selected in step S6109 is set in the pseudo premonition counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The pseudo premonition counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games remaining in the pseudo premonition mode, and is decremented by one for each game played.

In step S6111, the number of games in the continuous effect is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The continuous effect counter allows the CPU 191 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the continuous effect. In step S6112, a pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the specific role notification process is terminated. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in any of the above steps S6104 to S6106 (if an omen command has been received, or if either the omen flag or pseudo flag has been set), the process from step S6107 onwards is skipped to avoid overlapping with the continuous effect for the omen or the continuous effect for the pseudo omen that has already been executed, and the specific role notification process is terminated.

<Start-up performance setting process>
The specific role notification process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Figure 88. In this embodiment, a continuous performance setting process of step S6201 is provided after step S4609 (Figure 73). The continuous performance setting process is used to set the continuous performance.

<Continuous performance setting process>
The continuous performance setting process of step S6201 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S6301, it is determined whether a premonition command has been received as the current start command. If a premonition command has been received, in step S6302 the number of premonition games is set in the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. In step S6303, the number of consecutive effects games is set in the consecutive effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b.

After step S6303 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S6301 (if a premonition command has not been received), a judgment is made as to whether a continuous performance flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The continuous performance flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine whether a continuous performance is being executed. If the continuous performance flag is set, i.e., if a continuous performance is being executed, the process proceeds to step S6305, where the value of the continuous performance counter is updated by subtracting 1.

On the other hand, if the continuous performance flag is not set, i.e., if a continuous performance is not currently being executed, step S6306 determines whether it is time to execute (start) a continuous performance. If it is not time to execute a continuous performance, the continuous performance setting process ends. However, if it is time to execute a continuous performance, step S6307 sets the continuous performance flag in the various flag storage area 183a.

After execution of step S6305 or step S6307, step S6308 determines whether a pseudo flag has been set in the flag storage area 183a. If the pseudo flag has not been set, i.e., if the situation is such that a premonition continuous effect should be executed, the process proceeds to step S6309, where the effect data for the premonition continuous effect is set. In this step, the value of the continuous effect counter is referenced to determine which game in the continuous effect the current game corresponds to, and the effect data corresponding to that determined game is set. For example, if this is the first game, the effect data for the start effect described above is set, and if this is the final game, the effect data for the resulting image showing a successful transformation is set.

If a positive judgment is made in step S6308 (if the pseudo flag is set), the process proceeds to step S6310, where the effect data for the consecutive effects used for the pseudo precursor is set. In this step, the value of the consecutive effects counter is also referenced to determine which game in the consecutive effects this game corresponds to, and the effect data corresponding to that determined game is set. At that time, if the final game in the consecutive effects is determined, the effect data for the resulting image of a failed transformation is set.

After step S6309 or step S6310 is executed, step S6311 determines whether the continuous performance counter is 0. If the continuous performance counter is 0, step S6312 clears the continuous performance flag set in the various flag storage area 183a.

In step S6313, it is determined whether a pseudo flag has been set in the various flag storage area 183a. If a pseudo flag has been set, the pseudo flag is cleared in step S6314, and a pseudo premonition end flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S6315. The pseudo premonition end flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that the continuous effects for the pseudo premonition have ended. After step S6315 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S6311 (if the continuous effects counter is not 0) or if a negative judgment is made in step S6313 (if the pseudo flag has not been set), this continuous effects setting process is terminated.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The all-stop effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 90(a). The process shown in Fig. 90(a) is provided as a process executed when a negative determination is made in step S2421 (Fig. 49) in the all-stop effect setting process (Fig. 76) according to the fifth embodiment.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2421 (if neither the first BB end command nor the second BB end command has been received), the process proceeds to step S6401, where it is determined whether or not the pseudo-omen end flag has been set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. As described above, the pseudo-omen end flag is set in the final game in the consecutive effects for pseudo-omen, and therefore the processing of this step determines whether or not the current game is the final game in the consecutive effects for pseudo-omen.

If the pseudo-omen end flag is set, the pseudo-omen end flag is cleared in step S6402, and then in step S6403, it is determined whether the current number of points available for performance is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 5). This process determines whether the current number of points available for performance is sufficient to execute the bonus suggestion performance.

If the number of points available for presentation is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S6404, where a type lottery table corresponding to the end of the pseudo-omen continuous presentation is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. This type table is a table for conducting both a presentation execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute a bonus suggestion presentation, and a type lottery to determine the type (mode) of bonus suggestion presentation if it is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, at the end of a continuous presentation that ends in failure, the display control device 81 is configured to independently execute a bonus suggestion presentation, even though this is not an opportunity for the main control device 101 to award points.

As shown in Figure 90 (b), in the type lottery table for when a continuous effect ends, the probability that a bonus suggestion effect will be executed is set to 10% (with a 90% probability that it will not be executed), which, like type lottery table A in the fifth embodiment, is set lower than the other type lottery tables B to F. Furthermore, when execution of a bonus suggestion effect is selected, the type is allocated within the range of points that can be produced at that time, like type lottery table A in the fifth embodiment. For example, if the number of points that can be produced at that time is 10, large bubble effects and extra-large bubble effects, which have more than 10 points of produced points, are excluded from selection, and the type of bonus suggestion effect is selected from among small bubble effects, which have 5 points of produced points, and medium bubble effects, which have 10 points of produced points.

After the type lottery table is obtained in step S6404, a type lottery is executed in step S6405 to select the type of point suggestion effect. In this step, a type lottery for the point suggestion effect is executed based on the type lottery table obtained above and the counter (random number) for the lottery obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183.

In step S6406, a setting process for the effect data is performed so that the type of award suggestion effect selected by lottery in step S6405 is executed. In step S6407, a grant suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The grant suggestion flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that the award suggestion effect should be executed. When the grant suggestion flag is set in this manner, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled in other processing of step S2211 in the effect setting process (Figure 47) so that the award suggestion effect of the selected type is executed based on the set effect data. In this embodiment, the award suggestion effect is controlled to be executed at the end of the final game in the consecutive effects for pseudo-omen (when reels 32L to 32R are all stopped). At that time, the grant suggestion flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared.

After step S6407 is executed, in step S6408, the already-executed points corresponding to the lottery result for the effect type are determined and subtracted from the current possible effect points. In step S6409, the subtraction result is stored in the possible effect point memory area 183e as the new possible effect points, and the possible effect points are updated. After step S6409 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S6401 above (if the pseudo-omen end flag is not set) or if a negative judgment is made in step S6403 above (if the possible effect points are less than the predetermined value), the process proceeds to step S2423, and other effect setting processing is executed when all the effects have stopped.

In this way, in this embodiment, possible performance points are used to provide an opportunity to execute a bonus suggestion performance at the end of the consecutive pseudo-omen performances, but in addition, an opportunity to execute a bonus suggestion performance is also provided when transitioning to the first AT mode. This configuration will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 91(a). The processing in Figure 91(a) is provided as processing to be executed when a negative judgment is made in step S2403 (Figure 49) in the full stop performance setting processing (Figure 76) related to the fifth embodiment described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2403 (the CZ end command has not been received), step S6501 determines whether the first AT start command (step S1407 in Figure 38) has been received as the current full stop command. If the first AT start command has been received, steps S6502 to S6508 are executed. These processes are similar to steps S6403 to S6409 in Figure 90(a), and are intended to execute the award suggestion effect.

However, in step S6503 of obtaining the type lottery table, instead of the type lottery table for the end of the consecutive effects, a type lottery table corresponding to the start of the first AT mode is obtained. In the lottery table for the start of the first AT, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the probability that the award suggestion effect will be executed is set to 50% (with a 50% probability that it will not be executed), which is set higher than the type lottery table at the end of the consecutive effects and type lottery tables A to F associated with the award trigger. The reason for setting such a higher execution probability is that the award granted when the award value is reached will result in a transition (promotion) to the second AT mode after the end of the first AT mode. By actively performing the award suggestion effect at the start of the first AT mode, the player will be able to play the first AT mode with high anticipation for the transition to the second AT mode, which is thought to make playing in the first AT mode more enjoyable.

The type effect table described above, including the one for the end of consecutive effects, is merely an example and is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the execution probability can be set to the same for the end of consecutive effects and the start of the first AT, or the execution probability for the effect at the start of the first AT can be lower than that for the end of consecutive effects. The specific probabilities can be set as desired.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6501 above (the first AT start command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S6502, where it is determined whether the second AT start command (step S1608 in Figure 40) has been received as the current full stop command. If the second AT start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2408 (processing to set the start effect of the second AT mode); if the second AT start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2409 (processing to determine whether the first AT end command has been received).

<About the flow of the grant suggestion performance>
The flow of the award suggestion effect according to this embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same flow as in the fifth embodiment will be omitted or simplified.

As in the case of Figure 84, at the award trigger a1 at the start of the advantageous zone, no points are awarded on the main control device 101 side, and 20 sub-points are awarded on the display control device 81 side. In this case, the display control device 81's possible points are the sum of these, or 20 points. Then, at the award trigger a1, suppose a small bubble effect is selected as the award suggestion effect (event a2). In this case, the 5 points already produced corresponding to the small bubble effect are subtracted from the 20 possible points, and the possible points are updated to 15 points.

If a series of pseudo-omen effects (Fig. 86) are subsequently executed before the award trigger b1 occurs, the pseudo-omen end flag is set for that final game. As a result, a lottery for the type of award suggestion effect is executed at the end of the final game, even though it is not an award point trigger in the main control unit 101. This type lottery serves to select whether or not to execute the award suggestion effect, and if so, the mode of execution. This type lottery also selects the type of award suggestion effect within the range of points that can be executed at that time. Specifically, only small bubble effects and medium bubble effects with executed points that are below the available points (15 points) are eligible for selection (Fig. 78 (b)); other large bubble effects and extra-large bubble effects are not eligible for selection.

If the bubble effect is selected as a result of the lottery, that effect will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., at the end of the final game. Additionally, the points already displayed (10 points) corresponding to the bubble effect are subtracted from the points available for display at that time (15 points), and the points available for display are updated to 5 points.

If 10 points are subsequently awarded by the main control device 101 at award trigger b1, those awarded points are added to the possible performance points, updating the possible performance points to 15 points. Therefore, at award trigger b1, a lottery is held to determine the type of award suggestion performance, with the possible performance points set to 15 points.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

By configuring the system so that the award suggestion effect is executed when there is no opportunity to award points, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the award suggestion effect is executed without increasing the number of opportunities to award points. This prevents the level of the bonus from decreasing due to an increase in the number of opportunities to award points, while increasing the frequency of the award suggestion effect can effectively stimulate the desire to continue playing.

In addition, in this case, the execution of the award suggestion effect is controlled based on the points available for effect. This prevents the frequency of award suggestion effects from being increased unnecessarily, but rather makes it possible to increase the frequency of award suggestion effects while keeping them in line with the actual total points.

When there is no opportunity to award a prize, the award suggestion effect is performed in conjunction with the execution of a series of pseudo-premonition effects. Since the series of effects notifies players of whether or not they have won in CZ mode, etc., it is expected that when a series of effects is performed, players will be watching with great interest. In this configuration, the award suggestion effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a series of effects, making it easier to draw attention to the award suggestion effect and effectively increasing interest in points.

In addition, with this configuration, the award suggestion effect is performed in response to the consecutive effects for pseudo-premonitions, rather than the consecutive effects for premonitions. For example, a configuration in which the award suggestion effect is performed in response to the consecutive effects for premonitions can be expected to increase attention to the award suggestion effect. However, with this configuration, unless the mode and execution timing of the award suggestion effect are properly adjusted taking into account its relationship with the CZ mode, etc., which is transitioned to after the consecutive effects, there is a concern that the effect of the award suggestion effect may not be properly realized, or the start of the CZ mode, etc., may become unclear, causing confusion for players. In this regard, with this configuration, such tedious adjustments are unnecessary, making it possible to increase attention to the award suggestion effect while minimizing the increase in the effort required for effect design.

The display control device 81 controls the execution of the pseudo-omen series of effects, and is configured to execute the award suggestion effect when the effect ends. This reduces the contribution of the main control device 101 to the execution control of the award suggestion effect when there is no award trigger. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of award suggestion effects while preventing an increase in the processing load on the main control device 101. This configuration also avoids complicating the processing configuration of the main control device 101 and simplifies the control program. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of award suggestion effects while preventing an increase in program capacity, making this a suitable configuration for gaming machines with limited memory capacity that can be installed in the main control device 101.

Seventh Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that a high probability mode is provided in which the probability of execution of the award suggestion effect is increased. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 92 to 94. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the above embodiments, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
The all-stop effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 92. This process is executed in place of the all-stop effect setting process of Fig. 76(c) according to the fifth embodiment. In Fig. 92, the same steps as those in Fig. 76(c) are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2415 (the second AT end command has not been received), step S4709 determines whether a point trigger command has been received as the current full stop command. As already explained, in the fifth embodiment, the main control unit 101 is configured to trigger a point award when 200 games, 400 games, or 600 games have been played, and this step determines whether these award triggers have been triggered.

If a point trigger command has been received, proceed to step S4710 and set the corresponding trigger flag in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. In step S4710, based on the received point trigger command, it is determined whether the established award trigger is a 200-game sticky, 400-game sticky, or 600-game sticky. Then, if it is a 200-game sticky, trigger flag B is set; if it is a 400-game sticky, trigger flag C is set; and if it is a 600-game sticky, trigger flag D is set (Figure 75 (b)).

In step S7101, it is determined whether the current performance possible points stored in the performance possible point memory area 183e of RAM 183 are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 5). If the performance possible points are equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S7102, where a high probability mode transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to high probability mode. In high probability mode, it is easier to win the lottery for executing the award suggestion effect compared to normal mode (low probability mode), and this mode increases the frequency of execution of the effect. In this step, a transition lottery table for high probability mode is obtained from the various table memory area 182a of ROM 182, and the above lottery processing is performed based on the obtained lottery table and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183.

In the transition lottery table for the high probability mode, as shown in Figure 93(a), the transition rate to the high probability mode is set according to the number of games lost. Specifically, the transition rate to the high probability mode is set to 5% for a 200-game or 400-game losing streak, and 10% for a 600-game losing streak. Note that the above transition rates are merely examples, and the specific values can be set as desired.

In step S7103, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode transition lottery has been won, based on the processing result of step S7102. If the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S7104, where effect data for the high probability mode is set. When in high probability mode, a special effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify players that points are likely to be awarded, and the effect data described above is for executing this special effect. Note that one possible way of notifying players that points are likely to be awarded is to display text such as "High probability of points being awarded," for example.

In step S7105, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The high probability flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that high probability mode is in effect. Therefore, by setting the high probability flag, the execution lottery mode for the award suggestion effect transitions to high probability mode.

Furthermore, if the high probability flag is set, in other processing of step S2211 in the effect setting processing (Figure 47), the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled so that the high probability mode effects are executed based on the effect data set above. In this embodiment, control is performed so that the high probability mode effects are executed from the start of the next game.

After step S7105 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S7101 (if the performance possible points are less than the predetermined value) or if a negative judgment is made in step S7103 (if the high probability mode transition lottery has not been won), processing for the award suggestion performance is executed in step S7106, and then processing for setting other performances when all symbols are stopped is executed in step S2423.

<Processing for grant suggestion effect>
The grant suggestion effect processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 94. This processing is performed in step S4608 (Fig. 73), step S4703 (Fig. 76(a)), step S4708 (Fig. 76(b)), and step S7106 (Fig. 92). Note that in Fig. 94, processing similar to the grant suggestion effect processing in Fig. 77 is assigned the same step number, and its description will be omitted or simplified.

After step S4803 (updating the performance points) is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4801 (points have not been awarded), step S7201 determines whether a high probability flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. If the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the game is not in high probability mode, processing from step S4804 (Figure 77) onwards is executed. On the other hand, if the high probability flag is set, the program proceeds to step S7202, where it determines whether the current performance points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 5).

If the current number of possible performance points is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, in step S7203, a type lottery table for high probability mode is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182. In the type lottery table for high probability mode, as shown in Figure 93 (b), the execution of the award suggestion performance is set to 100% (the probability of not executing is 0%), which is higher than in normal mode. In addition, the type allocation probability is set to 30% for each of the small bubble performance and large bubble performance, and 10% for the extra large bubble performance.

In step S7204, a lottery is conducted to determine the type of the payout suggestion effect based on the type lottery table acquired in step S7203 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. The selection of either the small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, or extra-large bubble effect is conducted within the range of possible points, as in the case of the effect type lottery in step S4806 (FIG. 77). For example, if the possible points at that time are 10, the large bubble effect and extra-large bubble effect, which have more than 10 points already rendered, are excluded from selection, and the type of payout suggestion effect is selected from the small bubble effect with 5 points already rendered and the medium bubble effect with 10 points already rendered. In this case, the 30% allocated to the large bubble effect and the 10% allocated to the extra-large bubble effect are replaced by the small bubble effect with the fewest points already rendered, and the type lottery is conducted with 70% allocated to the small bubble effect and 30% allocated to the medium bubble effect.

The type lottery table for the high probability mode described above is merely an example, and is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the probability of the award suggestion effect being executed does not necessarily have to be 100%; it can be less than 100% as long as it is higher than in normal mode. The allocation probability for each type can also be set arbitrarily.

After step S7204 is executed, steps S7205 to S7208 are executed. These steps are the same as steps S4807 to S4811 in the award suggestion performance processing in Figure 77, so their explanation will be omitted.

After step S7208 is executed, step S7209 determines whether the current point award trigger is the first trigger since the transition to high probability mode. In this embodiment, the trigger for transition to high probability mode and the trigger for point award occur in the same game, so the processing of this step can also be said to determine whether the current game is a transition game to high probability mode.

If it is not the first trigger, a lottery for continuing the high probability mode is held in step S7210. In the continuation lottery, the continuation probability of the high probability mode is set to a predetermined probability (e.g., 70%), and the lottery process is performed using the lottery counter obtained from the various counter area 183b. In step S7211, it is determined whether the continuation lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S7210. If the continuation lottery has been won, the high probability mode will be continued and the processing for this award suggestion effect is terminated. Also, if it is the first trigger in step S7209, the processing for steps S7210 and S7211 will be skipped to continue the high probability mode and the processing for this award suggestion effect is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S7211 (if the continuation lottery is not won), the high probability flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared in step S7212. This ends the high probability mode and transitions to normal mode. Also, if the number of possible performance points is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value in step S7202, the process proceeds to step S7212 and the high probability flag is cleared. In other words, if there are insufficient possible performance points, the high probability mode is ended. After step S7212 is executed, this award suggestion performance processing ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a predetermined transition condition is met, the system transitions to a high probability mode, in which the probability of the award suggestion effect being executed is increased. In the high probability mode, the frequency of the award suggestion effect is increased, which increases the player's anticipation that the total points will reach the bonus award value, and can suitably increase the player's motivation to continue playing.

In the above embodiment, a configuration in which this embodiment is applied to the fifth embodiment has been described, but this embodiment can also be applied to the sixth embodiment. In such a configuration, when the high probability mode is entered, the probability of the award suggestion effect being executed when there is no award trigger is also higher than in normal mode.

Eighth Embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, the total points (numerical information to be referenced when executing a total suggestion effect) are derived from the sum of the points awarded on the main control device 101 side and the sub-points on the display control device 81 side, but in this embodiment, the total points are derived based on the points already rendered on the display control device 81 side. This embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 95 to 100. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

<Start-up performance setting process>
The start-up effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 95. This process is executed in step S2206 of the effect setting process (Fig. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the start-up effect setting process of Fig. 73. In Fig. 95, the same steps as in Fig. 73 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In the start-time effect setting process of FIG. 73 relating to the fifth embodiment, step S4606 included a process for storing the sum of the awarded points and sub-points as total points, but the start-time effect setting process of FIG. 95 relating to this embodiment does not include such a process. That is, in this embodiment, after step S4605 stores the sum of the awarded points and sub-points as possible points, the total points are not stored, and the process proceeds to step S4607, where trigger flag A is set in the various flags storage area 183a of RAM 183. Trigger flag A indicates that the current point award trigger is based on the start of a favorable zone.

After step S4607 is executed, in step S8101, processing for the award suggestion effect is executed to execute the award suggestion effect. In the following step S8102, processing for the total suggestion effect is executed to execute the total suggestion effect, and then in step S2315, processing for setting other start-up effects is executed.

<Processing for grant suggestion effect>
The grant suggestion effect processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 96. This processing is performed in step S8101 (Fig. 95), step S4703 (Fig. 76(a)), step S4708 (Fig. 76(b)), and step S4711 (Fig. 76(c)). Note that in Fig. 96, processing similar to the grant suggestion effect processing in Fig. 77 is assigned the same step number, and its description will be omitted or simplified.

After step S4803 (updating the performance points) is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4801 (points have not been awarded), step S4804 determines whether the current performance points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 5). This process determines whether the current performance points are sufficient to execute a performance suggestion. If the performance points are equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S8201, where a type lottery table corresponding to the current performance points is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, multiple tables are set as lottery tables for the type of award suggestion effect according to the number of points that can be produced, and in step S8201, the table that corresponds to the current total points is selected from these tables. In the lottery tables for each type shown in FIG. 97, the points that can be produced are divided into categories of 6 to 10 points, 11 to 20 points, and 21 points or more, and the higher the points that can be produced, the higher the probability of the award suggestion effect being executed. When the execution of the award suggestion effect is selected, the type is allocated within the range of points that can be produced at that time, as in step S4806 in the fifth embodiment above. For example, if the points that can be produced at that time are 10 points, the type of award suggestion effect is selected from among a small bubble effect with 5 points that have been produced, and a medium bubble effect with 10 points that have been produced.

Note that the various numerical values in the type lottery table in Figure 97 are merely examples and are not limited to those shown. Also, the number of divisions for possible performance points may be two, four, or more.

After the type lottery table is obtained in step S8201, a type lottery is executed in step S8202 to select the type of point suggestion effect. In this step, a lottery is executed to select the type of effect for the award suggestion effect based on the type lottery table obtained above and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. Then, in step S4807, the effect data is set so that the award suggestion effect of the type selected by the lottery in step S8202 is executed. In step S4808, a prize suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183, and in step S4809, the number of points that have been displayed corresponding to the result of the lottery for the effect type is determined. For example, if the selected type is a small bubble effect, 5 points are determined as the number of points that have been displayed.

In step S4810, the performance points determined in step S4809 are subtracted from the current performance points. In step S4811, the subtraction result is stored in the performance point storage area 183e as new performance points, updating the performance points.

After step S4811 is executed, in step S8203, the rendered points determined in step S4809 are added to the current total points. For example, if the total points at that time are 10 points and 5 points are determined as the rendered points for this time, the sum of these points is calculated to be 15 points. Note that if the total points at that time are 0 points, the rendered points for this time determined in step S4809 will be the sum.

In step S8204, the sum calculated in step S8203 is stored as new total points in the total point storage area 183f of RAM 183. In other words, in this embodiment, the total points are calculated based on the cumulative sum of the already-executed points. After step S8204 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S4804 (if the number of points available for execution is less than the predetermined value), the award suggestion effect processing is terminated.

<Total suggestion production processing>
The total suggestion effect processing of step S8102 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 98.

First, in step S8301, it is determined whether a suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The suggestion effect flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine whether a bonus suggestion effect should be executed. If the suggestion effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8302, where a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a total suggestion effect will be executed. In this step, an execution lottery table for the total suggestion effect is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and the above lottery is conducted based on the lottery table and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183.

In step S8303, it is determined whether or not the execution of the total suggestion effect was won in the effect execution lottery process of step S8302. If it was won, proceed to step S8304, where it is determined whether the total value of the points awarded by the main control device 101 (total points) is equal to or greater than the bonus award value (20 points). If the total points are not equal to or greater than the specific award value, in step S8305, the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of RAM 183 are determined. In step S8306, a type lottery table corresponding to the determined total points is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182. The type lottery table obtained in this case may be the same as the type lottery table (Figure 82) obtained in step S4908 of the total suggestion effect process (Figure 80) related to the fifth embodiment. In other words, the table corresponding to the current total points is obtained from multiple tables set according to the number of total points.

In this embodiment, the cumulative total of already-executed points is used as the total points. In other words, the type of total suggestion effect is selected based on the total of already-executed points, so the results of the award suggestion effect executed before the total suggestion effect can be reflected in the type of total suggestion effect. Note that the total points are initialized when the total points are initialized, so the cumulative total is the cumulative total of already-executed points corresponding to the award suggestion effect executed after initialization.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S8304, in step S8307, a type lottery table for when the total points are equal to or greater than the specific award value is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. In this type lottery table, as shown in Figure 99, the probability of selection of each presentation mode (light color of the upper lamp 63) in the total suggestion presentation is set in correspondence with the number of times the award suggestion presentation is executed.

For example, if the number of times the award suggestion effect has been executed is 0, the probability of blue being blue is set to 0%, the probability of yellow being 0%, the probability of green being 20%, and the probability of red being 80%. Furthermore, if the number of times the award suggestion effect has been executed is 1 or more, the probability of blue being blue is set to 10%, the probability of yellow being 30%, the probability of green being 30%, and the probability of red being 30%. In other words, when the award suggestion effect is not executed, a higher-level effect mode is more likely to be selected than when the award suggestion effect is executed. When the award suggestion effect is not executed, the player is likely to get the impression that no points have been accumulated, and is likely to have low expectations of reaching the bonus award value. However, by executing a higher-level total suggestion effect, which indicates a large amount of accumulated points, it is possible to appropriately evoke the player's surprise and delight.

The above type lottery table is merely an example and is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the probability of red being displayed may be 100% if the number of times the award suggestion effect has been executed is 0, or the selection probability may be varied based on a number other than 0, such that if the number of times the award suggestion effect has been executed is less than 2, a higher-ranking effect mode is more likely to be selected than if the number of times it has been executed is 2 or more. Furthermore, if a higher-ranking effect mode is more likely to be selected, the total suggestion effect may be drawn with a uniform selection probability regardless of the number of times the award suggestion effect has been executed.

After step S8306 or step S8307 is executed, in step S8308, a lottery is performed to determine the type of total suggestion effect based on the acquired type lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter area 183b of RAM 183. In step S8309, the effect data is set so that the total suggestion effect of the type selected by the lottery in step S8308 is executed.

In step S8310, a total suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The total suggestion flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine that a total suggestion effect should be executed. When the total suggestion flag is set in this manner, in other processing of step S2211 in the effect setting process (Figure 47), the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled so that the total suggestion effect of the selected type is executed based on the effect data set above. At that time, the total suggestion flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared.

After step S8310 is executed, if a positive judgment is made in step S8301 (if the suggestion effect flag is set) or a negative judgment is made in step S8303 (if the effect execution lottery is not won), the total suggestion effect processing is terminated.

<About the flow of the total suggestion production>
The flow of the total suggestion effect will be explained below. The flow of the total suggestion effect differs depending on whether the total value of points (total points) awarded by the main control device 101 is less than the bonus award value or whether it is equal to or greater than the bonus award value. Therefore, the flow of the former case will be explained here with reference to FIG. 100.

At award trigger a1 at the start of the advantageous zone, no points are awarded on the main control device 101 side, and 20 sub-points are awarded on the display control device 81 side. In this case, the display control device 81's possible points are the sum of these, or 20 points. Then, if a small bubble effect with 5 already-executed points is selected as the award suggestion effect at award trigger a1 (event a2), the total points will be 5 points.

For this reason, if the player wins the lottery to execute the total suggestion effect before the next award trigger b1, a lottery for the type of total suggestion effect will be held with a total point count of 5. Specifically, the table for total suggestion effect types with less than 24 points (Figure 82) is obtained, and either blue light or yellow light is selected as the type of total suggestion effect.

If the bubble effect with 10 already-produced points is selected at the next award trigger b1 (event b2), the total points at that time (5 points) and the already-produced points of the bubble effect (10 points) are added together, for a total of 15 points. Furthermore, if the bubble effect with 10 already-produced points is selected at the next award trigger c1 (event c2), the total points at that time (15 points) and the already-produced points of the bubble effect (10 points) are added together, for a total of 25 points.

In this case, if the player wins the lottery to execute the total suggestion effect before the next award opportunity, a lottery for the type of total suggestion effect will be held with the total points set to 25. Specifically, a table for 25 to 39 points (Figure 82) is obtained as the lottery table for the type of total suggestion effect, and either blue or yellow light is selected as the type of total suggestion effect. In this case, yellow light is more likely to be selected than when the total points are less than 24 points, making it more likely that an increase in total points will be suggested.

In this way, in this embodiment, total points are derived based on the already-executed points corresponding to the selected award suggestion effect, and a lottery is held to determine the type of total suggestion effect based on this. In the lottery for the type of total suggestion effect, the total points and the presentation style of the total suggestion effect are not matched one-to-one, but rather are matched one-to-many, and the presentation style is selected from multiple options, so they do not match perfectly. However, by using the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to perform a total suggestion effect that corresponds to the award suggestion effect actually shown to the player. Therefore, the impression that the player receives from each award suggestion effect (in other words, the total points that the player predicts from each award suggestion effect) can be brought closer to the presentation style of the total suggestion effect, making it easier to align the two.

Next, we will explain the flow of the total suggestion effect when the total value of points awarded by the main control device 101 (total points) becomes equal to or exceeds the bonus award value. Here, we will assume that no points are awarded by the main control device 101 at award trigger a1, and the bonus suggestion effect is not executed.

When 20 points are awarded by the main control device 101 at award trigger b1, and the total points reach or exceed the bonus award value, if the lottery to execute the total suggestion effect is won before the next award trigger c1, the type lottery table for when it is reached (Figure 99) is obtained as the type lottery table for the total suggestion effect. This type lottery table selects the presentation mode of the total suggestion effect regardless of the total points at that time, and is more likely to select a higher-ranking presentation mode than the type lottery table when the total points are less than the bonus award value. In other words, when the total points reach or exceed the bonus award value, a type selection is made according to the total points, regardless of the suggestion effects that have been shown up to that point.

In a configuration where the execution of a total suggestion effect is controlled based on the total points derived by accumulating the points that have already been produced (the configuration described with reference to Figure 100), it becomes easier to link each award suggestion effect with the presentation mode of the total suggestion effect. However, on the other hand, in situations where the total points are low because the award suggestion effect has not been performed or has been performed only a few times, there is the inconvenience that even if the total points reach the bonus award value, it is not possible to perform a total suggestion effect that corresponds to the increased accumulated amount of total points. In this case, even though the bonus award value has been reached, the player is not notified, which means that their expectations are not properly aroused, and there is a concern that the player may stop playing.

In this regard, by adding this configuration, it becomes possible to perform a total suggestion effect that corresponds to an increase in the total accumulated points, even in situations where the total accumulated points are low because the award suggestion effect has not been performed or has been performed only a few times. In other words, while it is easy to link each award suggestion effect with the presentation mode of the total suggestion effect, if the total points reach a certain level or more, it is possible to appropriately arouse the player's anticipation of the increase in total points, encouraging them to continue playing.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

There are multiple types of award suggestion effects that correspond to the award of points, so the amount of points to be awarded can be suggested depending on which type of award suggestion effect is used. In addition to the award suggestion effects, total suggestion effects are used as notifications corresponding to the total points, and the type of total suggestion effect can suggest the total points. By having both of these notifications executed, the player can recognize that the total points are increasing towards the bonus award value, which stimulates the desire to further increase the points. In other words, this can encourage players to continue playing.

In such a configuration, for example, in a configuration in which a grant suggestion effect is performed after an execution lottery, there are cases in which the grant suggestion effect is not performed even if points have actually been awarded on the main control device 101 side. As a result, a situation may arise in which the total points predicted by the player from the grant suggestion effect and the total points predicted from the total suggestion effect differ significantly, such as when the total points accumulated according to the grant suggestion effect are not very high, and the total points predicted from the total suggestion effect are suggested. In this case, the player may not know which suggestion effect to trust, and may become confused. In this regard, with this configuration, the type of total suggestion effect is determined based on the type of previously executed grant suggestion effect, i.e., the performance of the grant suggestion effect, so the total points suggested by the total suggestion effect can be made consistent with or close to the predicted total value from the grant suggestion effect, making it possible to effectively suppress player confusion.

A lottery is held to determine whether a bonus suggestion effect is to be executed based on the number of points available for execution at that time. The higher the number of points available for execution, the more likely the bonus suggestion effect is to be executed. Cases in which the number of points available for execution is large may occur when the actual total points are high but the frequency of bonus suggestion effects is low, or when bonus suggestion effect types corresponding to low points are selected as the types of bonus suggestion effects, resulting in a large surplus of bonus suggestion points. In such cases, it is preferable to actively encourage players to continue playing in order to prevent them from quitting the game and losing money. In this regard, with this configuration, the higher the number of points available for execution, the more likely the bonus suggestion effect is to be executed. As a result, the frequency of bonus suggestion effects increases, making it easier for players to be notified that their total points are increasing, and as the number of bonus suggestion effects increases, it becomes easier to notify players of a larger value as a total suggestion effect. In other words, in situations where the actual total points are expected to be higher than the predicted total value from the bonus suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the frequency of bonus suggestion effects and increase the total points suggested by the total suggestion effect.

When the total points reach a predetermined value (award value) or more, the type of total suggestion effect is determined regardless of the results of the award suggestion effect. For example, if a large number of points are awarded in a single award trigger, the total points will increase suddenly. In this case, there is a concern that the results of the award suggestion effect will be insufficient to match the increased total points, and only a small value will be announced in the total suggestion effect. In this regard, with this configuration, depending on the situation, the type of total suggestion effect can be determined regardless of the results of the award suggestion effect, making it possible to announce a large value in the total suggestion effect even if the results of the award suggestion effect are poor. This makes it possible to appropriately deal with cases such as a sudden increase in total points.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the above-described embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each of the configurations to be combined is ensured.

(1) In the above embodiments, the bonus when the total points reach the bonus value is a transition to the second AT mode. However, this is not particularly limited as long as it is advantageous to the player (in other words, it can be an opportunity for the player to accumulate total points). For example, if the awarded points have not reached the bonus value, a lottery to transition to the second AT mode is not held at the end of the first AT mode. However, if the total points have reached the bonus value, a lottery to transition to the second AT mode may be held at the end of the first AT mode as a bonus. In this case, the winning probability in the lottery may be the same as the winning probability in the lottery during the first AT mode (the lottery to transition to the second AT mode held when a specific role is won in the first AT mode), or the lottery may be more favorable than the lottery during the first AT mode, increasing the likelihood of transition to the second AT mode.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that a second AT mode transition lottery can be held at the end of the first AT mode even when the total points have not yet reached the bonus value. In this case, the probability of winning the second AT mode transition lottery when the total points have reached the bonus value may be higher than the probability of winning the second AT mode transition lottery when the total points have not yet reached the bonus value.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a return to the first AT mode is favored as a bonus when the total points reach the bonus value. Specifically, when or after the first AT mode ends with the total points reaching the bonus value, the game transitions to a mode (return zone) where the likelihood of transitioning to the first AT mode is high, and this mode continues for a predetermined number of games or until a predetermined termination condition (such as winning the drop lottery) is met. Possible modes with a high likelihood of transitioning to the first AT mode include a configuration in which a return to the first AT mode is confirmed, a lottery for transitioning to the first AT mode is held every game regardless of whether a small win is achieved or a winning role, a winning role that does not trigger a transition to the first AT mode in normal mode becomes a transition trigger role in the return-specialized zone, or the probability of winning to the first AT mode for each winning role is set higher than in normal mode (Figure 29).

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that even if the first AT mode ends when the total points have not reached the bonus value, a transition to the first AT mode's withdrawal zone is possible, and if the first AT mode ends when the total points have reached the bonus value, the probability of transition to the first AT mode (return probability) in the withdrawal zone may be more favorable than if the bonus value has not been reached.

Also, instead of or in addition to the reversal of the first AT mode, when or after the second AT mode ends, a transition to a mode (reversal zone) where the likelihood of transitioning to the second AT mode is high may be configured. In this case, transitioning to the reversal zone of the second AT mode may be a bonus, or a configuration may be adopted in which transition to the reversal zone of the second AT mode is possible even when the second AT mode ends without the total points reaching the bonus value, and if the second AT mode ends with the total points reaching the bonus value, the probability of transitioning to the second AT mode (reversal probability) in the reversal zone may be more favorable than if the total points have not reached the bonus value.

In addition, when the total points reach the bonus value, the bonus may be an additional number of games in the first AT mode or the second AT mode, or an additional number of sets.

(2) In the above embodiments, no point awarding trigger is provided during the first AT mode. However, a point awarding trigger may be provided during the first AT mode, allowing the total points to increase after the first AT mode starts. In this case, even if the first AT mode starts when the total points have not reached the bonus award value, the total points can be increased to the bonus award value during play in the first AT mode. Therefore, the first AT mode can be played with the goal of reaching the bonus award value as one of the goals, thereby expanding the range of ways to enjoy the first AT mode. Note that, as a possible configuration for providing a point awarding trigger during the first AT mode, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to an advantageous special mode (e.g., a specialized zone that favors an additional number of AT games) is possible when a specific combination is won, and points are awarded by the main control unit 101 when a specific combination is won but the special mode transition lottery is not won.

(3) In the above embodiments, advantageous zones are used as examples of specific states, but game states other than advantageous zones may also be considered specific states as long as the total points are initialized when a predetermined condition is met. In this case, the total points may be initialized when a game state other than the advantageous zone ends, or the total points may be initialized when an initialization condition other than the end of that state is met.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the total points are initialized when the advantageous period ends. However, the total points may also be initialized midway through the advantageous period when an initialization condition other than the end of the advantageous period is met.

(5) In the above embodiments, the initial value when the total points are initialized is set to 0 points, but the value may be 1 or more, which is less than the total points before initialization. Note that the initialization process can also be seen as a process of reducing the total points, so the initialization process may also be referred to as a reduction process.

It is also possible to configure the system to provide a reduction trigger for reducing the total points separately from initialization. For example, in the case of initialization, the total points are set to 0 points, but in the reduction process, a predetermined value is subtracted from the total points at that time, thereby reducing the total points. In this case, the system may be configured to retain the retained points both when the initialization process is executed and when the reduction process is executed, or to retain the retained points when the reduction process is executed but not when the initialization process is executed, or vice versa.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the total points are initialized when the advantageous zone ends, but the total points may also be initialized after the advantageous zone ends. Specifically, the advantageous zone flag may be cleared in the second zone display process (Figure 45) before the total points are initialized. Alternatively, the initialization may be performed in the next game after the advantageous zone ends.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the total points may not be initialized even when the advantageous period ends. In other words, the total points may not be initialized except when the total points reach the bonus value, when there is a power outage (when no power is supplied to the slot machine 10 or when the power switch 71 of the slot machine 10 is turned off), or when data in RAM 106 is erased by manual operation (RAM clear operation).

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the first AT mode is configured as a pseudo bonus, but the first AT mode does not have to be a pseudo bonus.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the system is configured to transition to the second AT mode via the first AT mode. However, instead of or in addition to this, the system may be configured to transition to the second AT mode without passing through the first AT mode.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, multiple point awarding triggers are provided in the main control device 101, but the number of such triggers does not need to be multiple, and the configuration may be such that only one point awarding trigger can occur in the advantageous zone.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, a point awarding trigger is triggered when an undesirable situation occurs for the player, but the conditions for triggering the awarding trigger are not limited to this. For example, the awarding trigger may be triggered when a specific symbol combination, such as a chance symbol, stops on reels 32L to 32R, or when a predetermined combination is won, a lottery is held to determine whether or not points will be awarded, and the awarding trigger may be triggered if the lottery is won.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the point awarding trigger at the start of the advantageous period (earlier point awarding trigger) may be configured to award points more easily than later or subsequent awarding triggers. For example, the point awarding trigger at the start of the advantageous period may have a 70% probability of awarding points, and the point awarding trigger at the 200-game losing streak may have a 40% probability of awarding points. By adopting such a configuration, in the above first to fourth embodiments, it is possible to shorten the period until the current total points catch up with the retained points, and to prevent the period of the restricted state in which the execution of point effects is restricted from becoming longer. Furthermore, in the above fifth to eighth embodiments, the advantageous period can be started with a larger number of possible points, making it easier to execute the award suggestion effect early in the advantageous period, and this can function as an opportunity to encourage players who continued playing on a wait-and-see basis after the advantageous period ended to continue playing.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the start of the advantageous zone is not the trigger for awarding points. In that case, it would be better to configure the system so that points are more likely to be awarded at the earliest (preferably the first) point award trigger after the start of the advantageous zone than at later or subsequent award triggers.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the point awarding trigger at the start of an advantageous period may be configured to more easily award larger points than later or subsequent awarding triggers. For example, in the first to fourth embodiments above, the point awarding trigger at the start of an advantageous period may be configured so that the probability of awarding 3 or more points is higher than the probability of awarding 2 or fewer points, while the opposite is true for the point awarding trigger when a 200-game losing streak occurs. This configuration can achieve the same effect as the configuration in (12) above. Note that in a configuration where the start of an advantageous period is not the point awarding trigger, the first (preferably the first) point awarding trigger after the start of an advantageous period may be configured so that larger points are more easily awarded than later or subsequent awarding triggers.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, there are cases where no points are awarded even when the point awarding trigger is met (where 0 points are selected in the point awarding lottery), but it is also possible to configure the system so that 1 or more points are always awarded when the point awarding trigger is met.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the probability of awarding points and the probability of selecting each number of points are configured to vary depending on the award trigger, but at least one of these may be configured to vary depending on the total points. For example, if the total points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value, points may be more likely to be awarded than if the total points are less than the predetermined value.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the point suggestion effect and the award suggestion effect are configured to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65, but these effects may be light-emitting effects using light-emitting means such as LEDs, or may be device effects using decorative movable bodies (movable device) for moving effects. Furthermore, they do not necessarily have to be visual, and may be auditory, for example, using sound effects. This also applies to the continuous effects in the sixth embodiment. Furthermore, the total suggestion effect may be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65, or may be an auditory effect using sound effects.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the point suggestion effect and the award suggestion effect are configured to be executed only in the game in which the award points are awarded, but they may also be configured to be executed in other games. For example, they may be executed in a game after the game in which the award points are awarded, or they may be executed over multiple games including the game in which the award points are awarded.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the accumulated amount of points may be indicated numerically or otherwise by the point suggestion effect or the total suggestion effect. The amount of points awarded may also be indicated numerically or otherwise by the award suggestion effect.

(18) In the above embodiments, the CZ mode, AT mode, and an additional number of games in the AT mode were given as examples of specific events that are advantageous to the player, but the specific events are not limited to these and may also be, for example, ART mode, bonus games, etc.

(19) In the first embodiment, the point suggestion effect is configured to suggest that points have been awarded and the current total points, but it may also be configured to execute an award point suggestion effect that suggests that points have been awarded and the size of the awarded points (amount). In this case, it is preferable to restrict the execution of the award point suggestion effect when the total points (accumulated points) are equal to or less than the retained points, and to allow the execution of the award point suggestion effect when the total points are greater than the retained points.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a total points suggestion effect is performed that suggests the current total points but does not function as a suggestion that points have been awarded. In this case, the execution of the total points suggestion effect may be restricted when the total points (accumulated points) are equal to or less than the retained points, and the execution of the total points suggestion effect may be permitted when the total points are greater than the retained points. In this case, the trigger for the execution of the total points suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be a point award trigger, and the total points suggestion effect may be executed when a trigger other than a point award trigger is met.

(20) In the first embodiment described above, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted when the total points (accumulated points) are equal to or less than the held points. However, the execution of the point suggestion effect may also be restricted when the total points are smaller than the held points. In other words, the execution of the point suggestion effect may be permitted when the total points and held points are the same value. This also applies to the fourth embodiment described above, where the execution of the point suggestion effect may be permitted when the accumulated points are equal to or greater than the corresponding points.

(21) In the first embodiment described above, the point suggestion effect is permitted to be executed when the total points (accumulated points) are greater than the retained points. However, the point suggestion effect may also be permitted to be executed when the total points are greater than the value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value (e.g., 1 point) from the retained points. Furthermore, when the retained points are small, the gap between the initial value of the total points is not large, and the period until the total points catch up with the retained points is expected to be short. On the other hand, as the retained points increase, the gap between the initial value of the total points increases, and the period during which the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted is likely to be prolonged. Based on this, the point suggestion effect may be permitted to be executed when the total points are greater than the retained points when the retained points are less than a specific value (e.g., 3 points). Alternatively, the point suggestion effect may be permitted to be executed when the total points are greater than the retained points when the retained points are equal to or greater than the specific value when the total points are greater than the value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the retained points (e.g., 1 point).

(22) In the first embodiment described above, when the point suggestion effect is in a restricted state (when the total points (accumulated points) are less than the held points), the effect is not executed, but the configuration may be such that the effect is less likely to be executed than when the limit is not in effect (the probability of the point suggestion effect being executed is lower when the limit is in effect than when the limit is not in effect). In a configuration in which the point suggestion effect is not executed when the limit is in effect, there is a risk that the player's interest in points will wane if the limit period is extended, but this configuration makes it possible to prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

(23) In the first embodiment described above, when the point suggestion effect is in a restricted state, no execution lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the effect. However, an execution lottery may be held when the effect is in a restricted state, and then the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted regardless of the result. This is also true for the fourth embodiment described above, where an execution lottery for the point suggestion effect is held when the total points (accumulated points) are less than the corresponding points, and then the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted regardless of the result.

(24) In the first embodiment described above, the restricted state is released when the total points (accumulated points) become greater than the retained points, but the conditions for releasing the restricted state are not limited to this. For example, the restricted state may be released when the number of games played since the previous execution of the point suggestion effect reaches a predetermined number of games.

(25) In the second embodiment described above, the retained points may not be used (derive them). That is, the difference between the actual total points and the points used in the previous point suggestion effect may be used to execute the subsequent point suggestion effect. For example, if the actual total points are 3 points and a previous point suggestion effect of 2 points is executed, the points suggested to the player by the previous point suggestion effect will be less than the actual total points (in other words, the difference value will be 1 or more), and a subsequent point suggestion effect (a performance corresponding to a total of 3 points) will be executed even in a situation where the total points do not change. In this case, the following effects are expected.

In games using points, in order to strongly stimulate the desire to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the number of opportunities to award points and the frequency of point suggestion effects, thereby heightening the player's interest in points. However, on the other hand, increasing the number of opportunities to award points lowers the difficulty of reaching the bonus value, which in turn reduces the level of the bonus and may reduce the player's appeal. In other words, there is a concern that increasing the frequency of point suggestion effects may actually diminish the appeal of games using points. In this regard, with configuration (25), point suggestion effects can be displayed based on the difference between the total points and the previous point suggestion effect, even if points have not actually been awarded. Therefore, it is possible to expand the opportunities to execute point suggestion effects without increasing the number of opportunities to award points (in other words, without lowering the difficulty of reaching the bonus value). This makes it possible to increase the frequency of notifications while maintaining the level of the bonus, thereby effectively stimulating the desire to continue playing.

Also, in a configuration that does not derive retained points, the point suggestion effect can be configured to suggest the amount of points to be awarded (the amount of points awarded in one instance) based on the points awarded each time, and then the difference between the points awarded in one instance and the points used in the previous point suggestion effect can be derived, and the subsequent point suggestion effect can be executed based on that difference. For example, if two points have been awarded and a previous point suggestion effect is executed for one point, the subsequent point suggestion effect can be executed for one point, which is the difference between the points actually awarded and the points used in the previous point suggestion effect. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the subsequent point suggestion effect even if no points have been awarded, making it possible to favorably increase the frequency of point suggestion effects.

(26) In the second embodiment described above, when the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 1), a lottery to execute a point suggestion effect is conducted with the same winning probability as when execution control of a point effect is conducted without using the difference (the flow when a positive judgment is made in step S2604 of FIG. 61). However, the winning probability of the effect execution lottery may be different between execution control of a point effect based on the difference value and execution control of a point effect not based on the difference value. Specifically, the winning probability may be set so that the point suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the former case than in the latter case. By using such a configuration, the difference value derived by the previous point suggestion effect is actively utilized, making it possible to effectively create the feeling that the total points have increased.

(27) In the second embodiment described above, the probability of a point suggestion effect for use points smaller than the held points being executed may be varied depending on the size of the held points. Specifically, when the held points are a first value (e.g., 4 points), a point suggestion effect for use points smaller than the held points may be more likely to be executed than when the held points are a second value smaller than the first value (e.g., 2 points).

By making the previous point suggestion effect correspond to a value smaller than the held points, there is a concern that the previous point suggestion effect may suggest a total point that is too small, in order to ensure a margin for the later point suggestion effect, and may not effectively stimulate the desire to continue playing. In this regard, with this configuration, the larger the original held points, the more likely it is that a type corresponding to a value smaller than the held points will be selected, making it easier to ensure a difference for the later point suggestion effect, which effectively prevents the previous point suggestion effect from being poor. Therefore, both the previous point suggestion effect and the later point suggestion effect can suggest an appropriate total point, effectively stimulating the desire to continue playing.

In addition, in a configuration such as (25) above where retained points are not derived, but the difference between the actual total points or awarded points and the points used in the previous point suggestion effect is used to execute the subsequent point suggestion effect, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the point suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the actual total points, etc. are larger than when the actual total points, etc. are smaller.

(28) In the second embodiment, the point suggestion effect may be executed multiple times based on the difference value derived from the previous point suggestion effect. That is, after the first point suggestion effect is executed using a portion of the difference value, the second point suggestion effect may be executed using the remainder of the difference value.

(29) In the third embodiment described above, the retained points are not updated if the total points (accumulated points) after the points are awarded at the time of the end of the first AT mode are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 3 points). However, the retained points may also be not updated at the time of the end of the first AT mode, regardless of the total points.

(30) In the third embodiment described above, the retained points may not be updated regardless of the trigger for point awarding in the main control unit 101. For example, the retained points may be configured to switch between updating and not updating depending on the number of games played in the advantageous zone or the number of games remaining. By transitioning to a state in which the update of retained points is restricted when there is a high possibility that the bonus award value will not be reached, such as when there are only a few games left until the end of the advantageous zone (when the total points are initialized), it is possible to prevent the gap between the initial value of the total points when initialized and the retained points from widening excessively.

(31) In the third embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which updating of the retained points is restricted when the difference between the current retained points and the initial value of the total points after initialization is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. With this configuration, the gap between the retained points and the initial value of the total points can be kept below a predetermined value, making it possible to prevent the restriction period for the point suggestion effect from becoming too long.

(32) In the third embodiment described above, a lottery is held to determine whether a point suggestion effect will be executed (the point suggestion effect can be executed) if the held points are not updated. However, a lottery to determine whether a point suggestion effect will be executed may also be held if the held points are not updated, or may be forcibly not executed (the point suggestion effect is not executed).

Also, if the held points are not updated, the lottery for the type of point suggestion effect may not be performed, and the same type of point suggestion effect as the previous point suggestion effect may be performed. In other words, the type of point suggestion effect to be used if the held points are not updated may be determined based on the type of the previous point suggestion effect.

(33) In the fifth embodiment, the performance possible points are derived by adding the award points and sub-points, but this is not limited to this, as long as a value greater than the award points can be derived as the performance possible points. For example, a coefficient greater than 1 may be derived as a predetermined numerical value separate from the award points, and the performance possible points may be derived by multiplying the award points by this coefficient. Note that when performance possible points are derived by adding the award points and sub-points, even if no award points have been awarded, it is possible to secure a numerical value of at least the sub-points as the performance possible points, making it possible to execute a performance suggestion. In this sense, the configuration of the fifth embodiment is preferable.

(34) In the fifth embodiment described above, the configuration may be such that the execution of the award suggestion effect is controlled in units of each award point (a configuration in which the award suggestion effect is executed based on one award point each time an award is given), and that sub-points are added to the award points each time to derive the possible points to be played, and the award suggestion effect is executed based on the derived possible points to be played. In this case, the award suggestion effect can be executed even when no award points have been awarded, and the award suggestion effect can be executed by suggesting points greater than the actual amount to be awarded, making it possible to effectively arouse the player's anticipation of reaching the bonus award value.

(35) In the fifth embodiment described above, sub-points are awarded at the start of the advantageous zone, but sub-points may also be awarded when the performance-available points are equal to or less than a predetermined value. According to this configuration, when performance points are awarded at the award trigger at the start of the advantageous zone, the performance-available points are used to execute a performance suggestion effect, and if the performance-available points subsequently decrease due to the execution of the performance suggestion effect and become insufficient, the shortfall can be made up with sub-points.

Also, sub-points may be awarded midway through the advantageous zone. Specifically, sub-points may be awarded when a predetermined trigger is met after the start of the advantageous zone. For example, in a configuration in which point award triggers are somewhat suppressed to ensure a certain level of difficulty in reaching the bonus award value, points may not be awarded easily in the middle or end of the advantageous zone, making it difficult to display the award suggestion effect, which could make it difficult to maintain the player's interest in points. In this regard, with this configuration, the frequency of the award suggestion effect in the middle or end of the advantageous zone can be increased, making it possible to appropriately maintain the player's interest in points. Possible predetermined triggers include the point availability point falling below a predetermined value, the start of the advantageous zone, or the number of games since the previous award suggestion effect reached a predetermined number.

When sub-points are awarded in the middle of an advantageous zone, the total points can be calculated by adding the sub-points to the cumulative value of the points awarded up to that point, i.e., the total points.

(36) In the fifth embodiment described above, it is also possible to configure the system so that the point awarding trigger is not established at the start of the advantageous zone, and sub-points are awarded in accordance with the first awarding trigger in the advantageous zone. In this case, as in the case where sub-points are awarded in response to the point awarding trigger at the start of the advantageous zone, it is possible to increase the frequency of the award suggestion effect from the beginning of the advantageous zone.

(37) In the fifth embodiment described above, a configuration was adopted in which larger sub-points are more likely to be derived when the larger number of points awarded at the start of the advantageous period (e.g., 20 points) is greater than when the smaller number of points awarded (e.g., 10 points). However, a configuration may also be adopted in which larger sub-points are more likely to be derived when the smaller number of points awarded is greater than when the larger number of points awarded is greater. With this configuration, when the number of points awarded is sufficient, the sub-points are reduced to minimize the difference from the actual total points. However, when the number of points awarded is small and the award suggestion effect cannot be executed or cannot be executed sufficiently frequently, the sub-points can be increased to make up for the shortfall. This can be a suitable configuration for increasing the frequency of execution of the award suggestion effect when the number of points awarded is small.

(38) In the fifth embodiment described above, sub-points are awarded only once during the advantageous zone, but they may also be awarded multiple times. In this case, sub-points may be awarded in accordance with the trigger for awarding the award points, or may be awarded when a predetermined condition is met in a game that is not the award trigger. Possible predetermined conditions include when no award points are awarded at the award trigger, when the value of the award points is equal to or less than a predetermined value, when the timing of the start of the advantageous zone or the number of games since the previous award suggestion effect reaches a predetermined number of games, when a predetermined combination is won, when a point award lottery that triggers a win of a predetermined combination is won, when a specific symbol combination such as a chance symbol appears on reels 32L to 32R, etc.

(39) In the fifth embodiment described above, a lottery is held to determine whether or not sub-points will be awarded when the opportunity to award sub-points arises, and sub-points are awarded if the award lottery is won. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that sub-points are always awarded when the opportunity to award sub-points arises.

(40) In the fifth embodiment described above, the display control device 81 is configured to derive sub-points, but the main control device 101 may be configured to derive predetermined numerical information as sub-points separately from the awarded points. In this case, the process of adding the predetermined numerical information to the awarded points may be performed by the display control device 81 or the main control device 101.

(41) In the fifth embodiment described above, sub-points may not be derived, and the awarded points may be used as the possible performance points. In other words, the possible performance points may be updated by subtracting the performed points of the suggested performance that has already been performed from the possible performance points derived from the awarded points, and the subsequent suggested performance may be performed based on the updated result. In this case, sub-points may not be awarded for the total points, and the total points (the sum of the awarded points) may be used as the total points.

(42) In the fifth embodiment described above, the probability of executing the award suggestion effect differs depending on the type of point award trigger. However, the probability of executing the award suggestion effect may also differ depending on the points available for execution. Specifically, when the points available for execution are a first value (e.g., 20 points), the award suggestion effect may be more likely to be executed than when the points available for execution are a second value smaller than the first value (e.g., 10 points). In this case, the number of points available for execution that remain unused for executing the award suggestion effect can be reduced, making it possible to use the points available for execution more efficiently.

(43) In the fifth embodiment described above, the total points may be derived without awarding sub-points. That is, the award suggestion effect may be executed based on the possible points to which sub-points have been added, while the total suggestion effect may be executed based on the actual total points. When sub-points are used, the award suggestion effect and the total suggestion effect are selected by taking into account a numerical value other than the actual awarded points, so the points suggested by these effects are likely to deviate from the actual total points. While the award suggestion effect only allows the player to indirectly predict the total points based on the amount of points awarded each time, the total suggestion effect directly suggests the total points, making it more likely to serve as an indicator for the player when deciding whether or not to continue playing, and it is expected that any discrepancy with the actual total points will have a significant impact on the game. In this regard, with this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of award suggestion effects using the possible points to which sub-points have been added, while still providing total suggestion effects that are in line with the actual total points.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment described above, the award suggestion effect may be executed based on the possible points to which sub-points have not been awarded, while the total suggestion effect may be executed based on the total points, which are the actual total points to which sub-points have been awarded.

(44) In the fifth embodiment described above, the award suggestion effect and the total suggestion effect are implemented using different notification means (the auxiliary display unit 65 for the former and the upper lamp 63 for the latter), but they may also be implemented using the same notification means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65).

(45) In the fifth embodiment described above, when a previous award suggestion effect is executed, the already-executed points for that effect are subtracted from the available points. However, the subtraction may also be performed after the previous award suggestion effect is executed.

(46) In the fifth embodiment, a unique performance point is set for each type of award suggestion performance, but a uniform performance point may also be set regardless of the type.

(47) In the fifth embodiment described above, the predetermined value (step S4804 in FIG. 77) used to determine whether or not to execute the award suggestion effect was set to the minimum required value (5 points) to execute the award suggestion effect, but the predetermined value may be set to a value greater than the minimum required value.

(48) In the fifth embodiment, multiple types of total suggestion effects are associated with the number of total points. However, the number of total points and the type of total suggestion effects may also correspond one-to-one. This also applies to the eighth embodiment, in which the total points are derived based on the cumulative sum of the points that have already been rendered.

(49) In the sixth embodiment described above, the award suggestion effect is executed in the final game of the consecutive effects. However, the award suggestion effect may also be executed after the consecutive effects have ended. In this case, to make it easier for the player to understand the relationship with the consecutive effects, it is preferable to execute the award suggestion effect in the next game after the consecutive effects have ended. In this case, the award suggestion effect may be executed when the next game starts or has started, such as when the start lever 41 in the next game is operated or when each of the reels 32L to 32R starts to spin. The award suggestion effect may also be executed at a predetermined timing during the next game, such as when the first stop operation is performed. The award suggestion effect may also be executed when the next game ends or has ended, such as when the final stop operation is performed.

(50) In the sixth embodiment, the award suggestion effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of consecutive wins over multiple games. However, the award suggestion effect may also be executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific effect in a single game. In this case, in order to increase the player's attention to the award suggestion effect, it is preferable to configure the specific effect as an effect that notifies the player of whether or not they have won a specific event (such as CZ mode or AT mode) that is advantageous to the player.

In addition to continuous effects, the display control device 81 may be configured to execute the award suggestion effect based on predetermined processing, such as counting the previous award suggestion effect, the previous award trigger, the start timing of the advantageous zone, and the number of games played since the power was turned on, and then executing the award suggestion effect when the number of games played reaches a predetermined number.

(51) In the sixth embodiment, the award suggestion effect is performed in conjunction with the execution of the pseudo-premonition consecutive effects. However, the award suggestion effect may also be performed in conjunction with the execution of the premonition consecutive effects.

(52) In the sixth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a prize suggestion effect that is not based on a prize trigger is executed according to the difference in the number of medals. For example, if the configuration is such that the prize suggestion effect is executed when the difference in the number of medals falls below a predetermined number, it becomes possible to execute a prize suggestion effect when the player is about to run out of medals, thereby motivating the player to continue playing in situations in which they would otherwise tend to stop playing.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus suggestion effect that is not based on a bonus trigger is executed according to the actual total points or total points. Specifically, the bonus suggestion effect may be executed when the actual total points or total points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value, or the bonus suggestion effect may be executed more easily when the actual total points or total points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value than when they are less than the predetermined value. With this configuration, the frequency of the bonus suggestion effect can be increased when the total points approach the bonus bonus value, making it possible to effectively encourage continued play.

(53) In the seventh embodiment, the transition to the high probability mode or the transition lottery is conducted based on the number of games played. However, instead of or in addition to this, the transition lottery may be conducted based on the number of possible performance points reaching a specific value or more. In this case, the specific value may be a numerical value that allows multiple award suggestion performances to be executed. With this configuration, the high probability mode can be continued over the period in which multiple award suggestion performances are executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the mode.

Also, the system may be configured to transition to the high probability mode, or to hold a lottery to transition thereto, when the total points or total points reach a predetermined value or more. In this case, if the predetermined value is set to a value close to the bonus award value, the likelihood of reaching the bonus award value during the high probability mode increases, making it easier for players to associate the high probability mode with reaching the bonus award value, further increasing the appeal of the mode. The predetermined value may also be set to the bonus award value. In this case, the system will transition to the high probability mode when the bonus award value has actually been reached, so it is possible to increase the frequency of the bonus suggestion effects to build up the player's anticipation before notifying them that the bonus award value has been reached.

(54) In the seventh embodiment described above, the high-probability mode transition lottery is held in the game in which the point-awarding trigger is established, but the high-probability mode transition lottery may also be held in a game other than the game in which the point-awarding trigger is established.

(55) In the seventh embodiment, the high-probability mode transition lottery is executed at the start of the game, but it may also be executed during the game (for example, when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed) or at the end of the game (when the final stop operation is performed).

(56) In the seventh embodiment described above, the configuration has two types of modes: normal mode and high probability mode. However, the configuration may have three or more types of states, such as a normal mode, a first high probability mode in which the probability of the award suggestion effect being executed is higher than in normal mode, and a second high probability mode in which the probability of the award suggestion effect being executed is even higher.

(57) In the eighth embodiment described above, when the total points are equal to or greater than the bonus award value when the total suggestion effect is executed, the total suggestion effect is switched to according to the total points. However, the total suggestion effect may also be switched to according to the total points when the total points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value that is smaller than the bonus award value.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, a first total point based on the cumulative added value of the already-executed points and a second total point similar to the total point in the fifth embodiment may be derived, and a total suggestion effect corresponding to the second total point may be executed when the total points are equal to or greater than the bonus award value or a predetermined value.

(58) In the eighth embodiment, the configuration may be such that whether or not to execute a total suggestion effect is determined depending on the number of times the award suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, the total suggestion effect may be executed when the number of times the award suggestion effect is executed is a predetermined number or more, or the total suggestion effect may be executed more easily when the number of times the award suggestion effect is executed is a predetermined number than when the number is less than that. In this case, the more the award suggestion effect is executed and the larger the total points, the more actively the total suggestion effect will be executed, making it possible to effectively arouse the anticipation of players who hope to reach the bonus award value.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone is set to a single, predetermined fixed value, but multiple upper limit numbers of games may be set, and the advantageous zone may end at the upper limit number of games selected from among them by lottery, a set value, etc. Furthermore, the upper limit number of increase is not limited to a single, predetermined fixed value, but multiple upper limit numbers of games may be set, and the advantageous zone may end at the upper limit number of increase selected from among them by lottery, a set value, etc.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration has two types of zones: a normal zone and an advantageous zone. However, the configuration may have three or more types of zones, such as a normal zone in which transition to the first AT mode or the like is not possible, a first advantageous zone in which transition to the first AT mode or the like is possible, and a second advantageous zone in which transition to the first AT mode or the like is easier than in the first advantageous zone.

(61) The probability of winning the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone and the game results that trigger the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone are not limited to those exemplified in the above embodiments.

In addition, while the configuration is such that the player is transferred to the advantageous zone in the game in which the player wins the advantageous zone transfer lottery, the configuration may also be such that the player is transferred to the advantageous zone in the game following the game in which the player wins the advantageous zone transfer lottery, or such that there may be a predetermined number of games between the game in which the player wins the advantageous zone transfer lottery and the game in which the player transfers to the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, while the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is configured to begin displaying in the game that transitions to the advantageous zone, it is also possible to configure the eighth display segment N8 to begin displaying in the game following the game that transitions to the advantageous zone, or to configure the system so that there can be a predetermined number of games between the game that transitions to the advantageous zone and the game that initiates the display of the eighth display segment N8.

(62) In the above embodiments, a bonus game in which the number of medals decreases was exemplified, but the number of medals may not increase (no increase or decrease), or may increase slightly (the medal increase rate is lower than in AT mode). Note that a bonus game with a slight increase may be one in which the expected net increase in medals per game is less than 0.5. Furthermore, instead of a slight increase, the game may also be one in which medals increase normally (which is advantageous to the player).

(63) In each of the above embodiments, the AT mode transition lottery may also be held in the normal zone. In this case, the advantage of the advantageous zone is guaranteed by making it less likely that the AT mode transition lottery will be won in the normal zone than in the advantageous zone.

(64) In the above embodiments, a game played in a 3-bet game while the second BB won in a 2-bet game is carried over has been described as a normal game. However, a game played in a 2-bet game while the first BB won in a 3-bet game is carried over may also be a normal game, or a second or third bet game played without carrying over the first BB or the second BB may also be a normal game. A game played in a 2-bet game while the second BB is carried over may also be a normal game, or a 3-bet game played while the first BB is carried over may also be a normal game. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a game progresses by switching between these games depending on the game situation. Specifically, a first switching trigger may be used to switch, for example, from any of the above games played in a 2-bet game to any of the above games played in a 3-bet game, and a second switching trigger may be used to switch, for example, from any of the above games played in a 3-bet game to any of the above games played in a 2-bet game.

(65) In each of the above embodiments, the ball payout rate is configured to change depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 having the highest ball payout rate. However, any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the manner in which balls (game media) payout change depending on the setting value. For example, the ball payout rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2, while the ball payout rates of other setting values may be different. Furthermore, settings 1, 3, and 5 may be configured to have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball payout, while settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball payout. Furthermore, settings 1 and 5 may be configured to increase ball payout by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease by a predetermined amount over a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 may take longer to increase by the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5 and take shorter time to decrease by the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may have almost no increase or decrease in ball payout. In these cases, the ball payout rate of each setting value may be the same.

(66) While a slot machine has been described that has three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, be a slot machine that has five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the perspective of preventing erroneous operation when stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. Also, while a slot machine has been described that has one active line when the number of bets is three, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, have five active lines.

(67) While a specific example has been given of a slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the gaming machine may have ball insertion and ball payout functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall can handle only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value.

For example, in pachinko machines or ball-operated reel gaming machines, the configuration may have multiple settings that change the payout rate, etc., and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied to suggest or teach these settings. In this case, in pachinko machines that have high-probability and low-probability states where the probability of winning a jackpot is high and low, the advantageous zone, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, and in pachinko machines that have high-ball entry states and low-ball entry states where the rate of balls entering a predetermined entry section is high and low, the advantageous zone, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-ball entry state, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied. Furthermore, in pachinko machines, the period during which a 3-bet game is played during a waiting period such as in premonition mode or CZ mode (the period during which the number of remaining games in each of these modes is updated) may be applied to one of the periods during which the first special symbol is played (the variable display of the first special symbol) and the second special symbol is played (the variable display of the second special symbol), and the period during the waiting period during which a 2-bet game or a bonus game in the second BB state is played (the period during which the number of remaining games in each of the above modes is not updated) may be applied to the other of the periods during which the first special symbol is played and the second special symbol is played.

(68) In the above embodiments, examples have been given of gaming machines in which a game can be started by inserting medals as gaming media and setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out as a bonus corresponding to winning the game. However, this does not exclude medal-less gaming machines that do not use medals. In such medal-less gaming machines, for example, it is possible to set the number of bets on a game using virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) and start playing, and to award virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) corresponding to the predetermined number of medals as a bonus corresponding to winning the game. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to an external device.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned pachinko machines may not only be pachinko machines that dispense game balls, but also sealed-type pachinko machines in which game balls are not ejected outside the machine. In such sealed-type pachinko machines, it is advisable to configure them to announce information indicating, for example, the number of winning balls.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

The inventions shown in each of the following feature groups have been made in response to the following problem that the invention seeks to solve in relation to the background art: "Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." "Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to increase the entertainment value of the game, and in this regard, there is still room for improvement."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine equipped with a second control means (display control device 81) that controls so that a game performance corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed,
The first control means
A value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can grant a value for a special benefit (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity);
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value (total points) of the bonus numerical values awarded by the numerical value awarding means becomes a bonus corresponding value (bonus award value) corresponding to the award of the bonus;
When a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous zone) is met, an initialization means (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second zone display processing by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical value;
Equipped with
The second control means
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing point processing and point effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification corresponding to the total value of the bonus numerical value;
a storage means (various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 of the display control device 81) for storing specific information (retention points or retention rank information) corresponding to the total value of the bonus numerical values or the mode of the specific notification that has been executed;
Equipped with
the specific notification execution means is configured to refer to the specific information in the storage means and control the execution of the specific notification,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second control means is configured to retain the specific information in the memory means without initializing it when the total value of the bonus numbers is initialized by the initialization means of the first control means.

In this configuration, a bonus value is awarded when a bonus trigger is met, and when the total value reaches the bonus value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. By receiving a notification corresponding to the total value each time, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus value, which stimulates the player's desire to further increase the bonus value. In other words, this encourages the player to continue playing.

However, in the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is met, the total value of the bonus numerical value is initialized, and at least a portion of the bonus numerical value accumulated up to that point is lost. In this case, if the initialization of the total value is reflected directly in the notification, there is a concern that it may give the player the impression that they are being forced to save up their bonus numerical value again, which may reduce their motivation to continue playing. In this regard, in the present configuration, the second control means, which is responsible for controlling the game presentation, is configured to retain the specific information (information corresponding to the total value and already-executed notifications) stored in the storage means even if the total value is initialized by the first control means, and to reference this retained specific information when controlling the execution of specific notifications. In this configuration, when a specific notification is issued after the initialization of the total value, its execution can be controlled while taking into account the total value before initialization, etc., making it possible to prevent the initialization of the total value from being reflected directly in the notification. This prevents the player from getting the impression that they are being forced to save up their bonus numerical value again, and reduces a decrease in their motivation to continue playing.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)" can also be expressed as "reduction means for reducing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)."

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, wherein the specific notification execution means controls the execution of the specific notification based on the total value (accumulated points) after initialization by the initialization means and the specific information (retained points or retained rank information) retained in the storage means.

In this configuration, the execution of specific notifications is controlled by taking into account both the total value before initialization and the total value after initialization. Therefore, after the total value is initialized, it is possible to issue specific notifications that reflect not only the status of the total value before initialization, but also the status of the total value after initialization.

Feature A3. A gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the specific notification execution means is equipped with a restriction means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2604 and S3802 by the display control device 81) that restricts the execution of the specific notification by referencing the specific information stored in the storage means.

In the above configuration, the execution of specific notifications is restricted by referencing the specific information stored in the storage means, so that the execution of specific notifications can be switched based on the previous total value indicated by the stored specific information. This prevents specific notifications from being issued that notify a total value smaller than the total value before initialization, preventing the player from getting the impression that they are being re-saved.

Feature A4. A gaming machine described in any of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that it is equipped with a limiting means (a function that causes the display control device 81 to execute the processing of steps S2604 and S3802) that limits the execution of the specific notification based on the total value (accumulated points) after initialization by the initialization means and the specific information (retained points or retained rank information) retained in the storage means.

In the above configuration, the execution of specific notifications is limited based on the post-initialization total value and the specific information stored in the storage means. For example, if an opportunity to execute a specific notification arises after initialization, the size of the current total value can be determined based on the previous total value indicated by the stored specific information, and if it is smaller, the execution of the specific notification can be canceled. In other words, because the execution of specific notifications that notify a total value smaller than the total value before initialization is suppressed, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effects of initialization, the specific notification can be executed so that it appears to the player that the total value is gradually increasing, effectively stimulating the player's desire to continue playing after the total value has been initialized.

Feature A5. The gaming machine described in Feature A4, wherein the limiting means limits the execution of the specific notification if the total value after initialization by the initialization means is equal to or less than the value of the specific information stored in the storage means.

In the above configuration, the execution of specific notifications is restricted for a period of time during which the post-initialization total is less than or equal to the pre-initialization total indicated by the retained specific information, thereby suppressing the execution of specific notifications that notify a total value smaller than the pre-initialization total. This allows specific notifications to be made so that, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effects of initialization, it appears to the player that the total value is gradually increasing, effectively stimulating the player's desire to continue playing after the total value has been initialized.

Feature A6. A gaming machine as described in Feature A4 or Feature A5, wherein the specific notification execution means is configured to not execute the specific notification when the restricted state imposed by the restriction means is in effect, or to make it more difficult to execute the specific notification than when the restricted state is not in effect.

In the above configuration, by restricting the execution of specific notifications, it is possible to prevent the notifications from being executed or to reduce their frequency, thereby making it possible to optimally achieve the effects of the configuration of feature A4 or feature A5.

Feature A7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A6, characterized in that it comprises update means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605 and S3702 by the display control device 81) that updates the total value after initialization (accumulated points) or the value corresponding to the mode of the specific notification after initialization (corresponding points corresponding to the selected type of rank information) as new specific information if the total value (accumulated points) after initialization by the initialization means or the value corresponding to the mode of the specific notification after initialization is greater than the value of the specific information (retained points or retained rank information) retained in the storage means.

In the above configuration, if the total value, etc. after initialization is greater than the value of the retained specific information, that total value, etc. is retained as new specific information, and the execution of the specific notification can be controlled based on the highest total value, etc., obtained through play up to that point. This suppresses the execution of a specific notification corresponding to a total value smaller than the highest value, making it possible to execute a specific notification when a total value that updates the previous highest value is obtained. This gives the player the impression that the total value is continuing to increase, effectively stimulating their desire to continue playing.

Feature A8. A gaming machine described in any of Features A1 to A7, wherein the specific notification execution means includes mode determination means (a function for executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81) that determines the mode of the specific notification based on the specific information stored in the storage means.

With the above configuration, it is possible to issue a specific notification corresponding to the total value indicated by the specific information stored in the storage means. This prevents the execution of a specific notification that notifies a total value smaller than the total value before initialization, preventing the player from getting the impression that they are re-saving.

Feature A9. The specific notification execution means
a first means (a function of executing the process of step S2804 by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification that allows a player to recognize a numerical value or amount that is smaller than the value corresponding to the specific information stored in the storage means as the specific notification;
a second means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3401 and S3501 by a display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on at least a part of the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the value (accumulated points) corresponding to the specific information, the difference being between the used points and the accumulated points; and
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the second means executes a specific notification by utilizing the difference between the value corresponding to the specific notification executed by the first means and the stored specific information, i.e., the remaining amount of stored information relative to the specific notifications that have already been executed. If the frequency of specific notifications decreases, there are fewer opportunities for players to become aware of the existence of bonus numbers, which raises the concern that interest in bonus numbers will gradually wane. However, with this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications, making it possible to prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

In this feature, "first means capable of executing a notification corresponding to a value smaller than the total value as the specific notification (a function for executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81)" can also be expressed as "first means capable of executing a notification that allows the player to recognize a numerical value smaller than the total value as the specific notification (a function for executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81)."

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification by the second means in a situation where, after the specific notification by the first means, the total value has not increased or the increase in the total value is less than a predetermined value (the difference from the held points).

In the above configuration, when no bonus value is awarded or when the awarded bonus value is small, the second means issues a specific notification, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency with which specific notifications are issued.

Feature A11. The specific notification execution means
a limiting means (a function of executing the processes of step S2604 and step S3802 by a display control device 81) for limiting execution of the specific notification when the total value after initialization by the initializing means is equal to or less than the value of the specific information stored in the storage means or is smaller than the value of the specific information,
A gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed by the second means when the state is restricted by the restriction means.

In the above configuration, when the post-initialization total value is equal to or smaller than the pre-initialization total value indicated by the retained specific information, the execution of specific notifications is restricted, and specific notifications that notify a total value smaller than the pre-initialization total value are suppressed. This makes it possible to make specific notifications appear as if the total value is gradually increasing from the player's perspective, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effects of initialization, thereby effectively stimulating the player's desire to continue playing after the total value has been initialized.

However, on the other hand, if the frequency of specific notifications decreases, players will have fewer opportunities to become aware of the existence of bonus values, raising concerns that players' interest in bonus values may gradually wane. In this case, it may be possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications in the restricted state, but if the specific notification is made in accordance with the actual total value (the total value reduced by initialization), this could give the player the impression that the total value has disappeared, undermining the original purpose of restricting notification execution. Conversely, if the specific notification is made in accordance with the retained specific information (the total value before initialization), it could trigger a notification that deviates from the actual total value, which could reduce players' trust in the notifications.

In this regard, with this configuration, in the restricted state, a specific notification is made by the second means using the remaining retained information relative to the specific notifications that have already been made. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while aligning the specific notification mode with the actual total value. This makes it possible to appropriately address the above-mentioned inconveniences resulting from the creation of a restricted state.

Feature A12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A9 to A11, wherein the second control means includes means for retaining the difference without initializing it (a function for retaining the difference value set by the display control device 81) even when the total value is initialized in the first control means by the initialization means.

In the above configuration, when the total value is initialized on the first control means side, the difference does not disappear but is maintained thereafter, making it possible to use the difference across initialization when restricting the execution of specific notifications. This makes it possible to execute specific notifications by utilizing the difference created by specific notifications before initialization after initialization, making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of specific notifications in a configuration in which the total value is initialized when a predetermined condition is met.

Feature A13. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states,
the initialization means performs the initialization when the specific state ends or is ended,
A gaming machine described in any of features A9 to A12, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification by the second means in the specific state after initialization by the initialization means based on at least a portion of the difference derived in the specific state before initialization.

In the above configuration, the surplus created by the specific notification in the previous specific state can be utilized to execute the specific notification in the subsequent specific state, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of specific notifications in a configuration in which the total value is initialized when the specific state ends.

Feature A14: A limiting means (a function of executing the processing of step S2604 and step S3802 by the display control device 81) that limits the execution of the specific notification when the total value after initialization by the initialization means is equal to or less than the value of the specific information stored in the storage means or is smaller than the specific information;
an update means (a function of executing the process of step S2605 by the display control device 81) for updating the specific information stored in the storage means when a predetermined update condition (the accumulated points are greater than the retention points) is met;
an update limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S3602 by the display control device 81) that limits the updating of the specific information by the update means in a predetermined case (when the first AT mode ends and the accumulated points are 3 or more) even when the predetermined update condition is met;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the execution of a specific notification is restricted when the post-initialization total is equal to or smaller than the pre-initialization total indicated by the retained specific information, and the execution of a specific notification that notifies a total value smaller than the pre-initialization total is suppressed. This makes it possible to make the specific notification appear as if the total is gradually increasing from the player's perspective, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effects of initialization, thereby effectively stimulating the player's desire to continue playing after the total value has been initialized.

However, on the other hand, as the value of the retained specific information (retained value) increases, the gap between the initial value and the total value when it is initialized increases. As a result, it takes longer for the actual total value to catch up with the retained value, and the frequency of specific notifications is likely to drop significantly. In this case, players have fewer opportunities to be aware of the existence of bonus numbers, which raises the concern that they will gradually lose interest in bonus numbers and make it harder for them to contribute to continuing to play. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the update condition is met, updates to the retained value are limited depending on the situation, preventing the gap from widening with the initial value at the time of initialization. This significantly reduces the frequency of specific notifications, making it possible to prevent players from losing interest in bonus numbers.

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A14, wherein the update condition includes that the total value (accumulated points) after initialization by the initialization means or the value corresponding to the specific notification mode after initialization (corresponding points corresponding to the selected type of rank information) is greater than the value of the specific information (retained points or retained rank information) retained in the storage means.

In the above configuration, if the total value, etc. after initialization is greater than the value of the retained specific information, that total value, etc. is retained as new specific information, and the highest value of the total values, etc. obtained through play up to that point can be set as the retained value. This prevents the execution of specific notifications corresponding to total values smaller than the highest value, making it possible to only execute specific notifications when a total value that updates the previous highest value is obtained. This gives the player the impression that the total value is continuing to increase, effectively stimulating their desire to continue playing.

However, on the other hand, if the highest value at each time is always reflected as the retained value, the gap between the initial value and the total value when it is initialized is likely to become large, which is likely to result in the inconvenience described in Feature A14. In this regard, with this configuration, even if a total value that exceeds the previous highest value is obtained, the retained value is not updated depending on the situation, so it is possible to prevent the gap between the initial value and the total value when it is initialized from becoming too large. This significantly reduces the frequency of special notifications, making it possible to prevent players from losing interest in bonus values.

Feature A16: A plurality of award triggers are provided as triggers for awarding the bonus numerical value by the numerical value awarding means,
The gaming machine described in Feature A14 or Feature A15 is characterized in that the update restriction means restricts the update of the specific information by the update means when the bonus number is awarded due to a predetermined award trigger among multiple award triggers (a trigger for executing an award lottery based on the first AT mode ending without winning the second AT mode transition lottery).

In the above configuration, updates to the retained value are limited depending on which of multiple triggers for granting a bonus value occurs. This means that, for example, if the trigger for granting a bonus value occurs immediately before initialization, the bonus value will not be reflected in the retained value, preventing an excessive gap from occurring between the initial value and the retained value upon initialization.

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in Feature A16, wherein the predetermined award trigger is the last trigger before initialization by the initialization means.

After a bonus value is awarded at the final bonus trigger before initialization, no new bonus values are awarded until initialization, preventing the bonus value from reaching the bonus value before initialization. The bonus value at the final bonus trigger is then treated as if it never existed due to the subsequent initialization, and ultimately does not contribute to reaching the bonus value. Taking these characteristics into consideration, this configuration prevents the bonus value from being reflected in the retained value if the bonus value is awarded at the final bonus trigger before initialization. This prevents the gap from widening unnecessarily with the initial value. Furthermore, since the bonus value at the final bonus trigger does not contribute to reaching the bonus value as described above, the absence of a notification corresponding to such a bonus value does not pose a problem for the player in their efforts to reach the bonus value. In other words, this configuration makes it possible to prevent the gap from widening without interfering with the player's gameplay.

Feature A18. A gaming machine as described in Feature A16 or Feature A17, characterized in that if the bonus value is awarded in response to the predetermined award trigger and the total value reflecting the awarded bonus value is smaller than the award corresponding value, updating of the specific information by the update means is restricted.

For example, if the retained value is not updated when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value due to the granted bonus numerical values, there is a concern that it may not be possible to properly notify the user that the grant corresponding value has been reached. In this regard, this configuration does not always restrict the update of the retained value when there is an award trigger that is subject to the restriction on the update of the retained value, but rather restricts the update only when the total value reflecting the bonus numerical values granted at that trigger has not yet reached the grant corresponding value. This makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of inconveniences that prevent the user from being able to notify the user that the grant corresponding value has been reached.

Feature A19. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A16 to A18, wherein the update restriction means restricts the updating of the specific information by the update means when the bonus value is awarded in response to the predetermined award trigger and the total value reflecting the awarded bonus value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (3).

If the held value were not updated at all times during an award trigger that is subject to a limit on updating the held value, no notification of an increase in the total value would be issued at that trigger, which could give the player the impression that there is no possibility of a bonus value being awarded at that trigger (in other words, that the total value will not increase at that trigger). In this regard, the present configuration limits the limit to cases where the total value reflecting the bonus values awarded at that trigger is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In this case, if the total value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value and the gap with the initial value at the time of initialization is expected to be large, the total value will not be reflected in the held value. However, if the total value is less than the predetermined value, the held value will be updated and a notification that the total value has increased can be issued. This makes it possible to ensure opportunities to notify the player that the total value has increased while preventing the gap with the initial value at the time of initialization from becoming too large.

Feature A20. A gaming machine described in any of Features A14 to A19, wherein the specific notification execution means includes mode determination means (a function for executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81) that determines the mode of the specific notification based on the specific information held in an unupdated state rather than the total value at that time when the update restriction means restricts updating of the specific information.

For example, if an update is not performed due to an update restriction and the mode of the specific notification is determined based on the total value (the total value reflecting the awarded bonus numerical value), the mode of the specific notification and the held value will not match, which may confuse the player. In this regard, with this configuration, the mode of the specific notification is determined based on the held value when the update is postponed (the held value before the bonus numerical value is awarded), making it possible to properly match the mode of the specific notification and the held value.

Feature A21. A gaming machine described in any of Features A1 to A20, wherein the second control means includes second initialization means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2702 and S3901 by the display control device 81) that initializes the specific information stored in the storage means when the specified benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means.

In the above configuration, the specific information stored in the storage means is initialized when a bonus is awarded, which makes it possible to prevent players from getting the impression that they are trying to save up points again by using the period until the bonus is awarded as a dividing line.

Feature A22. A plurality of game states are set, including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the specific event does not occur;
The first control means
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
When a predetermined transition condition is met, a specific state transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the specific state;
When a predetermined termination condition is met, a specific state termination means (a function of executing a process to terminate the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) that terminates the specific state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized in that the initialization means initializes the total value when the specific state ends or is ended.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events advantageous to the player and the awarding of bonus values are limited to specific states, emphasizing specific states as situations in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any of the above features A1 to A21, it is possible to optimally demonstrate the above effects of each feature.

Feature A23. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of gaming media corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A22, characterized in that it is provided with:

By applying any of the features A1 to A22 to a slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to optimally achieve the effects of each feature.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, and features H1 to H6, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination with each other. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature Group B>
Feature B1. A numerical value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can grant a special value (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity),
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value of the bonus numerical values (total points) awarded by the numerical value awarding means reaches a bonus corresponding value;
When a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous zone) is met, an initialization means (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second zone display processing by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical value;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process for executing a point effect by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification regarding a bonus value;
a limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S2604 by the display control device 81) capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means when a predetermined limiting condition (the accumulated points have not reached the retained points) is met, even if a special value is granted by the value granting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, bonus values are awarded when a bonus trigger is met, and when the total value reaches the bonus value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. By providing notifications for each bonus value and the bonus value awarded, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus value, which stimulates the player's desire to further increase the bonus value. In other words, this encourages the player to continue playing.

However, in the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is met, the total bonus value is initialized, and at least a portion of the bonus values accumulated up to that point is lost. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which a notification corresponding to the total bonus value is made as a bonus value notification, if the initialization of the total bonus value is reflected directly in the notification, there is a concern that this may give the player the impression that they are being forced to save up their bonus values again, reducing their motivation to continue playing. Furthermore, in a configuration in which a notification corresponding to the awarded bonus value is made, there is a risk that the total value predicted by the player from the notified awarded value may diverge from the actual total value, resulting in a decrease in the player's trust in the notification. In this regard, in this configuration, even when a bonus value is awarded, the execution of a specific notification is limited when a restriction condition is met. This prevents the issuance of a specific notification reflecting the initialized total value or the issuance of an award value that does not match the actual total value, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

In this feature, "notification regarding bonus numerical values" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value of bonus numerical values or notification corresponding to the granting of bonus numerical values." Furthermore, in this feature, "initialization means for initializing the total value of bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101)" can also be expressed as "reduction means for reducing the total value of bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101)."

Feature B2: The specific notification execution means
an execution determination means (a function of executing the process of step S2606 by the display control device 81) for determining whether or not to execute the specific notification based on the award value provided by the value providing means;
An execution means for executing the specific notification when the execution determination means determines that the specific notification should be executed (a function for executing the processing of step S2608 by the display control device 81 and the processing for executing the point effect);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature B1 is configured such that when the restriction state is established by the restriction means, even if a bonus number is assigned by the number assignment means, the execution of the specific notification is restricted regardless of the judgment result of the execution judgment means or without the judgment processing of the execution judgment means being performed.

In the above configuration, when a bonus value is awarded, a special notification is executed after an execution determination is made to determine whether or not to execute the special notification. However, if a restricted state is set by the restriction means, the execution of the special notification is restricted regardless of the result of the execution determination or without an execution determination being made. In other words, because the execution of the special notification is forcibly prohibited, it is possible to effectively prevent the execution of a special notification that reflects an initialized total value or the announcement of an award value that does not match the actual total value.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein the restriction condition includes the total value being initialized by the initialization means.

In the above configuration, a restricted state that restricts the execution of specific notifications can be initiated when the total value is initialized. This effectively prevents specific notifications that reflect the initialized total value from being issued.

Feature B4: A storage unit (a function of storing a storage point by the display control device 81) is provided that, when the total value is initialized by the initialization unit, can store the total value before the initialization as a storage value (storage point) even after the initialization,
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the restricted state imposed by the restricting means can be released when the total value after initialization becomes equal to or greater than the held value held by the holding means or a value corresponding thereto (a subtraction value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the held point), or when the total value becomes greater than either of these values.

In the above configuration, the restriction is lifted when the post-initialization total value becomes equal to or greater than the held value or a value corresponding to it. In other words, the execution of specific notifications is restricted until the total value catches up with the held value, and once it has caught up, the restriction is lifted. In this case, in a configuration that issues a notification corresponding to the total value, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effects of initialization, the specific notification can be issued so that, from the player's perspective, the total value appears to be gradually increasing. Furthermore, in a configuration that issues a notification corresponding to the bonus value awarded, the total value predicted by the player from the notified awarded value can be aligned with the actual total value. As a result, it is possible to effectively stimulate the player's desire to continue playing even after the total value has been initialized.

Feature B5. A gaming machine described in any of Features B1 to B4, wherein the specific notification execution means is configured to not execute the specific notification when the restricted state imposed by the restriction means is in effect, or to make it more difficult to execute the specific notification than when the restricted state is not in effect.

In the above configuration, by restricting the execution of specific notifications, it is possible to prevent the notifications from being executed or to reduce their frequency, thereby making it possible to optimally achieve the effects of the configurations of features B1 to B4.

Feature B6: The specific notification execution means
a first means (a function of executing the process of step S2804 by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification that allows a player to recognize a numerical value or amount that is smaller than the total value or the awarded numerical value for the special bonus as the specific notification;
and second means (a function of causing a display control device 81 to execute steps S3401 and S3501) that can execute the specific notification based on at least a part of the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value of the bonus numerical value (retained points) (the difference between the used points and the accumulated points), after the specific notification by the first means has been executed by the first means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the specific notification by the second means can be executed in a situation where the restriction state is established by the restriction means.

By limiting the execution of special notifications, it is possible to obtain the effects of features B1 to B5 described above. However, on the other hand, if the frequency of special notifications is reduced due to execution restrictions, there is a concern that players will have fewer opportunities to be aware of the existence of bonus numbers, and that players will gradually lose interest in bonus numbers. In this case, it would be possible to increase the frequency of special notifications in the restricted state, but if the special notification were configured to correspond to the actual total value (the total value reduced by initialization), this would give the player the impression that the total value has disappeared, which could undermine the original purpose of limiting the execution of notifications.

In this regard, in this configuration, the second means issues a specific notification based on the difference between the actual value of the specific notification issued by the first means and the total value, and this specific notification is issued in a restricted state. The specific notification issued by the second means utilizes the surplus in the total value for specific notifications that have already been issued. Therefore, by issuing such notifications in a restricted state, the frequency of specific notifications can be increased while aligning the specific notification mode with the actual total value. This makes it possible to appropriately address the above-mentioned inconveniences resulting from the creation of a restricted state.

Feature B7. A gaming machine as described in Feature B6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for retaining the difference before initialization even after initialization when the total value of the bonus numerical values is initialized by the initialization means (a function for retaining the difference value by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, the difference does not disappear even when the total value is initialized, but is maintained thereafter. This makes it possible to use the difference across initialization when restricting the execution of specific notifications. This makes it possible to execute specific notifications by utilizing the difference generated by specific notifications before initialization after initialization. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of specific notifications in a configuration in which the total value is initialized when a predetermined condition is met.

Feature B8: The limiting condition includes that the total value is equal to or smaller than a predetermined reference value (retention point),
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B7, characterized in that it is equipped with a change means (a function for executing the processing of step S2605 by the display control device 81) that can change the reference value depending on the game situation.

In the above configuration, the execution of a specific notification is restricted when the total value is equal to or less than a predetermined reference value, and this reference value is changed according to the game situation, so the restriction can be switched on or off depending on the situation. This means that, for example, if a total value greater than the previous total value is obtained, the reference value can be changed accordingly, preventing the execution of a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the maximum value, making it less likely that the player will get the impression that the total value has disappeared.

Feature B9. The gaming machine described in Feature B8, wherein the change means is capable of changing the reference value in accordance with the total value.

With this configuration, the reference value can be changed to track changes in the total value each time. For example, if a total value greater than the previous total value is obtained, the reference value can be changed accordingly. This prevents specific notifications corresponding to values smaller than the maximum value from being issued, making it less likely that the player will get the impression that the total value has disappeared.

Feature B10: A storage unit (a function of storing the storage points stored by the display control device 81) is provided that, when the total value is initialized by the initialization unit, can store the total value before the initialization or a value corresponding thereto (a subtraction value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the storage point) as the reference value even after the initialization,
The gaming machine described in feature B8 or feature B9 is characterized in that, as the change means, it is equipped with an update means (a function of executing the processing of step S2605 by the display control device 81) that updates the total value as a new reference value if the total value after initialization becomes larger than the reference value.

In the above configuration, if the total value after initialization becomes larger than the retained reference value, that total value is retained as the new reference value, and the highest total value obtained through play up to that point becomes the reference value. Therefore, the reference value can be changed each time the highest value is updated, making it possible to prevent specific notifications from being issued when the total value is lower than the current highest value. On the other hand, if a total value exceeding the current highest value is obtained, the execution of the specific notification is not restricted, so the player can be informed that such a total value has been reached. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from getting the impression that the total value has disappeared, while also motivating them to continue playing by notifying them that the total value has increased.

Feature B11. A gaming machine described in any of Features B8 to B10, characterized in that it is equipped with a change restriction means (a function that causes the display control device 81 to execute the processing of step S3602) that can restrict the change of the reference value by the change means in a predetermined case (when the first AT mode has ended and the accumulated points are 3 or more).

For example, if the reference value is changed so that the execution of specific notifications is more likely to be restricted, the frequency with which specific notifications are issued can be reduced, preventing players from feeling as if the total value has disappeared. However, on the other hand, the reduced notification frequency could cause players to lose interest in the bonus numerical value. In this regard, this configuration can limit changes to the reference value, thereby preventing a decrease in notification frequency and preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature B12: A plurality of award triggers are provided as triggers for awarding the bonus numerical value by the numerical value awarding means,
The gaming machine described in feature B11 is characterized in that the change restriction means is capable of restricting changes to the reference value when the bonus number is awarded due to a predetermined award trigger among multiple award triggers (a trigger for executing an award lottery based on the first AT mode ending without winning the second AT mode transition lottery).

For example, if a total value greater than the previous total value is obtained, the reference value can be changed to match the obtained total value, making it possible to limit the execution of specific notifications in line with each change in the total value. However, this can also widen the gap with the initial value at the time of initialization, significantly reducing the frequency of subsequent notifications. In this regard, with this configuration, changes to the reference value are limited depending on which of multiple triggers for awarding a bonus value occurs. This means that, for example, if the trigger for awarding a bonus value is the trigger immediately before initialization, the awarded bonus value can be prevented from being reflected in the reference value, making it possible to prevent the gap with the initial value at the time of initialization from becoming too large.

Feature B13. The gaming machine described in Feature B12, wherein the predetermined award trigger is the final trigger before initialization by the initialization means.

After a bonus value is awarded at the final award trigger before initialization, no new bonus values are awarded until initialization, meaning the bonus value before initialization is not reached. Therefore, the bonus value at the final trigger is treated as if it never existed due to the subsequent initialization and ultimately does not contribute to reaching the bonus value. Taking this characteristic into consideration, this configuration is designed so that if the award trigger at which a bonus value is awarded is the final trigger before initialization, the awarded bonus value is not reflected in the base value, thereby preventing the gap from widening unnecessarily with the initial value. Furthermore, since the bonus value at the final trigger does not contribute to reaching the bonus value as described above, the absence of a notification corresponding to such a bonus value does not pose a problem for the player in their efforts to reach the bonus value. In other words, this configuration makes it possible to prevent the gap from widening without interfering with the player's game.

Feature B14. A gaming machine described in any of Features B8 to B13, characterized in that it is equipped with an initialization means (a function that executes the processing of steps S2702 and S3901 by the display control device 81) that initializes the reference value when the specified bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means.

In the above configuration, the reference value is initialized when a bonus is awarded, which makes it possible to prevent players from getting the impression that they are trying to save up again by using the period until the bonus is awarded as a dividing line.

Feature B15. A value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can grant a value for a special benefit (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity);
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value of the bonus numerical values (total points) awarded by the numerical value awarding means reaches a bonus corresponding value;
When a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous zone) is met, an initialization means (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second zone display processing by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process for executing a point effect by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification regarding a bonus value;
a specifying means (a function of executing the process of step S2604 by the display control device 81) that makes the execution frequency of the specific notification after the initialization of the total value by the initializing means lower than the execution frequency of the specific notification before the initialization;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, bonus values are awarded when a bonus trigger is met, and when the total value reaches the bonus value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. By providing notifications for each bonus value and the bonus value awarded, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus value, which stimulates the player's desire to further increase the bonus value. In other words, this encourages the player to continue playing.

However, in the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is met, the total value of the bonus values is initialized and the bonus values accumulated up to that point are lost. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which a notification corresponding to the total value is made as a notification regarding the bonus value, if the initialization of the total value is reflected directly in the notification, there is a concern that it may give the player the impression that they are being forced to save up their bonus values again, which may reduce their motivation to continue playing. Furthermore, in a configuration in which a notification is made corresponding to the bonus values that have been awarded, there is a risk that the total value predicted by the player from the notified awarded value may diverge from the actual total value, resulting in a decrease in the player's trust in the notification. In this regard, in this configuration, the frequency of specific notifications after initialization is configured to be lower than before initialization, making it less likely that the player will realize that the total value has been initialized, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be effectively prevented.

In this feature, "notification regarding a bonus value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus value." Furthermore, any of the configurations of features B1 to B15 above can be applied to this feature. In this case, applying these configurations can provide additional benefits.

Feature B16. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states,
the value granting means grants a bonus value based on the granting trigger in the specific state,
the initialization means performs the initialization when the specific state ends or is ended,
The gaming machine described in feature B15 is characterized in that the specification means makes the frequency of execution of the specific notification in the specific state after the initialization lower than the frequency of execution of the specific notification in the specific state before the initialization.

With this configuration, in a configuration in which the total value is initialized when a specific state ends, the frequency of specific notifications in subsequent specific states is kept lower than in previous specific states, making it difficult for players to realize that the total value has been initialized, and effectively preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Feature B17. A plurality of game states are set, including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the specific event does not occur;
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
When a predetermined transition condition is met, a specific state transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the specific state;
When a predetermined termination condition is met, a specific state termination means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) for terminating the specific state;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B16, wherein the initialization means initializes the total value when the specific state ends.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events advantageous to the player and the awarding of bonus values are limited to specific states, emphasizing specific states as situations in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any of the above features B1 to B17, it is possible to optimally demonstrate the above effects of each feature.

Feature B18. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of gaming media corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B17, characterized in that it is provided with:

By applying any of the features B1 to B17 to a slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to optimally achieve the effects of each feature.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features B1 to B18: features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, and features H1 to H6, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A numerical value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can grant a special value (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity),
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value of the bonus numerical values (total points) awarded by the numerical value awarding means reaches a bonus corresponding value;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing point processing and point effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification regarding a bonus value;
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means
a first means (a function of executing the process of step S2804 by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification that allows a player to recognize a numerical value or amount that is smaller than the total value of the bonus numerical value as the specific notification;
a second means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on at least a part of the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value at the time the specific notification was executed (the difference between the used points and the accumulated points) after the specific notification by the first means has been executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, a bonus value is awarded when a bonus trigger is met, and when the total value reaches the bonus value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. In addition, a specific notification is issued each time the total value is reached, allowing the player to recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus value, stimulating their desire to further increase the bonus value. In other words, this encourages them to continue playing.

In this configuration, in order to strongly stimulate the desire to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the number of opportunities to award bonus values, increase the frequency of specific notifications, and heighten the player's interest in the bonus values. However, on the other hand, if there are more opportunities to award bonus values, the difficulty of reaching the bonus value corresponding to the bonus value will decrease, which may result in the bonus being forced to be kept low and reducing its appeal to players. In other words, there is a concern that increasing the frequency of specific notifications may actually diminish the appeal of games using bonus values.

In this regard, with this configuration, the second means executes a special notification by utilizing the difference between the special notification executed by the first means and the total value of the bonus numerical value, i.e., the surplus in the total value for the special notifications that have already been executed. In this case, a special notification can be issued even if a bonus numerical value has not actually been awarded, thereby expanding the opportunities for special notifications to be issued without reducing the difficulty of reaching the bonus corresponding value. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of notifications while maintaining the level of the bonus, thereby effectively stimulating the desire to continue playing.

In this feature, "second means (a function of executing steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification after the specific notification by the first means is executed, based on at least a part of the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value at the time the specific notification was executed (the difference between used points and accumulated points)" can also be expressed as "second means (a function of executing steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification after the specific notification by the first means is executed, based on at least a part of the difference (difference value) between the value (used points) corresponding to the specific notification by the first means and the total value (accumulated points) at the time the specific notification was executed."

Feature C2. A gaming machine as described in Feature C1, wherein the first means is capable of issuing a notification as the specific notification that is recognizable to the player, a numerical value or amount that is smaller than the total value of the bonus numerical values, based on the awarding of the bonus numerical values by the numerical value awarding means.

With the above configuration, when a bonus value is awarded and the total value increases, a portion of that increase can be used to make a specific notification by the second means. This makes it easier to secure a large value as the difference, making it possible to make the total value appear to have increased significantly when making a specific notification by the second means, or to increase the number of times that a specific notification by the second means is made.

Feature C3. A gaming machine as described in Feature C1 or Feature C2, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification by the second means when the bonus value has not been awarded by the value awarding means.

With the above configuration, the second means issues a specific notification when no bonus value has been awarded, ensuring opportunities for specific notifications without increasing the chances of awarding bonus values. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while preventing a decrease in the level of bonuses based on reaching the bonus value.

Feature C4. A gaming machine described in any of Features C1 to C3, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification by the second means in a situation where the total value has not increased after the specific notification by the first means has been executed.

In the above configuration, the second means issues a specific notification when the total value has not increased since the first means issued the specific notification, ensuring opportunities for specific notifications without increasing the chances of awarding a bonus value. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while preventing a decrease in the level of bonuses based on reaching the bonus value.

Feature C5. A gaming machine as described in Feature C3 or Feature C4, characterized in that it includes means (a function for executing the processing of step S2804 by the display control device 81) for determining the manner of the specific notification by the second means based on the total value when the specific notification by the first means is executed.

In the above configuration, the mode of the specific notification by the second means is determined based on the total value when the specific notification by the first means is made, so the total value indicated by the specific notification by the second means can be matched with the actual total value at that time. This makes it possible to make a specific notification when no bonus value has been awarded, while minimizing disruption to play aimed at reaching the bonus value.

Feature C6. A plurality of modes (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set as the mode of the specific notification,
The first means is configured to execute the specific notification in any one manner selected from a plurality of manners,
A gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C5, characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means that changes the selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is executed by the first means depending on the bonus value granted when the specific notification is executed by the first means or the total value when the specific notification is executed by the first means.

By associating the specific notification by the first means with a value smaller than the actual total value, there is a concern that the specific notification by the first means will indicate a total value that is too small, thereby failing to effectively stimulate the player's desire to continue playing, in order to ensure a margin for the subsequent specific notification by the second means. In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode selection mode when the specific notification by the first means is made differs depending on the bonus value or total value awarded at that time. For example, if the configuration is such that the larger the bonus value or total value awarded, the more likely it is that a notification mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value will be selected, this can effectively prevent the notification from being poor, even if the specific notification by the first means is made to correspond to a value smaller than the total value, since the total value is large to begin with. Therefore, both the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means can indicate appropriate total values, effectively stimulating the player's desire to continue playing.

Feature C7. A gaming machine as described in Feature C6, wherein the specifying means changes the selection mode so that a notification that the player can recognize is more likely to be made when the bonus value awarded when the first means executes the specific notification or the total value when the first means executes the specific notification is a first value (4 points), compared to when the bonus value awarded when the first means executes the specific notification is a second value (2 points) that is smaller than the first value.

With this configuration, when selecting the notification mode for the specific notification by the first means, the larger the bonus value or total value awarded, the more likely it is that a notification mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value will be selected. In other words, the larger the total value to begin with, the more likely it is that a mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value will be selected, making it easier to ensure a difference for the specific notification by the second means, thereby effectively preventing the specific notification by the first means from being poor. Therefore, both the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means can show an appropriate total value, making it possible to effectively stimulate the player's desire to continue playing.

Feature C8: A limiting means (a function of causing the display control device 81 to execute the process of step S2604) is provided that can limit the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means when a predetermined limiting condition (the accumulated points have not reached the retained points) is met,
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that the specific notification by the second means can be executed when the restriction means is in a restricted state.

With the above configuration, the execution of a special notification is restricted when a predetermined restriction condition is met. In this case, if the special notification is not executed at all in the restricted state, there is a concern that the player's interest in the bonus numerical value will decrease. In this regard, with this configuration, the special notification by the second means is executed in the restricted state, so it is possible to ensure the opportunity to execute the special notification in the restricted state.

Note that the phrase "when a predetermined restricted state is established" in this feature can also be rephrased as "when the total value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (retention points or the value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the retention points)." In this case, the following effect can be expected: "The specific notification by the second means is made based on a total value obtained in the past, and therefore can be made without being restricted by the total value at the time of making the notification. In other words, it has the characteristic that it can be made without any problems even in situations where the execution of a specific notification is restricted depending on the total value. By taking advantage of this characteristic and using the specific notification by the second means as a specific notification in a restricted state, it is possible to preferably ensure opportunities to make a specific notification in that state."

Feature C9. The gaming machine described in Feature C8, wherein the specific notification by the second means can be executed in the restricted state based on at least a portion of the difference derived from the specific notification issued by the first means before the restricted state is established by the restricting means.

To issue a specific notification by the second means in a restricted state, a prerequisite difference is required, and with this configuration, this difference is derived from the specific notification by the first means in an unrestricted state. In an unrestricted state, the execution of a specific notification is not restricted, making it easier for a specific notification to be issued. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to optimally ensure this difference.

Feature C10. A gaming machine as described in Feature C8 or Feature C9, characterized in that it is equipped with initialization means (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing for displaying an interval by the main control unit 101) that initializes the total value of the bonus numerical value when a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous interval) is met.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is met, the total bonus value is initialized and any bonus values accumulated up to that point are lost. In this case, if the initialization of the total value is reflected directly in the notification, there is a concern that it may give the player the impression that they are being forced to accumulate them again, reducing their motivation to continue playing. In contrast to this configuration, it is effective to limit the execution of specific notifications when the total value after initialization is small, but on the other hand, there is a concern that a decrease in notification frequency will reduce opportunities for players to be aware of the bonus values and cause them to lose interest in them. In such cases, applying the configuration of feature C8 or feature C9 above makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications in a restricted state while reducing the impression that the total value has been initialized.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)" can also be expressed as "reduction means for reducing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)."

Feature C11. A plurality of modes (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set as the mode of the specific notification,
The first means is configured to execute the specific notification in any one manner selected from a plurality of manners,
The gaming machine described in feature C10 is characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means that changes the selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is executed by the first means depending on the bonus value granted when the specific notification is executed by the first means or the total value when the specific notification is executed by the first means.

When a large bonus value is obtained, the total value also becomes larger, but the larger the total value, the larger the gap between the initial value and the total value when it is initialized. Such a large gap can lead to a prolonged restricted state in subsequent games. In this regard, this configuration is configured so that the selection of the notification mode when a specific notification is made by the first means differs depending on the bonus value or total value granted at that time. In situations where a notification mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value is likely to be selected, it becomes easier to secure the difference for a subsequent specific notification by the second means. If such a situation is more likely to occur the larger the bonus value or total value granted, the more likely the restricted state is to be prolonged, the more likely it is that the difference for a specific notification by the second means will be secured. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it easier to make a specific notification by the second means in prolonged restricted states where there is a high need to increase the frequency of specific notifications.

Feature C12. The gaming machine described in Feature C11, wherein the specifying means changes the selection mode so that a notification that the player can recognize is more likely to be made when the bonus value awarded when the first means executes the specific notification or the total value when the first means executes the specific notification is a first value (3 points), compared to when the bonus value awarded when the first means executes the specific notification is a second value (2 points) that is smaller than the first value.

With this configuration, when selecting the notification mode for a specific notification by the first means, the larger the granted bonus value or total value, the more likely it is that a notification mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value will be selected. This makes it possible to configure the system so that the difference for a specific notification by the second means is more likely to be secured the longer the restricted state is likely to last. Therefore, it becomes easier to make a specific notification by the second means in a prolonged restricted state where there is a greater need to increase the frequency of specific notifications.

Feature C13. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C10 to C12, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for retaining the difference before initialization even after initialization when the total value of the bonus numerical values is initialized by the initialization means (a function for retaining the difference value set by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, the difference is not lost when the total value is initialized but is maintained thereafter, making it possible to use the difference across initialization when restricting the execution of specific notifications. This makes it possible to execute specific notifications by utilizing the difference generated by specific notifications before initialization after initialization, making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of specific notifications in a configuration in which the total value is initialized when a predetermined condition is met.

Feature C14. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C13, wherein the specific notification does not explicitly state a bonus value.

With the above configuration, the bonus value is not clearly displayed in the specific notification, so even if there is a discrepancy between the actual total value and the specific notification by the first means, the player is less likely to notice, which prevents the player's trust in the notification from decreasing.

Feature C15. A plurality of game states are set, including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the specific event does not occur;
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
When a predetermined transition condition is met, a specific state transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the specific state;
When a predetermined termination condition is met, a specific state termination means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) for terminating the specific state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C13, characterized in that it is equipped with an initialization means (a function of executing initialization processing in the second section display processing by the main control unit 101) that initializes the total value when the specific state ends or is completed.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events advantageous to the player and the awarding of bonus values are limited to specific states, emphasizing specific states as situations in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any of the above features C1 to C13, it is possible to optimally demonstrate the above effects of each feature.

Feature C16. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of gaming media corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C15, characterized in that it is provided with:

By applying any of the features C1 to C15 to a slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to optimally achieve the effects of each feature.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A23, Features B1 to B18, Features C1 to C16, Features D1 to D12, Features E1 to E21, Features F1 to F23, Features G1 to G19, and Features H1 to H6, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination with each other to each of the above Features C1 to C16. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states,
a value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a value (points) for a special benefit in accordance with the game situation in the specific state;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value of the bonus numerical values (total points) awarded by the numerical value awarding means reaches a bonus corresponding value;
an initialization means (a function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical value when the specific state ends;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing point processing and point effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification regarding a bonus value;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a specific means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81) that executes the specific notification in a specific state after the specified specific state based on at least a portion of the bonus number awarded in the specified specific state.

In this configuration, bonus values are awarded according to the game situation, and when the total value reaches the bonus value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. By receiving notifications each time the total value and the bonus value awarded, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus value, which stimulates the player's desire to further increase the bonus value. In other words, this encourages the player to continue playing.

However, with the above configuration, when the specific state ends, the total bonus value is initialized, and at least a portion of the bonus values accumulated up to that point are lost. In this case, if the initialization of the total value were reflected directly in the notification, there is a concern that it could give the player the impression that they are being forced to accumulate them again, reducing their motivation to continue playing. In this regard, with this configuration, when a specific notification regarding the bonus value is made, the specific notification for a subsequent specific state is made based on at least a portion of the bonus values awarded in a specific state. This prevents the initialization of the total value from being reflected directly in the notification, making it possible to effectively stimulate the motivation to continue playing even after the initialization.

In this feature, "notification regarding the bonus numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the awarding of the bonus numerical value." Also, in this feature, "initialization means (a function that executes the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101) that initializes the total value of the bonus numerical value when the specific state ends" can also be expressed as "reduction means (a function that executes the processing of step S2109 in the second section display processing by the main control device 101) that reduces the total value of the bonus numerical value when the specific state ends."

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, wherein the determination means executes the specific notification based on at least a portion of the bonus value awarded in the specified specific state if the total value in the specific state after the specified specific state is equal to or less than a specified value (retained points).

In the above configuration, if the total value in a later specific state is low, a special notification based on the bonus value granted in the earlier specific state is executed. This allows the special notification to be supplemented until the total value increases, making it possible to effectively stimulate the desire to continue playing after the total value has been initialized.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D2, wherein the predetermined value is the total value in the predetermined specific state.

In the above configuration, if the total value in a later specific state is less than the total value in an earlier specific state, a special notification based on the bonus value granted in the earlier specific state is executed. This allows the notification to supplement the special notification until the total value catches up, making it possible to effectively stimulate players' desire to continue playing after the total value has been initialized.

Feature D4. A gaming machine as described in Feature D2 or Feature D3, wherein the predetermined value is the highest value of the total value in the predetermined specific state before initialization.

In the above configuration, if the total value in the later specific state is less than the maximum value before initialization, a specific notification based on the bonus value granted in the previous specific state is executed. This allows the notification to supplement the specific notification until the total value catches up to the maximum value, making it possible to effectively stimulate the desire to continue playing after the total value is initialized.

Feature D5. A gaming machine described in any of Features D1 to D4, wherein the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification based on at least a portion of the bonus value assigned in a specific state after the specific state, in a situation where a bonus value has not been assigned by the value assignment means in the specific state after the specific state.

In the above configuration, when a bonus value has not been awarded in a later specific state, a special notification based on the bonus value awarded in the earlier specific state is executed. This allows the special notification to be supplemented until the total value increases, making it possible to effectively stimulate the player's desire to continue playing after the total value has been initialized.

Feature D6: A limiting means (a function of causing the display control device 81 to execute the process of step S2604) is provided that can limit the execution of the specific notification in a predetermined case (when the accumulated points are smaller than the retained points) in the specific state after the predetermined specific state,
A gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D5, characterized in that the specific means executes the specific notification based on at least a portion of the bonus numerical value awarded in a specified specific state when in a restricted state by the restriction means.

For example, by restricting the execution of a special notification in a situation where the total value in a later special state is smaller than the total value in an earlier special state, it is possible to prevent notifications of a decrease in the total value, which is preferable in that it does not give the player the impression that they are having to save up again. However, on the other hand, this reduces the frequency of special notifications, which may reduce opportunities for players to be aware of the bonus numbers, raising concerns that they may become less interested in the bonus numbers. In this regard, with this configuration, when the execution of special notifications is restricted, special notifications based on the bonus numbers granted in the earlier special state are issued, making it possible to suitably increase the frequency of special notifications in restricted states.

Feature D7. A gaming machine described in any of Features D1 to D6, wherein the specification means executes the specific notification multiple times based on at least a portion of the bonus value awarded in the specified specific state.

With the above configuration, specific notifications based on the bonus value granted in the previous specific state are made multiple times, making it possible to preferably increase the frequency of specific notifications in subsequent specific states.

Feature D8. The specific notification execution means
a first means (a function of executing the process of step S2804 by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification that allows a player to recognize a numerical value or amount that is smaller than the total value of the bonus numerical values as the specific notification in the predetermined specific state;
A gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a second means for executing the specific notification based on at least a portion of the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value (accumulated points) at the time the specific notification is executed (the difference value between the used points and the accumulated points).

In the above configuration, the difference between the value corresponding to the specific notification generated in the previous specific state and the total value is used to issue the specific notification in the subsequent specific state, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent the total value reported by the notification from diverging from the actual total value.

Feature D9. The gaming machine described in Feature D8 is characterized in that, when the total value is initialized by the initialization means, it is equipped with a means for retaining the difference before initialization even after the initialization (a function for retaining the difference value set by the display control device 81).

With the above configuration, the difference is not lost even when the total value is initialized, but is maintained thereafter, making it possible to use the difference across initializations. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the difference generated by the specific notification before initialization when executing the specific notification after initialization.

Feature D10. A plurality of game states are set, including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the specific event does not occur;
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
When a predetermined transition condition is met, a specific state transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the specific state;
When a predetermined termination condition is met, a specific state termination means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) for terminating the specific state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events advantageous to the player and the awarding of bonus values are limited to specific states, emphasizing specific states as situations in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any of the above features D1 to D9, it is possible to optimally demonstrate the above effects of each feature.

Feature D11. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of gaming media corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that it is equipped with:

By applying any of the features D1 to D10 to a slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to optimally achieve the effects of each feature.

Feature D12. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states,
a specific information variable means (a function of awarding points in the first point lottery process and the second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can change the specific information (total points) in accordance with the game situation in the specific state;
When the specific information becomes a predetermined content (a bonus value), a bonus granting means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) can grant a predetermined bonus (a transition to the second AT mode) to the player;
an initialization means for initializing the specific information when the specific state ends (a function for executing initialization processing in the second section display processing by the main control device 101);
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing point processing and point effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification regarding the specific information;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a means (a function of executing processing of steps S3401 and S3501 by the display control device 81) for executing the specific notification in a specific state after the specified specific state based on at least a portion of the specific information before initialization in the specified specific state.

This feature can achieve the same effect as feature D1 above. Note that any of the configurations of features D1 to D11 above can be applied to this feature. In this case, applying these configurations can achieve additional benefits.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features D1 to D12: features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, and features H1 to H6. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. A numerical value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can grant a special value (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity),
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value (total points) of the bonus numerical values awarded by the numerical value awarding means becomes a bonus corresponding value (bonus award value) corresponding to the award of the bonus;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing point processing and point effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that controls specific notifications (award suggestion effects, total suggestion effects) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as notifications regarding bonus numerical values;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a specification means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4609, steps S4801 to S4811, and steps S4901 to S4911 by the display control device 81) that controls the execution of the specific notification based on specific information (performance-available points, total points) corresponding to a value greater than the bonus numerical value (awarded points) or the total value of the bonus numerical values (total points) awarded by the numerical awarding means.

In this configuration, a bonus value is awarded when a bonus trigger is met, and when the total value reaches the bonus value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. In addition, a specific notification is issued to notify the player of the bonus value, allowing the player to recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus value, stimulating the player's desire to further increase the bonus value. In other words, this encourages the player to continue playing.

In this configuration, in order to strongly stimulate the desire to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the number of opportunities to award bonus values, increase the frequency of specific notifications, and heighten the player's interest in the bonus values. However, on the other hand, if there are more opportunities to award bonus values, the difficulty of reaching the bonus value corresponding to the bonus value will decrease, which may result in the bonus being forced to be kept low and reducing its appeal to players. In other words, there is a concern that increasing the frequency of specific notifications may actually diminish the appeal of games using bonus values.

In this regard, this configuration derives specific information corresponding to a value greater than the bonus value or its total value, separate from the bonus value awarded upon triggering the award, and controls the execution of the specific notification based on this specific information. In this case, the specific notification can be executed based on a value greater than the actual bonus value or its total value, making it possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification. In this case, the specific information is used solely to control the execution of the specific notification and is not involved in awarding the bonus, preventing a decrease in the difficulty of reaching the bonus-corresponding value. Therefore, it is possible to effectively stimulate the desire to continue playing by increasing the notification frequency, while preventing a loss of the appeal of playing using bonus values.

Note that in this feature, "notification regarding a bonus value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus value."

Feature E2. A gaming machine according to Feature E1, characterized in that it is equipped with a derivation means (a function that causes the display control device 81 to execute the processing of steps S4601 to S4606) that derives the specific information based on the bonus numerical value or its total value awarded by the numerical value awarding means and a predetermined numerical value (sub-points, predetermined coefficient) that is different from the bonus numerical value or its total value.

In the above configuration, because bonus numbers are used to derive the specific information, it is possible to derive the specific information while maintaining a correlation with the bonus numbers actually awarded. Therefore, even though the configuration uses specific information different from the bonus numbers, it is possible to prevent the content of the specific notification from diverging significantly from the actual bonus numbers, and it is possible to align or bring closer the total value predicted by the player from the specific notification to the actual accumulated amount (total value) of bonus numbers.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, wherein the derivation means derives the specific information by adding the bonus value or its total value granted by the value granting means to the predetermined value.

In the above configuration, the specific information is obtained by adding the bonus value to the predetermined value, so even if there is no bonus value, it is possible to ensure that the specific information has a value of at least the predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to issue a specific notification regardless of whether a bonus value has actually been awarded at the time of the bonus trigger, making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of specific notifications.

Feature E4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E3, characterized in that it is equipped with a determination means for determining the value of the specific information based on the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means (a function for providing multiple sub-point lottery tables according to the size of the awarded points, and obtaining one from these tables according to the actual awarded points to draw sub-points).

In the above configuration, the value of the specific information is determined according to the bonus numerical value, so the size of the bonus numerical value and the size of the specific information can be linked. For example, if the bonus numerical value awarded is large, the specific information can be made larger accordingly. In this case, the larger the bonus numerical value awarded, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount awarded (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notification. This makes it possible to prevent a discrepancy between the player's impression from the specific notification and the actual accumulated bonus numerical value.

This feature can also be expressed as comprising "a derivation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4606 by the display control device 81) that derives the specific information based on the bonus numerical value or its total value awarded by the numerical value awarding means and a predetermined numerical value (sub-points) different from the bonus numerical value or its total value, and a determination means (a function for providing a plurality of sub-point lottery tables according to the size of the awarded points, and obtaining one from among them according to the actual awarded points to obtain sub-points) that are the predetermined numerical value based on the bonus numerical value or its total value awarded by the numerical value awarding means."

Feature E5. A gaming machine described in any of Features E1 to E4, configured to derive or more easily derive the specific information of a larger value when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means is a first predetermined value (20 points) than when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means is a second predetermined value (10 points) that is smaller than the first predetermined value.

With the above configuration, the larger the bonus value awarded, the larger (or more likely) the specific information becomes, and the frequency of the specific notification and the amount awarded (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notification increase, preventing a discrepancy between the impression the player gets from the specific notification and the actual accumulated bonus value. In other words, the larger the amount awarded or accumulated, the stronger the player's sense of anticipation is aroused, so the frequency of specific notifications is not simply increased unnecessarily, but rather it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while reflecting the actual amount awarded or accumulated.

This feature can also be expressed as "a gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof assigned by the numerical value assigning means is a first predetermined value, the determination means determines or is more likely to determine a larger value as the predetermined numerical value than when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof assigned by the numerical value assigning means is a second predetermined value smaller than the first predetermined value."

Feature E6. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (a win to move to the advantageous zone) is met, and is ended when a predetermined end condition (the advantageous zone game count AG reaches the upper limit game count, the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number, the AT mode is ended) is met,
the bonus granting means is capable of granting a predetermined bonus when a total value of the bonus numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the bonus corresponding value,
a first derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4601 to S4603 by the display control device 81) for deriving a predetermined numerical value (sub-points or coefficient) separately from the bonus numerical value granted by the numerical value granting means or the total value thereof;
a second derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4604 to S4606 by the display control device 81) for deriving the specific information based on the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof assigned by the numerical value assigning means and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means,
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the first derivation means is equipped with a means for deriving the specified numerical value in accordance with the start timing of the specific state or the first award trigger in the specific state (a function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 at the start of the advantageous zone).

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether the bonus value awarded in one specific state has reached the bonus value corresponding to the award, and a specific bonus is awarded depending on the result. With this configuration, the specific value is derived in accordance with the start timing of the specific state or the first bonus trigger in the specific state, making it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications from the beginning of the specific state. This makes it possible to progress through play in the specific state while appropriately increasing the player's anticipation that the bonus value will reach the bonus value corresponding to the award.

Feature E7: A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (winning the lottery to move to the advantageous zone) is met, and is ended when a predetermined end condition (the advantageous zone game count AG reaches the upper limit game count, the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number, the AT mode is ended) is met,
the bonus granting means is capable of granting a predetermined bonus when a total value of the bonus numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the bonus corresponding value,
a first derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4601 to S4603 by the display control device 81) for deriving a predetermined numerical value (sub-points or coefficient) separately from the bonus numerical value granted by the numerical value granting means or the total value thereof;
a second derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4604 to S4606 by the display control device 81) for deriving the specific information based on the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof assigned by the numerical value assigning means and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means,
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the first derivation means is equipped with a means (a function to execute the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 in the middle of the advantageous zone) for deriving the specified numerical value based on a predetermined trigger (when the performance-available points fall below a predetermined value, or when the number of games from the start of the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number of games) after the specific state has begun.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether the bonus value awarded in one specific state has reached the bonus value corresponding to the award, and a specific bonus is awarded based on the result. Under this configuration, the specific value is derived based on a specific trigger that occurs midway through the specific state. Therefore, for example, if there is a shortage of bonus values midway through a specific state, this can be compensated for with a specific value (specific information). For example, in a configuration in which the bonus value award trigger is somewhat suppressed to ensure a certain level of difficulty in reaching the bonus value, bonus values may not be awarded easily in the middle or end of a specific state, making it difficult to provide specific notifications, which could make it difficult to maintain the player's interest in the bonus values. In this regard, with this configuration, the frequency of specific notifications in the middle or end of a specific state can be increased, making it possible to effectively maintain the player's interest in the bonus values.

Feature E8. The gaming machine described in Feature E7, wherein the predetermined trigger is when the bonus value or the total value thereof awarded by the value awarding means is equal to or less than a predetermined value.

With the above configuration, if the bonus value is insufficient, it is possible to make up for it with a predetermined value (specific information) and execute a specific notification.

Feature E9. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a second control means (display control device 81) for controlling the game presentation to be executed in accordance with the processing result of the first control means;
the first control means includes the numerical value granting means and the bonus granting means,
The second control means includes the specific notification execution means and a derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4601 to S4606 by the display control device 81) that derives the specific information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the specifying means controls the execution of the specific notification based on the specific information derived by the derivation means.

In the above configuration, not only is the execution control of the specific notification entrusted to the second control means, but also the derivation of the specific information, thereby increasing the frequency of specific notifications while minimizing the increase in the processing load on the first control means. Considering that first control means generally have stronger anti-fraud measures than second control means, this configuration entrusts the first control means with processing related to the player's interests, such as general control for progressing the game, the awarding of bonus values, and control of the awarding of bonuses when the bonus value reaches the corresponding value. However, in this case, it is expected that the processing load on the first control means will be high. In such a situation, if the execution control of the specific notification and the derivation of the specific information were entrusted to the first control means, there is a concern that processing lags and other issues could occur, hindering gameplay. However, this feature prevents such inconveniences from occurring.

Furthermore, this feature avoids complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplifies the control program. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while suppressing increases in program capacity, making it an ideal configuration for gaming machines with limited memory capacity that can be installed in the first control means.

Feature E10: The specific notification execution means includes execution determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4804 to S4806 and steps S7203 to S7204 by the display control device 81) that determines whether or not to execute the specific notification based on a predetermined execution trigger, and is configured to execute the specific notification when the execution determination means determines that the specific notification should be executed;
As a state related to the specific notification, a plurality of states are provided, including a first state (low probability mode) and a second state (high probability mode) in which the execution determination means is more likely to determine that the specific notification will be executed than in the first state,
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E9, characterized in that it is equipped with a state transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S7105 by the display control device 81) that transitions to the second state when a predetermined transition condition (winning the high probability mode transition lottery) is met in the first state.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined transition condition is met, the game transitions to a second state, in which the probability of a specific notification being issued is increased. In the second state, the frequency of specific notifications is increased, which heightens the player's anticipation that the total bonus value will reach the bonus value, effectively stimulating their desire to continue playing.

Feature E11. The specifying means
When or if a predetermined specific notification is made, a first means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4811 by the display control device 81) for subtracting a value (effected points) corresponding to the predetermined specific notification from the specific information (effectable points) to update the specific information;
a second means (a function of controlling the execution of a grant suggestion performance based on the updated performance possible points by the display control device 81) for controlling the execution of the specific notification after the predetermined specific notification based on predetermined information including the specific information updated by the first means (the updated performance possible points if no new grant points have been granted after the update of the performance possible points by subtraction, or the added value obtained by adding the new grant points to the updated performance possible points if new grant points have been granted);
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, when or if a specific specific notification is issued, the value corresponding to that specific notification is subtracted from the specific information, and the remainder is used as a numerical value for executing a subsequent specific notification. For example, in a configuration in which a specific notification is issued based on a single bonus value each time a bonus value is awarded, if a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the current bonus value is issued, the unused value will end without being used thereafter. In contrast, with this feature, if a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the specific information is issued, the unused value is left as a numerical value for executing a subsequent specific notification, preventing it from being wasted. In other words, since the specific information not used in a previous specific notification can be effectively used to execute a subsequent specific notification, it is possible to efficiently execute specific notifications based on the derived specific information. This increases the frequency of specific notifications and effectively increases player interest in bonus values.

Feature E12. A plurality of modes including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) are set as the mode of the specific notification,
The gaming machine described in feature E11 is configured so that, as the value corresponding to the specific notification, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and a second predetermined value (10 points) different from the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second aspect.

In the above configuration, multiple modes are provided for the specific notification, making it possible to suggest the amount of bonus value to be awarded depending on which mode of specific notification is executed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (the value subtracted from the specific information) were set to a uniform magnitude regardless of the notification mode, the mode of the subsequent specific notification, which is executed and controlled based on the predetermined information, would be selected regardless of the mode of the previous specific notification. As a result, there would be a large discrepancy between the total bonus value predicted by the player from each specific notification and the actual accumulated amount of bonus value (total value), raising concerns that the player's trust in the specific notifications would decrease.

In this regard, with this feature, a value corresponding to the mode of the previous specific notification is subtracted from the specific information, allowing the mode of the subsequent specific notification to be selected in relation to the mode of the previous specific notification. This makes it possible to align or bring closer the total bonus value predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual amount of bonus value accumulated. In other words, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while preventing a decline in the player's trust in the specific notifications.

This feature can also be expressed as "multiple modes are set for the specific notification, including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) that leads the player to expect that a bonus value greater than that of the first mode has been awarded; and the value corresponding to the specific notification is configured such that a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and a second predetermined value (10 points) greater than the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second mode."

Feature E13: The second means includes mode determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4807 by the display control device 81) that determines the mode of the specific notification, and is configured to execute the specific notification in the mode determined by the mode determination means;
The gaming machine described in feature E12 is characterized in that the mode determination means is provided with a means for determining the mode of the subsequent specific notification within the range of the specified information when the subsequent specific notification is executed.

In the above configuration, when the execution of a subsequent specific notification is controlled based on predetermined information, the mode of that specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. This prevents the mode of the subsequent specific notification from being selected in a way that deviates from the actual amount of accumulated bonus values, making it possible to align or bring closer the total bonus values predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual amount of accumulated bonus values.

Feature E14. The gaming machine described in Feature E13, wherein, when executing the subsequent specific notification, the mode determination means determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from among multiple modes, the mode for which the corresponding value is equal to or less than the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of a subsequent specific notification, any mode corresponding to a value exceeding the specified information at that time is excluded from selection from among multiple modes prepared in advance as options. This allows mode selection within the range of the specified information to be performed efficiently and simply, making it a preferred mode for realizing the configuration of feature E13 above.

Feature E15: If the bonus value is not assigned by the value assigning means after the update by the first means, the specific information updated by the first means is set as the predetermined information;
A gaming machine described in any of features E11 to E14, characterized in that if a bonus number is assigned by the number assignment means after the update by the first means, the result of adding the assigned bonus number to the specific information updated by the first means is set as the specified information.

In the above configuration, if a new bonus value is assigned by the value assigning means after the specific information is updated by subtracting a value corresponding to a specific notification that has already been executed, the assigned bonus value is added to the updated specific information to derive the specified information. In this case, the specified information becomes larger than if there was no such addition, which results in subsequent specific notifications being executed more easily, making it possible to suitably increase the frequency of specific notifications.

Feature E16. The specifying means
A first specifying means (a function of executing a point suggestion effect when a point is awarded by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification when a bonus value is awarded by the bonus value awarding means;
a second specifying means (a function of executing a point suggestion effect in a situation where the display control device 81 is not triggered to award points) that can execute the specific notification based on a predetermined trigger (when the continuous effect for pseudo-premonition ends or when the mode shifts to the first AT mode) regardless of whether the award trigger has been established or whether a bonus value has been awarded by the value awarding means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E15, characterized in that it is provided with:

The above configuration includes not only a first specifying means that issues a specific notification when a bonus value is awarded by the value awarding means, but also a second specifying means that issues a specific notification regardless of whether the awarding trigger is met or whether a bonus value has been awarded. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications without increasing the number of opportunities to award bonus values. This makes it possible to prevent the level of bonuses from decreasing due to an increase in the number of opportunities to award bonus values, while also effectively stimulating the player's desire to continue playing by increasing the frequency of notifications.

Feature E17. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a second control means (display control device 81) for controlling the game presentation to be executed in accordance with the processing result of the first control means;
the first control means includes the numerical value granting means and the bonus granting means,
the second control means includes the specific notification execution means,
The gaming machine described in feature E16 is configured so that the predetermined trigger is established based on a predetermined processing (execution control of a series of pseudo-premonition effects) being performed in the second control means.

In the above configuration, the predetermined trigger that triggers the execution of a special notification by the second identification means is established by the execution of a predetermined process by the second control means, so the contribution of the first control means to controlling the execution of a special notification by the second identification means (a special notification in a situation where the award trigger has not been established or a bonus value has not been awarded) can be kept low. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of special notifications while preventing an increase in the processing load on the first control means. Furthermore, this feature makes it possible to avoid an increase in the processing configuration of the first control means and simplify the control program. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of special notifications while preventing an increase in program capacity, making this a suitable configuration for gaming machines with limited memory capacity that can be installed in the first control means.

Feature E18. A specific determination means (a function for executing the AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination of whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
After the specific determination is made by the specific determination means, a specific effect execution means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) controls so that a specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination is executed;
Equipped with
A gaming machine as described in feature E16 or feature E17, characterized in that the specified trigger is configured to be established based on the specific presentation (a series of presentations for pseudo-premonitions) being performed or having been performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the specific judgment by the specific judgment means being a non-specific result that does not correspond to causing the specific event.

In the above configuration, a special effect is executed to inform the player of the determination result of the special determination means. If the determination result of the special determination means is a special result, a special event advantageous to the player will occur, and therefore, when the special effect is executed, it is expected that the player will watch the effect with great interest. In this configuration, this feature is configured to execute a special notification by the second determination means in conjunction with the execution of the special effect, making it easier to draw attention to the special notification and effectively increasing interest in the bonus values.

In addition, this feature is configured so that the second specifying means issues a specific notification in response to a specific effect that corresponds to a non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, a configuration in which the second specifying means issues a specific notification in response to a specific effect that corresponds to a specific result is also expected to increase attention to the specific notification. However, with this configuration, unless the mode and execution timing of the specific notification are properly adjusted taking into account its relationship with the specific event that occurs after the specific effect, there is a concern that the effect of the specific notification may not be properly achieved, or the boundary with the specific event may become unclear, causing confusion among players. In this regard, this feature eliminates the need for such tedious adjustments, making it possible to increase attention to the specific notification while minimizing the increase in the effort required for effect design.

When this feature is applied to feature E17, the configuration may be such that "the first control means further includes the specific determination means and the specific event means, and the second control means further includes the specific performance execution means."

Feature E19. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states,
the bonus granting means is capable of granting a predetermined bonus when a total value of the bonus numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the bonus corresponding value,
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E18, characterized in that it is equipped with an initialization means (a function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of interval display by the main control unit 101) that initializes the total value of the bonus numerical values when the specific state ends or has ended.

In the above configuration, the bonus value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, compared to when bonus values are accumulated throughout the gaming hall's business hours, the period during which a player can increase the bonus value is shortened, and as a result, the frequency with which the bonus value is reached tends to be lower. This reduces the player's interest in accumulating bonus values, making it difficult to increase the player's motivation to continue playing by playing with the aim of reaching the bonus value. In such a situation, applying any of the above features E1 to E18 can increase the frequency of specific notifications during the specific state, providing a configuration that is particularly beneficial for gaming machines in which bonus values are initialized when the specific state ends.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)" can also be expressed as "reduction means for reducing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)."

Feature E20. As a gaming state, a plurality of gaming states are set, including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the specific event does not occur,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
When a predetermined transition condition is met, a specific state transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the specific state;
When a predetermined termination condition is met, a specific state termination means (a function of executing a process to terminate the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) that terminates the specific state;
an initialization means (a function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical value when the specific state ends or has ended;
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E19, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events advantageous to the player and the awarding of bonus values are limited to specific states, emphasizing specific states as situations in which the fun of gaming can be enjoyed. Furthermore, the bonus values are initialized when the specific state ends, making it more difficult for bonus values to accumulate compared to when bonus values are accumulated throughout the gaming hall's business hours. In such a configuration, by applying any of the above features E1 to E19, it is possible to optimally demonstrate the above-mentioned effects of each feature.

Feature E21. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of gaming media corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E20, characterized in that it is provided with:

By applying any of the features E1 to E20 to a slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to optimally achieve the effects of each feature.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features E1 to E21: features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, and features H1 to H6. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A numerical value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can grant a special value (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity),
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value of the bonus numerical values (total points) awarded by the numerical value awarding means reaches a bonus corresponding value;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing point processing and point effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (award suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification regarding a bonus value;
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means
A derivation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81) for deriving specific numerical information (performance possible points);
When or if a predetermined specific notification is made, an update means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4811 by the display control device 81) for subtracting a value (effected points) corresponding to the predetermined specific notification from the specific numerical information derived by the derivation means to update the specific numerical information;
A specifying means (a function of controlling the execution of a grant suggestion performance based on the updated performance possible points by the display control device 81) that controls the execution of the specific notification after the predetermined specific notification based on predetermined information including the specific numerical information updated by the updating means (if no new grant points have been granted after the update of the performance possible points by subtraction, the updated performance possible points, or if new grant points have been granted, the added value obtained by adding the new grant points to the updated performance possible points);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, a bonus value is awarded when a bonus trigger is met, and when the total value reaches the bonus value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. In addition, a specific notification is issued to notify the player of the bonus value, allowing the player to recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus value, stimulating the player's desire to further increase the bonus value. In other words, this encourages the player to continue playing.

In this configuration, in order to strongly stimulate the desire to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the opportunities for awarding bonus numerical values, increase the frequency of specific notifications, and heighten the player's interest in bonus numerical values. In this regard, this configuration is such that when or if a specific specific notification is made, the value corresponding to that specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information, and the remainder is used as the numerical value for executing a subsequent specific notification.

For example, in a configuration in which a specific notification is executed based on one bonus value each time a bonus value is awarded, if a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the current bonus value is executed, the unused value will end without being used thereafter. In contrast, with this feature, if a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the specific numerical information is executed, the unused value is left as a value for executing a subsequent specific notification, preventing it from being wasted. In other words, the specific numerical information not used in a previous specific notification can be effectively used to execute a subsequent specific notification, making it possible to efficiently execute specific notifications based on the derived specific numerical information. This increases the frequency of specific notifications and effectively increases player interest in the bonus values.

In this feature, the "derivation means for deriving specific numerical information (performance-available points)" can also be expressed as "derivation means for deriving specific numerical information (performance-available points) using the bonus numerical value assigned by the numerical value assigning means."

Feature F2. A gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the bonus awarding means awards a predetermined bonus when the total value of the bonus numerical values awarded by the numerical value awarding means becomes the bonus corresponding value, regardless of the specific numerical information.

In this configuration, the specific numerical information is not referenced when granting a specified bonus, and is treated solely as information for executing a specific notification. In other words, the granting of a bonus using bonus numerical values and the execution control of a specific notification using specific numerical information are independent, making it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while preventing inconveniences such as a decrease in the difficulty of granting a bonus.

Feature F3. A gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2, wherein the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus value.

Feature F1 above can increase the frequency of specific notifications, and the configuration of this feature makes it possible to increase the frequency of notifications that special bonus values have been awarded. If notifications that special bonus values have been awarded are given frequently, it is expected that players will be more likely to get the impression that the total value of the special bonus values is increasing, which can effectively stimulate their motivation to continue playing.

Feature F4. A plurality of modes including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) are set as the mode of the specific notification,
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the corresponding value is configured so that a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and a second predetermined value (10 points) different from the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second mode.

In the above configuration, multiple modes are provided for the specific notification, making it possible to suggest the amount of bonus numerical value to be awarded depending on which mode of specific notification is executed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (the value subtracted from the specific numerical information) were set to a uniform magnitude regardless of the notification mode, the mode of the subsequent specific notification, which is executed and controlled based on the predetermined information, would be selected regardless of the mode of the previous specific notification. As a result, there would be a large discrepancy between the total bonus numerical value predicted by the player from each specific notification and the actual accumulated amount of bonus numerical value (total value), raising concerns that the player's trust in the specific notifications would decrease.

In this regard, with this feature, a value corresponding to the mode of the previous specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information, allowing the mode of the subsequent specific notification to be selected in relation to the mode of the previous specific notification. This makes it possible to align or bring closer the total bonus numerical value predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual accumulated amount of bonus numerical value. In other words, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while preventing a decline in the player's trust in the specific notifications.

This feature can also be expressed as "multiple modes are set for the specific notification, including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) that is designed to make the player expect a bonus value greater than that of the first mode, and the corresponding value is configured such that a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and a second predetermined value (10 points) greater than the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second mode."

Feature F5: The specification means includes a mode determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4805 to S4807 by the display control device 81) that determines the mode of the specific notification, and is configured to execute the specific notification in the mode determined by the mode determination means;
A gaming machine described in feature F4, characterized in that the mode determination means is provided with a means for determining the mode of the subsequent specific notification within the range of the specified information when the subsequent specific notification is executed.

In the above configuration, when the execution of a subsequent specific notification is controlled based on predetermined information, the mode of that specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. This prevents the mode of the subsequent specific notification from being selected in a way that deviates from the actual amount of accumulated bonus values, making it possible to align or bring closer the total bonus values predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual amount of accumulated bonus values.

Feature F6. The gaming machine described in Feature F5, wherein the mode determination means, when executing the subsequent specific notification, determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from among multiple modes, one of which has a corresponding value equal to or less than the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of a subsequent specific notification, any mode corresponding to a value exceeding the specified information at that time is excluded from selection from among the multiple modes prepared in advance as options. This allows for a simple and convenient mode selection within the range of the specified information, making it a preferred mode for achieving the configuration of feature F5 above.

Feature F7. A gaming machine described in any of Features F1 to F6, wherein the specific notification execution means includes a restriction means (a function for executing the processing of step S4804 by the display control device 81) that restricts the execution of the specific notification based on the specific information if the specific information is smaller than a predetermined specific value (5 points).

With the above configuration, the execution of specific notifications is limited if sufficient predetermined information is not secured, so the frequency of specific notifications does not increase unnecessarily, and it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while effectively suppressing deviation from the actual accumulated amount of bonus numerical values.

Note that the "predetermined specific value" in this feature can also be expressed as "a specific value that is equal to or greater than the minimum value required to execute the specific notification."

Feature F8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F7, wherein the specification means includes an execution decision means that determines whether or not to execute the subsequent specific notification based on the predetermined information, and if the execution decision means determines to execute the subsequent specific notification, the subsequent specific notification is executed.

In the above configuration, whether or not to execute a subsequent specific notification is determined based on the specified information, so the likelihood of that notification being executed can be changed depending on the magnitude of the specified information. For example, if the configuration is such that the larger the specified information, the higher the probability of the specific notification being executed, the amount of specified information remaining unused in the execution of the specific notification can be reduced, making it possible to use the specified information more efficiently.

Feature F9. The gaming machine described in Feature F8, wherein the execution decision means is configured to more easily decide to execute the later specific notification when the predetermined information is a first value (20 points) than when the predetermined information is a second value (10 points).

With the above configuration, the larger the specified information, the more actively the specific notification is executed, which reduces the amount of specified information that remains unused for the execution of the specific notification, enabling the specified information to be used efficiently.

Feature F10: If a bonus value is not assigned by the value assigning means after the update by the update means, the specific value information updated by the update means is set as the predetermined information;
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F9, characterized in that if a bonus number is assigned by the number assignment means after the update is performed by the update means, the result of adding the assigned bonus number to the specific numerical information updated by the update means is set as the specified information.

In the above configuration, if a value corresponding to a specific notification that has already been executed is subtracted to update the specific numerical information, and then a new bonus numerical value is assigned by the numerical value assigning means, the assigned bonus numerical value is added to the updated specific numerical information to derive the specified information. In this case, the specified information becomes larger than if there was no such addition, which ultimately makes it easier for subsequent specific notifications to be executed, thereby making it possible to suitably increase the frequency of specific notifications.

Feature F11. A gaming machine described in any of Features F1 to F10, wherein the derivation means derives the specific numerical information based on the bonus numerical value or its total value awarded by the numerical value awarding means and a predetermined numerical value (sub-points, predetermined coefficient) separate from the bonus numerical value or its total value.

In the above configuration, because bonus numbers are used to derive the specific numerical information, the specific numerical information can be derived while maintaining a correlation with the bonus numbers actually awarded. Therefore, even though the configuration uses specific numerical information different from the bonus numbers, it is possible to prevent the content of the specific notification from deviating significantly from the actual bonus numbers, making it possible to align or approximate the total value predicted by the player from the specific notification with the actual accumulated amount (total value) of bonus numbers.

Feature F12. The gaming machine described in Feature F11, wherein the derivation means derives the specific numerical information by adding the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof granted by the numerical value granting means to the predetermined numerical value.

In the above configuration, the specific numerical information is obtained by adding the bonus numerical value to the bonus value to be awarded and a predetermined numerical value, so the specific notification can be executed assuming a numerical value greater than the bonus numerical value actually awarded. Therefore, by combining this feature with the configuration of feature F1 above, it is possible to further appropriately increase the frequency of specific notifications. Furthermore, in this configuration, the specific numerical information is obtained by the addition, so even if there is no bonus numerical value, it is possible to ensure that the specific numerical information has a value of at least the predetermined numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to execute the specific notification regardless of whether a bonus numerical value has actually been awarded at the time of award trigger, making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of specific notifications.

Feature F13: The specific notification is a notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus value,
A second specific notification execution means (a function of executing a total suggestion effect process by the display control device 81) is provided to control so that a second specific notification (total suggestion effect) corresponding to the total value of the bonus numerical value is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means,
The gaming machine described in feature F12 is characterized in that the second specific notification execution means is equipped with a means (a function to execute the processing of step S4606, steps S4907 to S4911 by the display control device 81) for controlling the execution of the second specific notification based on the bonus number or its total value awarded by the number awarding means and the sum of the bonus number and the predetermined number (total points).

In the above configuration, both the specific numerical information that serves as the premise for the specific notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus numerical value and the addition result that serves as the premise for the second specific notification corresponding to the total bonus numerical value are obtained from the sum of the bonus numerical value awarded by the numerical value awarding means and a predetermined numerical value. In other words, because the numerical values that serve as the premise for each of the above notifications are aligned, the total bonus numerical value that the player predicts from the specific notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus numerical value can be made to match or approach the total bonus numerical value that the player predicts from the second specific notification.

Feature F14. A gaming machine described in any of Features F1 to F13, wherein the derivation means includes a determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81) that determines the value of the specific numerical information (the number of points that can be produced) based on the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means.

In the above configuration, the value of the specific numerical information is determined according to the bonus numerical value, so the magnitude of the bonus numerical value can be linked to the magnitude of the specific numerical information. For example, if the bonus numerical value awarded is large, the bonus numerical information can be increased accordingly. In this case, the larger the bonus numerical value awarded, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount awarded (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notification. This makes it possible to prevent a discrepancy between the player's impression from the specific notification and the actual accumulated bonus numerical value.

This feature can also be expressed as "the derivation means derives the specific numerical information based on the bonus numerical values or their total value assigned by the numerical value assigning means and a predetermined numerical value (sub-points) different from the bonus numerical values or their total value, and is characterized by including a determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81) that determines one numerical value from multiple numerical values (0 points, 10 points, etc.) as the predetermined numerical value based on the bonus numerical values assigned by the numerical value assigning means or their total value."

Feature F15. A gaming machine described in any of Features F1 to F14, wherein the derivation means derives or more easily derives the specific numerical information of a larger value when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means is a first predetermined value (20 points) than when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means is a second predetermined value (10 points) that is smaller than the first predetermined value.

With the above configuration, the larger the bonus value awarded, the larger (or more likely) the specific numerical information becomes, and the frequency of specific notifications and the amount awarded (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notifications increase, preventing a discrepancy between the player's impression from the specific notifications and the actual accumulated bonus value. In other words, the larger the amount awarded or accumulated, the stronger the player's sense of anticipation is aroused, so the frequency of specific notifications is not simply increased unnecessarily, but rather it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while reflecting the actual amount awarded or accumulated.

This feature can also be expressed as "a gaming machine according to feature F14, wherein the determination means determines or is more likely to determine a larger value as the predetermined value when the bonus value or the total value thereof assigned by the value assigning means is a first predetermined value, compared to when the bonus value or the total value thereof assigned by the value assigning means is a second predetermined value that is smaller than the first predetermined value."

Feature F16. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (a win to move to the advantageous zone) is met, and is ended when a predetermined end condition (the advantageous zone game count AG reaches the upper limit game count, the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY reaches the upper limit increase number, the AT mode is ended) is met,
the bonus granting means is capable of granting a predetermined bonus when a total value of the bonus numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the bonus corresponding value,
a first derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4601 to S4603 by the display control device 81) for deriving a predetermined numerical value (sub-points or coefficient) separately from the bonus numerical value granted by the numerical value granting means or the total value thereof;
a second derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4604 to S4606 by the display control device 81) for deriving the specific numerical information based on the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof assigned by the numerical value assigning means and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F15, characterized in that the first derivation means is equipped with a means for deriving the specified numerical value in accordance with the start timing of the specific state (a function for executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 at the start of the advantageous zone).

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether the bonus value awarded in one specific state has reached the bonus value corresponding to the award, and a specific bonus is awarded depending on the result. With this configuration, the specific value is derived in accordance with the start timing of the specific state or the first bonus trigger in the specific state, making it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications from the beginning of the specific state. This makes it possible to progress through play in the specific state while appropriately increasing the player's anticipation that the bonus value will reach the bonus value corresponding to the award.

Feature F17. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a second control means (display control device 81) for controlling the game presentation to be executed in accordance with the processing result of the first control means;
the first control means includes the numerical value granting means and the bonus granting means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, wherein the second control means is provided with the specific notification execution means.

In the above configuration, the derivation of specific numerical information, the update of specific numerical information by subtracting the value corresponding to an executed specific notification, and the execution control of specific notifications based on predetermined information including the updated specific numerical information are all performed by the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while minimizing the processing load on the first control means. Given that first control means generally have stronger anti-fraud measures than second control means, this configuration delegates to the first control means processing related to the player's interests, such as general control for progressing the game, the awarding of bonus values, and control of the awarding of bonuses when the bonus values reach the corresponding bonus values. However, this configuration is expected to increase the processing load on the first control means. In such a situation, if the first control means were to perform all processing, including the derivation of specific numerical information, there is a concern that processing lags and other issues could occur, hindering gameplay. However, this feature prevents such inconveniences from occurring.

Furthermore, this feature avoids complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplifies the control program. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while suppressing increases in program capacity, making it an ideal configuration for gaming machines with limited memory capacity that can be installed in the first control means.

Feature F18. The specific notification execution means includes first means (a function of executing an award suggestion effect in response to a point award trigger by the display control device 81) that can execute the specific notification when a bonus value is awarded by the value awarding means,
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F17, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a second means (a function to execute an award suggestion display in a situation where there is no point award trigger by the display control device 81) that can execute the subsequent specific notification based on the specified information when a specified trigger (when a continuous display for pseudo-premonition ends, or when transitioning to the first AT mode) is established, regardless of whether the award trigger has been established or whether a bonus number has been awarded by the number awarding means.

The above configuration includes not only a first means for issuing a specific notification when a bonus value is awarded by the value awarding means, but also a second means for issuing a specific notification regardless of whether the awarding trigger is met or whether a bonus value has been awarded. This allows the frequency of specific notifications to be increased without increasing the number of opportunities for bonus values to be awarded. This makes it possible to effectively stimulate the desire to continue playing by increasing the frequency of notifications, while preventing the appeal of playing games using bonus values from being diminished.

Feature F19. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a second control means (display control device 81) for controlling the game presentation to be executed in accordance with the processing result of the first control means;
the first control means includes the numerical value granting means and the bonus granting means,
the second control means includes the specific notification execution means,
The gaming machine described in feature F18 is configured so that the predetermined trigger is established based on a predetermined process (execution control of a series of pseudo-premonition effects) being performed in the second control means.

In the above configuration, the predetermined trigger that triggers the execution of a special notification by the second identification means is established by the execution of a predetermined process by the second control means, so the contribution of the first control means to controlling the execution of a special notification by the second identification means (a special notification in a situation where the award trigger has not been established or a bonus value has not been awarded) can be kept low. This feature also makes it possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of special notifications while suppressing an increase in program capacity, making this a suitable configuration for gaming machines with limited memory capacity that can be installed in the first control means.

Feature F20. A specific determination means (a function for executing the AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination of whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
A specific effect execution means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) that controls the execution of a specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination after the specific determination means has made the specific determination;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature F18 or feature F19, characterized in that the specified trigger is configured to be established based on the specific effect (sequential effect for pseudo-premonition) being performed or having been performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the specific judgment by the specific judgment means being a non-specific result that does not correspond to causing the specific event.

In the above configuration, a special effect is executed to inform the player of the determination result of the special determination means. If the determination result of the special determination means is a special result, a special event advantageous to the player will occur, and therefore, when the special effect is executed, it is expected that the player will watch the effect with great interest. In this configuration, this feature is configured to execute a special notification by the second determination means in conjunction with the execution of the special effect, making it easier to draw attention to the special notification and effectively increasing interest in the bonus values.

In addition, this feature is configured so that the second specifying means issues a specific notification in response to a specific effect that corresponds to a non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, a configuration in which the second specifying means issues a specific notification in response to a specific effect that corresponds to a specific result is also expected to increase attention to the specific notification. However, with this configuration, unless the mode and execution timing of the specific notification are properly adjusted taking into account its relationship with the specific event that occurs after the specific effect, there is a concern that the effect of the specific notification may not be properly achieved, or the boundary with the specific event may become unclear, causing confusion among players. In this regard, this feature eliminates the need for such tedious adjustments, making it possible to increase attention to the specific notification while minimizing the increase in the effort required for effect design.

Feature F21. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as game states,
the bonus granting means is capable of granting a predetermined bonus when a total value of the bonus numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the bonus corresponding value,
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F20, characterized in that it is equipped with an initialization means (a function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of interval display by the main control unit 101) that initializes the total value of the bonus numerical values when the specific state ends or is ended.

In the above configuration, the bonus value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, compared to when bonus values are accumulated throughout the amusement hall's business hours, the period during which a player can increase the bonus value is shortened, and as a result, the bonus value is likely to be reached less frequently. This reduces the player's interest in accumulating bonus values, making it difficult to increase the player's motivation to continue playing by playing with the aim of reaching the bonus value. In such a situation, applying any of the above features F1 to F20 can increase the frequency of specific notifications during the specific state, providing a configuration that is particularly beneficial for gaming machines in which bonus values are initialized when the specific state ends.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)" can also be expressed as "reduction means for reducing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)."

Feature F22. A plurality of game states are set, including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the specific event does not occur;
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
When a predetermined transition condition is met, a specific state transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the specific state;
When a predetermined termination condition is met, a specific state termination means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) for terminating the specific state;
an initialization means (a function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical value when the specific state ends or has ended;
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F21, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events advantageous to the player and the awarding of bonus values are limited to specific states, emphasizing specific states as situations in which the fun of gaming can be enjoyed. Furthermore, the bonus values are initialized when the specific state ends, making it more difficult to accumulate bonus values compared to when bonus values are accumulated over the course of one business day at the gaming parlor. In such a configuration, by applying any of the above features F1 to F21, it is possible to optimally utilize the above effects of each feature.

Feature F23. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of gaming media corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F22, characterized in that it is provided with:

By applying any of the features F1 to F22 to a slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to optimally achieve the effects of each feature.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features F1 to F23: features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, and features H1 to H6. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A numerical value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can grant a special value (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity),
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value of the bonus numerical values (total points) awarded by the numerical value awarding means reaches a bonus corresponding value;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing point processing and point effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (award suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus value;
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means
A first means (a function of executing a point suggestion effect when a point is awarded by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification when a bonus value is awarded by the bonus value awarding means;
a second means (a function of executing a point suggestion effect in a situation where the display control device 81 is not triggered to award points) that can execute the specific notification based on a predetermined trigger (when the continuous effect for pseudo-premonition ends or when the mode shifts to the first AT mode) regardless of whether the award trigger is established or whether the bonus value is awarded by the value awarding means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, bonus numbers are awarded when a bonus trigger is met, and when the total value reaches the bonus corresponding value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. In addition, a specific notification is issued in response to the awarding of a bonus number, allowing the player to recognize that a bonus number has been awarded through each specific notification, and to recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus corresponding value. This stimulates the player's desire to further increase the bonus number, encouraging them to continue playing.

In this configuration, in order to strongly stimulate the desire to continue playing, it is preferable to increase the number of opportunities to award bonus values, increase the frequency of specific notifications, and heighten the player's interest in the bonus values. However, on the other hand, if there are more opportunities to award bonus values, the difficulty of reaching the bonus value corresponding to the bonus value will decrease, which may result in the bonus being forced to be kept low and reducing its appeal to players. In other words, there is a concern that increasing the frequency of specific notifications may actually diminish the appeal of games using bonus values.

In this regard, this feature includes not only a first means for issuing a specific notification when a bonus value is awarded by the value awarding means, but also a second means for issuing a specific notification regardless of whether the awarding trigger is met or whether a bonus value has been awarded. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications without increasing the number of opportunities for bonus values to be awarded. This makes it possible to effectively stimulate the desire to continue playing by increasing the frequency of notifications, while preventing the appeal of playing games using bonus values from being diminished.

Feature G2. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a second control means (display control device 81) for controlling the game presentation to be executed in accordance with the processing result of the first control means;
the first control means includes the numerical value granting means and the bonus granting means,
the second control means includes the specific notification execution means,
A gaming machine described in feature G1, characterized in that the predetermined trigger is established based on a predetermined processing (execution control of a series of pseudo-premonition effects) being performed in the second control means.

In the above configuration, the predetermined trigger that triggers the execution of a specific notification by the second means is established by the execution of a predetermined process by the second control means. This reduces the contribution of the first control means to the execution control of the specific notification by the second means (specific notifications when the award trigger has not been established or when a bonus value has not been awarded). This reduces the processing load on the first control means while increasing the frequency of specific notifications. Given that first control means generally have stronger anti-fraud measures than second control means, this configuration delegates to the first control means processing related to the player's benefit, such as general control for progressing the game, awarding bonus values, and controlling the awarding of bonuses when the bonus value reaches a bonus value. However, this configuration is expected to increase the processing load on the first control means. In such a situation, if the first control means were to be responsible for the execution control of the specific notification by the second means, there is a concern that processing lags and other issues could occur, hindering gameplay. However, this feature prevents such inconveniences from occurring.

Furthermore, this feature avoids complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplifies the control program. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while suppressing increases in program capacity, making it an ideal configuration for gaming machines with limited memory capacity that can be installed in the first control means.

Feature G3. A specific determination means (a function for executing the AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination of whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
After the specific determination is made by the specific determination means, a specific effect execution means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) controls so that a specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination is executed;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the specified trigger is configured to be established based on the specific effect (sequential effect for pseudo-premonition) being performed or having been performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the specific judgment by the specific judgment means being a non-specific result that does not correspond to causing the specific event.

In the above configuration, a special effect is executed to inform the player of the determination result of the special determination means. If the determination result of the special determination means is a special result, a special event advantageous to the player will occur, and therefore, when the special effect is executed, it is expected that the player will watch the effect with great interest. In this configuration, this feature is configured to execute a special notification by the second means in conjunction with the execution of the special effect, making it easier to draw attention to the special notification and effectively increasing interest in the bonus values.

In addition, this feature is configured so that the second means issues a specific notification in response to a specific effect that corresponds to a non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, a configuration in which the second means issues a specific notification in response to a specific effect that corresponds to a specific result can be expected to increase attention to the specific notification, but with this configuration, unless the mode and execution timing of the specific notification are properly adjusted taking into account its relationship with the specific event that occurs after the specific effect, there is a concern that the effect of the specific notification may not be properly achieved, or the boundary with the specific event may become unclear, causing confusion among players. In this regard, this feature eliminates the need for such tedious adjustments, making it possible to increase attention to the specific notification while minimizing the increase in the effort required for effect design.

When this feature is applied to feature G2, the configuration may be such that "the first control means further includes the specific determination means and the specific event means, and the second control means further includes the specific performance execution means."

Feature G4: A plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) are provided in which symbols (designs) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the symbols is stopped when a stop condition is met,
The gaming machine described in feature G3 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over a period of time during which the variable display of the image is started in multiple variable display areas, and then the variable display of the image is stopped in multiple variable display areas, over a period of time during which a game is played multiple times.

With the above configuration, the special effect is performed over multiple games, making it more noticeable than other effects. With this configuration, a special notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus value is executed when a special effect corresponding to a non-specified result is performed or when that effect is confirmed, making it easier for players to focus on the special notification and effectively increasing interest in the bonus value.

This feature may further include the configuration that "the second means executes the special notification in the final game of the special effect or the game following the final game." In this case, the player can see the special notification after seeing the conclusion of the special effect, making it possible to prevent confusion between the special effect and the special notification.

Feature G5. A game is played in which a plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) are provided in which pictures (symbols) are variably displayed when a start condition is met and the variable display of the pictures is stopped when a stop condition is met, and the variable display of the pictures is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and then the variable display of the pictures is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas;
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the predetermined trigger is established when the number of games played since a predetermined timing (such as the previous game in which the award suggestion effect was executed, the game in which the award trigger was established, the start game of the advantageous zone, or when the power was turned on) reaches a predetermined number.

In the above configuration, for example, by setting the specified timing to the execution game of the previous specific notification, the interval between specific notifications becomes longer, preventing the player from losing interest in the bonus numbers.

Feature G6. A gaming machine described in any of Features G1 to G5, wherein the specific notification mode executed by the first means and the specific notification mode executed by the second means are configured so that the player cannot distinguish between the specific notifications.

With the above configuration, it is impossible to distinguish between the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means, so when the specific notification by the second means is executed, the player can be led to believe that a bonus value has been awarded. This makes it possible to heighten the player's interest in the bonus value and effectively stimulate their desire to continue playing, even when a bonus value has not actually been awarded or the opportunity to award a bonus value has not been met.

Feature G7: The specific notification execution means
A derivation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81) for deriving specific numerical information (performance possible points);
When the specific notification is made by the first means or when it is made, an update means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4805 to S4811 by the display control device 81) for subtracting the value (the already-produced points) corresponding to the specific notification from the specific numerical information derived by the derivation means to update the specific numerical information;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the second means executes the specific notification based on predetermined information including specific numerical information updated by the update means (the updated performance possible points if no new award points have been awarded after updating the performance possible points by subtraction, or the added value obtained by adding the new award points to the updated performance possible points if new award points have been awarded).

In the above configuration, when a specific specific notification is issued or has been issued, the value corresponding to that specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information, and the remainder is used as a numerical value for executing a subsequent specific notification. For example, in a configuration in which a specific notification is issued based on a single bonus numerical value each time a bonus numerical value is awarded, if a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the current bonus numerical value is issued, the unused value will end without being used thereafter. In contrast, with this feature, if a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the specific numerical information is issued, the unused value is left as a numerical value for executing a subsequent specific notification, preventing it from being wasted. In other words, since the specific numerical information not used in a previous specific notification can be effectively used to execute a subsequent specific notification, it is possible to efficiently execute specific notifications based on the derived specific numerical information. This increases the frequency of specific notifications and effectively increases player interest in bonus numerical values.

Feature G8. A plurality of modes including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) are set as the mode of the specific notification,
The gaming machine described in feature G7 is configured so that, as the value corresponding to the specific notification, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and a second predetermined value (10 points) different from the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second aspect.

In the above configuration, multiple modes are provided for the specific notification, making it possible to suggest the amount of bonus numerical value to be awarded depending on which mode of specific notification is executed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (the value subtracted from the specific numerical information) were set to a uniform magnitude regardless of the notification mode, the mode of the subsequent specific notification, which is executed and controlled based on the predetermined information, would be selected regardless of the mode of the previous specific notification. As a result, there would be a large discrepancy between the total bonus numerical value predicted by the player from each specific notification and the actual accumulated amount of bonus numerical value (total value), raising concerns that the player's trust in the specific notifications would decrease.

In this regard, with this feature, a value corresponding to the mode of the previous specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information, allowing the mode of the subsequent specific notification to be selected in relation to the mode of the previous specific notification. This makes it possible to align or bring closer the total bonus numerical value predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual accumulated amount of bonus numerical value. In other words, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while preventing a decline in the player's trust in the specific notifications.

This feature can also be expressed as "multiple modes are set for the specific notification, including a first mode (small bubble effect) and a second mode (medium bubble effect) that leads the player to expect that a bonus value greater than that of the first mode has been awarded; and the value corresponding to the specific notification is configured such that a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and a second predetermined value (10 points) greater than the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second mode."

Feature G9. The second means includes a mode determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4805 to S4807 by the display control device 81) that determines the mode of the specific notification, and is configured to execute the specific notification in the mode determined by the mode determination means;
The gaming machine described in feature G8 is characterized in that the mode determination means is equipped with a means for determining the mode of the specific notification within the range of the specified information.

In the above configuration, when the execution of a subsequent specific notification is controlled based on predetermined information, the mode of that specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. This prevents the mode of the subsequent specific notification from being selected in a way that deviates from the actual amount of accumulated bonus values, making it possible to align or bring closer the total bonus values predicted by the player from each specific notification to the actual amount of accumulated bonus values.

Feature G10. The gaming machine described in Feature G9, wherein the mode determination means, when executing the subsequent specific notification, determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from among multiple modes, the mode for which the corresponding value is equal to or less than the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of a subsequent specific notification, any mode corresponding to a value exceeding the specified information at that time among multiple modes prepared in advance as options is excluded from selection. This allows mode selection within the range of the specified information to be performed efficiently and simply, making it a preferred mode for realizing the configuration of feature G9 above.

Feature G11. A gaming machine described in any of Features G7 to G10, wherein the specific notification execution means includes a restriction means (a function for executing the processing of step S4804 by the display control device 81) that restricts the execution of the specific notification by the second means when the specified information is smaller than a predetermined specific value (5 points).

With the above configuration, the execution of specific notifications is limited if sufficient predetermined information is not secured, so the frequency of specific notifications does not increase unnecessarily, and it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while effectively suppressing deviation from the actual accumulated amount of bonus numerical values.

Note that the "predetermined specific value" in this feature can also be expressed as "a specific value that is equal to or greater than the minimum value required to execute the specific notification."

Feature G12: If a special value is not assigned by the value assigning means after the update by the update means, the specific value information updated by the update means is set as the predetermined information;
A gaming machine described in any of features G7 to G11, characterized in that if a bonus number is assigned by the number assignment means after the update is performed by the update means, the result of adding the assigned bonus number to the specific numerical information updated by the update means is set as the specified information.

In the above configuration, if a value corresponding to a specific notification that has already been executed is subtracted to update the specific numerical information, and then a new bonus numerical value is assigned by the numerical value assigning means, the assigned bonus numerical value is added to the updated specific numerical information to derive the specified information. In this case, the specified information becomes larger than if there was no such addition, which ultimately makes it easier for subsequent specific notifications to be executed, thereby making it possible to suitably increase the frequency of specific notifications.

Feature G13. A gaming machine described in any of Features G7 to G12, wherein the derivation means derives the specific numerical information by adding the bonus numerical value or its total value awarded by the numerical value awarding means to a predetermined numerical value (sub-points, predetermined coefficient) separate from the bonus numerical value or its total value.

In the above configuration, specific numerical information is obtained by adding the bonus value to a predetermined value, so specific notifications can be issued based on a value greater than the bonus value actually granted. Therefore, by combining this feature with the configuration of feature G1 above, it is possible to further increase the frequency with which specific notifications are issued.

In this case, because bonus numbers are used to derive the specific numerical information, the specific numerical information can be derived while maintaining a correlation with the bonus numbers actually awarded. Therefore, even though the system uses specific numerical information that is different from the bonus numbers, it is possible to prevent the content of the specific notification from diverging significantly from the actual bonus numbers, making it possible to align or approximate the total value predicted by the player from the specific notification with the actual accumulated amount (total value) of bonus numbers.

In addition, because the specific numerical information is obtained by adding the bonus numerical value to the predetermined value, even if there is no bonus numerical value, it is possible to ensure that at least the predetermined value is available as specific numerical information. This makes it possible to issue a specific notification regardless of whether a bonus numerical value has actually been awarded at the time of awarding, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase the frequency of specific notifications.

Feature G14. A second specific notification execution means (a function of executing a total suggestion effect process by the display control device 81) is provided, which controls so that a second specific notification (total suggestion effect) corresponding to the total value of the bonus numerical value is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means,
The gaming machine described in feature G13 is characterized in that the second specific notification execution means is equipped with a means (a function to execute the processing of step S4606, steps S4907 to S4911 by the display control device 81) for controlling the execution of the second specific notification based on the bonus number or its total value awarded by the number awarding means and the sum of the bonus number and the predetermined number (total points).

In the above configuration, both the specific numerical information that serves as the premise for the specific notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus numerical value and the addition result that serves as the premise for the second specific notification corresponding to the total bonus numerical value are obtained from the sum of the bonus numerical value awarded by the numerical value awarding means and a predetermined numerical value. In other words, because the numerical values that serve as the premise for each of the above notifications are aligned, the total bonus numerical value that the player predicts from the specific notification corresponding to the awarding of a bonus numerical value can be made to match or approach the total bonus numerical value that the player predicts from the second specific notification.

Feature G15. A gaming machine described in any of Features G7 to G14, wherein the derivation means includes a determination means (a function that executes the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81) that determines the value of the specific numerical information (the number of points that can be produced) based on the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means.

In the above configuration, the value of the specific numerical information is determined according to the bonus numerical value, so the magnitude of the bonus numerical value can be linked to the magnitude of the specific numerical information. For example, if the bonus numerical value awarded is large, the bonus numerical information can be increased accordingly. In this case, the larger the bonus numerical value awarded, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount awarded (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notification. This makes it possible to prevent a discrepancy between the player's impression from the specific notification and the actual accumulated bonus numerical value.

This feature can also be expressed as "the derivation means derives the specific numerical information based on the bonus numerical values or their total value assigned by the numerical value assigning means and a predetermined numerical value (sub-points) different from the bonus numerical values or their total value, and is characterized by including a determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the display control device 81) that determines one numerical value from multiple numerical values (0 points, 10 points, etc.) as the predetermined numerical value based on the bonus numerical values assigned by the numerical value assigning means or their total value."

Feature G16. A gaming machine described in any of Features G7 to G15, wherein the derivation means derives or more easily derives the specific numerical information of a larger value when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means is a first predetermined value (20 points) than when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof awarded by the numerical value awarding means is a second predetermined value (10 points) that is smaller than the first predetermined value.

With the above configuration, the larger the bonus value awarded, the larger (or more likely) the specific numerical information becomes, and the frequency of specific notifications and the amount awarded (accumulated amount) indicated by the specific notifications increase, preventing a discrepancy between the player's impression from the specific notifications and the actual accumulated bonus value. In other words, the larger the amount awarded or accumulated, the stronger the player's sense of anticipation is aroused, so the frequency of specific notifications is not simply increased unnecessarily, but rather it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notifications while reflecting the actual amount awarded or accumulated.

This feature can also be expressed as "a gaming machine according to feature G15, characterized in that when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof assigned by the numerical value assigning means is a first predetermined value, the determination means determines or is more likely to determine a larger numerical value as the predetermined numerical value than when the bonus numerical value or the total value thereof assigned by the numerical value assigning means is a second predetermined value smaller than the first predetermined value."

Feature G17. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) are set as the game state,
the bonus granting means is capable of granting a predetermined bonus when a total value of the bonus numerical values granted by the numerical value granting means in the specific state becomes the bonus corresponding value,
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G16, characterized in that it is equipped with an initialization means (a function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of interval display by the main control unit 101) that initializes the total value of the bonus numerical values when the specific state ends or has ended.

In the above configuration, the bonus value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, compared to when bonus values are accumulated throughout the gaming hall's business hours, the period during which a player can increase the bonus value is shorter, and as a result, the bonus value tends to be reached less frequently. This reduces the player's interest in accumulating bonus values, making it difficult to increase the player's motivation to continue playing by playing with the aim of reaching the bonus value. In such a situation, by applying any of the configurations of features G1 to G16 above, it is possible to effectively increase the player's motivation to continue playing, even when the bonus value total is initialized when the specific state ends.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)" can also be expressed as "reduction means for reducing the total value of the bonus numerical values (a function for executing the processing of step S2109 in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101)."

Feature G18. As a gaming state, a plurality of gaming states are set, including at least a specific state (advantageous zone) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the specific event does not occur,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event in the specific state;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode and a process corresponding to the winning result) for causing the specific event;
When a predetermined transition condition is met, a specific state transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main control device 101) that transitions the game state to the specific state;
When a predetermined termination condition is met, a specific state termination means (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) for terminating the specific state;
an initialization means (a function for executing the process of step S2109 in the second section display process by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the bonus numerical value when the specific state ends or has ended;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G17, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the occurrence of specific events advantageous to the player and the awarding of bonus values are limited to specific states, emphasizing specific states as situations in which the fun of gaming can be enjoyed. Furthermore, the bonus values are initialized when the specific state ends, making it more difficult to accumulate bonus values compared to when bonus values are accumulated over the course of one business day at the gaming parlor. In this configuration, by applying any of the above features G1 to G17, it is possible to optimally utilize the above effects of each feature.

Feature G19. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operating means;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the second operating means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of gaming media corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G18, characterized by comprising:

By applying any of the features G1 to G18 to a slot machine with the above configuration, it is possible to optimally utilize the effects of each feature.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features G1 to G19: features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, and features H1 to H6. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A numerical value granting means (a function of executing a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101) that can grant a special value (points) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity),
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can award a predetermined bonus (transition to the second AT mode) to a player when the total value of the bonus numerical values (total points) awarded by the numerical value awarding means reaches a bonus corresponding value;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing point processing and point effect execution processing by the display control device 81) that controls a specific notification (award suggestion effect) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as a notification regarding a bonus value;
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means
As the specific notification, a first means (a function of executing a grant suggestion display process by the display control device 81) for executing a first specific notification (a grant suggestion display) as a notification corresponding to the bonus value granted by the value granting means;
As the specific notification, a second means (a function of executing a total suggestion effect process by the display control device 81) for executing a second specific notification (a total suggestion effect) as a notification corresponding to the total value of the bonus numerical value;
Equipped with
A plurality of modes (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set as the mode of the first specific notification,
The second means is equipped with a mode determination means (a function of executing processing of steps S8201, S8202, S8305, S8306, and steps S8308 to S8310 by the display control device 81) that determines the mode of the second specific notification based on the mode of the first specific notification that was previously executed, and is a gaming machine characterized in that it executes the second specific notification in the mode determined by the mode determination means.

In this configuration, bonus values are awarded when a bonus trigger is triggered, and when the total value reaches the bonus value, the player is awarded a specified bonus. Additionally, multiple modes of the first specific notification corresponding to the award of bonus values are provided, so the amount of bonus value to be awarded can be suggested depending on which mode of the first specific notification is issued. Furthermore, separate from the first specific notification, a second specific notification is issued as a notification corresponding to the total value of the bonus values awarded. By issuing both of these notifications, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the bonus value, stimulating their desire to further increase the bonus value. In other words, this can encourage continued play.

In such a configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the first specific notification is made after an execution lottery, the first specific notification may not be made even if a bonus value has actually been awarded. As a result, a situation may arise in which the total value predicted by the player from the first specific notification differs significantly from the total value predicted from the second specific notification, such as when the first specific notification indicates that not much bonus value has accumulated, but the second specific notification suggests a large total value. In this case, the player may not know which specific notification to trust, and may become confused. In this regard, this feature determines the type of the second specific notification based on the type of the first specific notification that was executed earlier, i.e., the performance of the first specific notification. Therefore, the total value suggested by the second specific notification can be made consistent with or close to the predicted total value from the first specific notification, making it possible to effectively reduce player confusion.

Feature H2. A value (effected points) is set for each aspect of the first specific notification,
The specific notification execution means includes a derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S8203 and S8204 by the display control device 81) for deriving a cumulative sum (total points) of values corresponding to the manner of the first specific notification previously executed,
A gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the mode determination means determines the mode of the second specific notification based on the cumulative added value derived by the derivation means.

In the above configuration, a unique value is set for each mode of the first specific notification, and by deriving the cumulative sum of values corresponding to the mode of the first specific notification that was previously executed, it is possible to easily grasp the results of the first specific notification that was executed. Therefore, by determining the mode of the second specific notification based on this cumulative sum, it is possible to preferably execute the second specific notification based on the results of the first specific notification.

Feature H3: When a predetermined condition (the end of the advantageous zone) is met, an initialization means (a function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the second zone display processing by the main control device 101) is provided to initialize the total value of the bonus numerical value,
A gaming machine described in feature H1 or feature H2, characterized in that the mode determination means determines the mode of the second specific notification based on the mode of the first specific notification that is performed after initialization by the initialization means and that was previously executed.

In the above configuration, the second specific notification is executed based on the results of the first specific notification since the total value of the bonus numerical values was initialized. In this case, the results of the first specific notification before initialization are no longer referenced when determining the mode of the second specific notification, preventing the second specific notification from displaying a value greater than the actual total value of the bonus numerical values, making it possible to execute a second specific notification that corresponds to the actual total value of the bonus numerical values.

When this feature is applied to feature H2 above, the device may further include a configuration in which "second initialization means is provided for initializing the cumulative added value derived by the derivation means when the total bonus numerical value is initialized by the initialization means."

Feature H4. The second means is
a first mode determination means serving as the mode determination means;
In a predetermined case (when the total value of the awarded points is equal to or greater than the bonus value), a second mode determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8304 and S8307 by the display control device 81) determines the mode of the second specific notification regardless of the mode of the first specific notification that was previously executed;
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that it is provided with:

For example, if a large bonus value is awarded in a single award trigger, the total bonus value will increase suddenly. In this case, the results of the first specific notification will tend to be insufficient compared to the increased total bonus value, raising concerns that only a small value will be announced in the second specific notification. In this regard, with this configuration, depending on the situation, the mode of the second specific notification can be determined regardless of the results of the first specific notification, making it possible to announce a large value in the second specific notification even if the results of the first specific notification are poor. This makes it possible to appropriately deal with cases such as a sudden increase in the total bonus value.

Feature H5. A gaming machine according to Feature H4, wherein the second mode determination means determines the mode of the second specific notification when the total value of the bonus numerical values or a value corresponding to that total value (the value obtained by adding the lottery-drawn sub-points to the total value of the awarded points) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (the bonus award value, the value obtained by adding the lottery-drawn sub-points to the bonus award value), regardless of the mode of the first specific notification that was previously executed.

In the above configuration, if the total value of the bonus numerical values reaches or exceeds a predetermined value, the manner of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the results of the first specific notification. Therefore, if a large bonus numerical value is awarded in a single award trigger, causing a sudden increase in the total value of the bonus numerical values, it becomes possible to notify a larger value through the second specific notification.

Feature H6. A gaming machine as described in Feature H5, wherein the second mode determination means determines the mode of the second specific notification regardless of the mode of the previously executed first specific notification when the total value of the bonus numerical values becomes equal to or greater than the bonus corresponding value, or when the value corresponding to the total value becomes equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the bonus corresponding value (the value obtained by adding the lottery sub-points to the bonus value).

In the above configuration, when the total value of the bonus numerical values becomes equal to or exceeds the award corresponding value, the manner of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the performance of the first specific notification. This makes it possible to issue a notification corresponding to the bonus value becoming equal to or exceeds the award corresponding value even in situations where the performance of the first specific notification is insufficient.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A23, Features B1 to B18, Features C1 to C16, Features D1 to D12, Features E1 to E21, Features F1 to F23, Features G1 to G19, and Features H1 to H6 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A through Feature Group H described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A through H individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a designated gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and which awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a designated passage section of each of the gaming components. When applying each of the above features to a pachinko gaming machine, a game (1 game) related to each feature can be considered a variation (1 variation).

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as a final stop; the pattern change begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern change is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving device that performs a loading process to take gaming balls from the ball receiving device, and a payout device that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving device; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when gaming balls are inserted by the loading device.

10...slot machine, 32...reels, 41...start lever, 42-44...stop switches, 65...auxiliary display unit, 81...display control device, 101...main control device.

Claims (1)

an awarding means for awarding a bonus value based on a predetermined awarding trigger ;
specific control execution means for executing specific control according to the total value of the given bonus numerical values;
a specific notification execution means for controlling a specific notification to be executed by a predetermined notification means as a notification regarding the bonus value;
Equipped with
As the specific notification, a first specific notification as a notification corresponding to the bonus numerical value awarded based on the establishment of the award trigger, and a second specific notification as a notification corresponding to the total value of the bonus numerical value can be executed,
When the bonus value is awarded, the first specific notification may be executed or may not be executed.
The first specific notification has a plurality of modes,
A mode determining means for determining a mode of the second specific notification in correspondence with the mode of the first specific notification that has been executed;
a first means for executing the second specific notification in the mode determined by the mode determining means, thereby executing the second specific notification that does not correspond to an actual total value of the bonus numerical value;
a second means for executing the second specific notification corresponding to an actual total value of the bonus numerical value when a predetermined condition is met after the second specific notification is executed by the first means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the second specific notification can be executed in a game in which the awarding means does not award a bonus value .